2007 Pontiac Vibe Owner Manual M - GenVibe - Community … · How to Use This Manual Many people...

Seats and Restraint Systems ....................... 7Front Seats .............................................. 8Rear Seats ............................................. 16Safety Belts ............................................ 18Child Restraints ...................................... 37Airbag System ........................................ 63Restraint System Check ......................... 82

Features and Controls ................................ 85Keys ....................................................... 87Doors and Locks .................................... 92Windows ................................................ 98Theft-Deterrent Systems ....................... 100Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ..... 102Mirrors .................................................. 121OnStar® System ................................... 123Storage Areas ...................................... 127Sunroof ................................................ 131

Instrument Panel ....................................... 133Instrument Panel Overview ................... 136Climate Controls ................................... 152Warning Lights, Gages, and

Indicators .......................................... 158Audio System(s) ................................... 177

Driving Your Vehicle ................................. 221Your Driving, the Road, and

Your Vehicle ..................................... 222Towing ................................................. 259

Service and Appearance Care .................. 269Service ................................................. 272Fuel ...................................................... 274Checking Things Under the Hood ......... 280Bulb Replacement ................................ 315Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ... 321

2007 Pontiac Vibe Owner Manual M

1

Tires ..................................................... 322Appearance Care .................................. 354Vehicle Identification ............................. 363Electrical System .................................. 364Capacities and Specifications ................ 369Normal Maintenance

Replacement Parts ............................ 370

Maintenance Schedule .............................. 373Maintenance Schedule .......................... 374

Customer Assistance Information ............. 399Customer Assistance and Information ... 400Reporting Safety Defects ...................... 416

Index .......................................................... 419

2

GENERAL MOTORS, GM, the GM Emblem,PONTIAC, the PONTIAC Emblem and the nameVIBE are registered trademarks of General MotorsCorporation.

This manual includes the latest information at thetime it was printed. We reserve the right tomake changes after that time without furthernotice. For vehicles first sold in Canada, substitutethe name “General Motors of Canada Limited”for Pontiac Division whenever it appears inthis manual.

This manual describes features that may beavailable in this model, but your vehicle may nothave all of them. For example, more thanone entertainment system may be offered oryour vehicle may have been ordered without afront passenger or rear seats.

Keep this manual in the vehicle, so it will be thereif it is needed when on the road. If the vehicleis sold, leave this manual in it so the new ownercan use it.

Canadian OwnersA French language copy of this manual can beobtained from your dealer or from:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Litho in U.S.A.Part No. 15863402 A First Printing ©2006 General Motors Corporation. All Rights Reserved.

3

How to Use This ManualMany people read the owner manual frombeginning to end when they first receive their newvehicle. If this is done, it can help you learnabout the features and controls for the vehicle.Pictures and words work together in theowner manual to explain things.

IndexA good place to quickly locate information aboutthe vehicle is the Index in the back of the manual.It is an alphabetical list of what is in the manualand the page number where it can be found.

Safety Warnings and SymbolsThere are a number of safety cautions in thisbook. We use a box and the word CAUTION totell about things that could hurt you if you were toignore the warning.

{CAUTION:

These mean there is something that couldhurt you or other people.

In the caution area, we tell you what the hazard is.Then we tell you what to do to help avoid orreduce the hazard. Please read these cautions. Ifyou do not, you or others could be hurt.

You will also find acircle with a slashthrough it in this book.This safety symbolmeans “Do Not,” “DoNot do this” or “Do Notlet this happen.”

4

Vehicle Damage WarningsAlso, in this manual you will find these notices:

Notice: These mean there is somethingthat could damage your vehicle.

A notice tells about something that can damagethe vehicle. Many times, this damage would not becovered by your vehicle’s warranty, and it couldbe costly. But the notice will tell what to do to helpavoid the damage.

When you read other manuals, you might seeCAUTION and NOTICE warnings in different colorsor in different words.

There are also warning labels on the vehicle. Theyuse the same words, CAUTION or NOTICE.

Vehicle SymbolsThe vehicle has components and labels that usesymbols instead of text. Symbols are shown alongwith the text describing the operation or informationrelating to a specific component, control, message,gage, or indicator.

If you need help figuring out a specific name of acomponent, gage, or indicator, reference thefollowing topics:

• Seats and Restraint Systems in Section 1

• Features and Controls in Section 2

• Instrument Panel Overview in Section 3

• Climate Controls in Section 3

• Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators inSection 3

• Audio System(s) in Section 3

• Engine Compartment Overview in Section 5

5

These are some examples of symbols that may be found on the vehicle:

6

Front Seats ..................................................... 8Manual Seats ................................................ 8Driver Seat Height Adjuster ........................... 9Reclining Seatbacks .................................... 10Head Restraints .......................................... 13Passenger Folding Seatback ....................... 14

Rear Seats .................................................... 16Rear Seat Operation ................................... 16

Safety Belts .................................................. 18Safety Belts: They Are for Everyone ........... 18Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................. 22How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............. 23Driver Position ............................................. 24Shoulder Belt Height Adjustment ................. 31Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy .............. 32Right Front Passenger Position ................... 32Rear Seat Passengers ................................ 33Safety Belt Pretensioners ............................ 36Safety Belt Extender ................................... 36

Child Restraints ............................................ 37Older Children ............................................. 37Infants and Young Children ......................... 40

Child Restraint Systems .............................. 43Where to Put the Restraint .......................... 47Lower Anchors and Tethers for

Children (LATCH) .................................... 49Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear

Seat Position ........................................... 56Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position .................................. 58Airbag System .............................................. 63

Where Are the Airbags? .............................. 66When Should an Airbag Inflate? .................. 70What Makes an Airbag Inflate? ................... 71How Does an Airbag Restrain? ................... 72What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................... 72Passenger Sensing System ......................... 74Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ...... 80Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle .......................... 81Restraint System Check ............................... 82

Checking the Restraint Systems .................. 82Replacing Restraint System Parts After

a Crash ................................................... 83

Section 1 Seats and Restraint Systems

7

Front Seats

Manual Seats

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

Lift the bar located under the front of the seat tounlock it. Slide the seat to where you want itand release the bar. Try to move the seat with yourbody to be sure the seat is locked in place.

8

Driver Seat Height Adjuster The driver seat height adjuster is located on theoutboard side of the seat. To raise the seat, pull upon the lever repeatedly until the seat is at thedesired height. To lower the seat, push down onthe lever repeatedly until the seat is at the desiredheight.

It is easier to use the adjuster when the seat isunoccupied.

9

Reclining Seatbacks

{CAUTION:

You can lose control of the vehicle if youtry to adjust a manual driver’s seat whilethe vehicle is moving. The suddenmovement could startle and confuse you,or make you push a pedal when you donot want to. Adjust the driver’s seat onlywhen the vehicle is not moving.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

The seats have manual reclining seatbacks. Thelever used to operate them is located on theoutboard side of the seats.

10

To recline the seatback, do the following:

1. Lift the recline lever.

2. Move the seatback to the desired position,then release the lever to lock the seatbackin place.

3. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

To return the seatback to an upright position, dothe following:

1. Lift the lever fully without applying pressure tothe seatback and the seatback will return tothe upright position.

2. Push and pull on the seatback to make sure itis locked.

11

{CAUTION:

Sitting in a reclined position when yourvehicle is in motion can be dangerous.Even if you buckle up, your safety beltscannot do their job when you are reclinedlike this.The shoulder belt cannot do its jobbecause it will not be against your body.Instead, it will be in front of you. In acrash, you could go into it, receiving neckor other injuries.The lap belt cannot do its job either. In acrash, the belt could go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at your pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries.For proper protection when the vehicle isin motion, have the seatback upright.Then sit well back in the seat and wearyour safety belt properly.

Do not have a seatback reclined if your vehicle ismoving.

12

Head Restraints

Adjust the head restraint so that the top of therestraint is at the same height as the occupant’shead. This position reduces the chance of aneck injury in a crash.

Pull the head restraint upto raise it. To lower thehead restraint, press thebutton, located on thetop of the seatback,and push the headrestraint down.

The rear seats may have head restraints thatcan be adjusted in height like the front headrestraints.

13

Passenger Folding Seatback

{CAUTION:

If you fold the seatback forward to carrylonger objects, such as skis, be sure anysuch cargo is not near an airbag. In acrash, an inflating airbag might force thatobject toward a person. This could causesevere injury or even death. Secureobjects away from the area in which anairbag would inflate. For moreinformation, see Where Are the Airbags?on page 66 and Loading Your Vehicle onpage 253.

{CAUTION:

Things you put on this seatback canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash. Remove or secureall items before driving.

You can fold the front passenger’s seatback downto allow for more cargo space or as a temporarytable while the vehicle is stopped. When thearea is not being used for more cargo space, theseatback should be placed in the locked,upright position.

To fold the seatback down, do the following:

1. Lower the head restraint to the lowest positionand make sure the seatback is at the mostupright position and locked.

14

2. Pull up on one of thelevers located oneither side of theback of thepassenger’sseatback.

3. Fold the seatback down.

To raise the seatback, do the following:

1. Pull up on one of the levers located on eitherside of the back of the passenger’s seatback.

2. Pull the seatback up and push it back to lockit into place. Make sure the safety belt is nottwisted or caught in the seatback.

3. Push and pull the top of the seatback to besure it is locked into position.

4. Use the reclining front seatback lever toadjust the seatback to a comfortable position.

15

Rear Seats

Rear Seat OperationYou can fold either side of the seatback down formore cargo space. The rear right side seatbackcan also be used as a temporary table whilethe vehicle is stopped. Make sure the frontseatback is not reclined or in the rearward mostposition. If it is, the rear seatback will not fold downall the way.

{CAUTION:

A rear seatback folded forward, or anyother object contacting or pressing thefront seatback may affect the properfunctioning of the passenger sensingsystem. See Passenger Sensing Systemon page 74.

To fold either seatback down, do the following:1. Pull up on the lock

release knob,located on the topoutboard sideof the seatbacks.

Notice: Folding a rear seat with the safetybelts still fastened may cause damage to theseat or the safety belts. Always unbucklethe safety belts and return them to their normalstowed position before folding a rear seat.

2. Fold the seatback down. Each seatback canbe folded separately.

16

To raise the seatback, do the following:

{CAUTION:

A safety belt that is improperly routed, notproperly attached, or twisted will notprovide the protection needed in a crash.The person wearing the belt could beseriously injured. After raising the rearseatback, always check to be sure that thesafety belts are properly routed andattached, and are not twisted.

{CAUTION:

If the seatback is not locked, it couldmove forward in a sudden stop or crash.That could cause injury to the personsitting there. Always push and pull on theseatback to be sure it is locked.

1. Pull the seatback up and push it back to lockit into place. Make sure the safety belts arenot twisted or caught in the seatback.

2. Push and pull the top of the seatback to besure it is locked into position.

17

Safety Belts

Safety Belts: They Are for EveryoneThis part of the manual tells you how to usesafety belts properly. It also tells you some thingsyou should not do with safety belts.

{CAUTION:

Do not let anyone ride where he or shecannot wear a safety belt properly. If youare in a crash and you are not wearing asafety belt, your injuries can be muchworse. You can hit things inside thevehicle or be ejected from it. You can beseriously injured or killed. In the samecrash, you might not be, if you arebuckled up. Always fasten your safetybelt, and check that your passengers’belts are fastened properly too.

{CAUTION:

It is extremely dangerous to ride in acargo area, inside or outside of a vehicle.In a collision, people riding in these areasare more likely to be seriously injured orkilled. Do not allow people to ride in anyarea of your vehicle that is not equippedwith seats and safety belts. Be sureeveryone in your vehicle is in a seat andusing a safety belt properly.

Your vehicle has a lightthat comes on as areminder to buckle up.See Safety BeltReminder Light onpage 161.

18

In most states and in all Canadian provinces,the law says to wear safety belts. Here iswhy: They work.

You never know if you will be in a crash. If you dohave a crash, you do not know if it will be abad one.

A few crashes are mild, and some crashes can beso serious that even buckled up, a personwould not survive. But most crashes are inbetween. In many of them, people who buckle upcan survive and sometimes walk away. Withoutbelts they could have been badly hurt or killed.

After more than 40 years of safety belts invehicles, the facts are clear. In most crashesbuckling up does matter... a lot!

Why Safety Belts WorkWhen you ride in or on anything, you go as fastas it goes.

Take the simplest vehicle. Suppose it is just aseat on wheels.

19

Put someone on it. Get it up to speed. Then stop the vehicle. Therider does not stop.

20

The person keeps going until stopped bysomething. In a real vehicle, it could be thewindshield...

or the instrument panel...

21

or the safety belts!

With safety belts, you slow down as the vehicledoes. You get more time to stop. You stopover more distance, and your strongest bonestake the forces. That is why safety beltsmake such good sense.

Questions and Answers AboutSafety Belts

Q: Will I be trapped in the vehicle after anaccident if I am wearing a safety belt?

A: You could be — whether you are wearing asafety belt or not. But you can unbuckle asafety belt, even if you are upside down. Andyour chance of being conscious during andafter an accident, so you can unbuckle and getout, is much greater if you are belted.

Q: If my vehicle has airbags, why should Ihave to wear safety belts?

A: Airbags are supplemental systems only; sothey work with safety belts — not instead ofthem. Every airbag system ever offeredfor sale has required the use of safety belts.Even if you are in a vehicle that has airbags,you still have to buckle up to get the mostprotection. That is true not only in frontalcollisions, but especially in side and othercollisions.

22

Q: If I am a good driver, and I never drive farfrom home, why should I wear safety belts?

A: You may be an excellent driver, but if you arein an accident — even one that is not yourfault — you and your passengers can be hurt.Being a good driver does not protect youfrom things beyond your control, such as baddrivers.

Most accidents occur within 25 miles (40 km)of home. And the greatest number ofserious injuries and deaths occur at speeds ofless than 40 mph (65 km/h).

Safety belts are for everyone.

How to Wear Safety Belts ProperlyThis part is only for people of adult size.

Be aware that there are special things to knowabout safety belts and children. And thereare different rules for smaller children and babies.If a child will be riding in your vehicle, seeOlder Children on page 37 or Infants and YoungChildren on page 40. Follow those rules foreveryone’s protection.

First, you will want to know which restraintsystems your vehicle has.

We will start with the driver position.

23

Driver Position

Lap-Shoulder BeltThe driver has a lap-shoulder belt. Here is how towear it properly.

1. Close and lock the door.

2. Adjust the seat so you can sit up straight. Tosee how, see “Seats” in the Index.

3. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt acrossyou. Do not let it get twisted.

The lap-shoulder belt may lock if you pull thebelt across you very quickly. If this happens,let the belt go back slightly to unlock it.Then pull the belt across you more slowly.

4. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks.Pull up on the latch plate to make sure it issecure. If the belt is not long enough,see Safety Belt Extender on page 36.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Move the shoulder belt height adjuster to theheight that is right for you. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash. SeeShoulder Belt Height Adjustment on page 31.

24

6. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt. It may be necessary to pullstitching on the safety belt through the latchplate to fully tighten the lap belt on smalleroccupants.

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the strong pelvic bones.And you would be less likely to slide under the lapbelt. If you slid under it, the belt would apply force atyour abdomen. This could cause serious or evenfatal injuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stopor crash.

25

Q: What is wrong with this?

A: The shoulder belt is too loose. It will not givenearly as much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

26


A: The lap belt is too loose. It will not give nearlyas much protection this way.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your lap beltis too loose. In a crash, you could slideunder the lap belt and apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious oreven fatal injuries. The lap belt should beworn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the thighs.

27


A: The belt is buckled in the wrong place.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if your belt isbuckled in the wrong place like this. In acrash, the belt would go up over yourabdomen. The belt forces would be there,not at the pelvic bones. This could causeserious internal injuries. Always buckleyour belt into the buckle nearest you.

28


A: The shoulder belt is worn under the arm. Itshould be worn over the shoulder at all times.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured if you wearthe shoulder belt under your arm. In acrash, your body would move too farforward, which would increase the chanceof head and neck injury. Also, the beltwould apply too much force to the ribs,which are not as strong as shoulderbones. You could also severely injureinternal organs like your liver or spleen.

29


A: The belt is twisted across the body.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously injured by a twistedbelt. In a crash, you would not have thefull width of the belt to spread impactforces. If a belt is twisted, make it straightso it can work properly, or ask your dealerto fix it.

30

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.The belt should go back out of the way.

Before you close the door, be sure the belt is outof the way. If you slam the door on it, you candamage both the belt and your vehicle.

Shoulder Belt Height AdjustmentBefore you begin to drive, move the shoulder beltheight adjuster to the height that is right for you.

Adjust the height so that the shoulder portion ofthe belt is centered on your shoulder. Thebelt should be away from your face and neck, butnot falling off your shoulder. Improper shoulderbelt height adjustment could reduce theeffectiveness of the safety belt in a crash.

To move it down,squeeze the button (A)and move the heightadjuster to the desiredposition. You canmove the heightadjuster up just bypushing up onthe shoulder belt guide.

After you move the height adjuster to where youwant it, try to move it down without squeezingthe release button to make sure it has locked intoposition.

31

Safety Belt Use During PregnancySafety belts work for everyone, including pregnantwomen. Like all occupants, they are more likelyto be seriously injured if they do not wearsafety belts.

A pregnant woman should wear a lap-shoulderbelt, and the lap portion should be worn as low aspossible, below the rounding, throughout thepregnancy.

The best way to protect the fetus is to protect themother. When a safety belt is worn properly, itis more likely that the fetus will not be hurtin a crash. For pregnant women, as for anyone,the key to making safety belts effective is wearingthem properly.

Right Front Passenger PositionTo learn how to wear the right front passenger’ssafety belt properly, see Driver Position onpage 24.

The right front passenger’s safety belt works thesame way as the driver’s safety belt — exceptfor one thing. If you ever pull the shoulder portionof the belt out all the way, you will engage thechild restraint locking feature. If this happens, letthe belt go back all the way and start again.

32

Rear Seat PassengersIt is very important for rear seat passengers tobuckle up! Accident statistics show that unbeltedpeople in the rear seat are hurt more often incrashes than those who are wearing safety belts.

Rear passengers who are not safety beltedcan be thrown out of the vehicle in a crash. Andthey can strike others in the vehicle who arewearing safety belts.

Lap-Shoulder BeltAll rear seat positions have lap-shoulder belts.Here is how to wear one properly. 1. Pick up the latch plate and pull the belt across

you. Do not let it get twisted.The shoulder belt may lock if you pull the beltacross you very quickly. If this happens, letthe belt go back slightly to unlock it. Then pullthe belt across you more slowly.

33

2. Push the latch plate into the buckle until itclicks. Pull up on the latch plate to makesure it is secure. If the buckle does not click,check to be sure that you are using thecorrect buckle. The buckle for the centerrear passenger position has the wordCENTER on it.When the shoulder belt is pulled out all theway, it will lock. If it does, let it go back all theway and start again.If the belt is not long enough, see Safety BeltExtender on page 36.Make sure the release button on the buckle ispositioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

3. To make the lap part tight, pull up on theshoulder belt.

34

The lap part of the belt should be worn low andsnug on the hips, just touching the thighs. In acrash, this applies force to the pelvic bones. Andyou would be less likely to slide under the lap belt.If you slid under it, the belt would apply force at yourabdomen. This could cause serious or even fatalinjuries. The shoulder belt should go over theshoulder and across the chest. These parts of thebody are best able to take belt restraining forces.The safety belt locks if there is a sudden stop ora crash.

{CAUTION:

You can be seriously hurt if your shoulderbelt is too loose. In a crash, you wouldmove forward too much, which couldincrease injury. The shoulder belt shouldfit against your body.

To unlatch the belt, push the button on the buckle.

35

Safety Belt PretensionersYour vehicle has safety belt pretensioners.Although you cannot see them, they are located onthe retractor part of the safety belts for the driverand right front passenger. They help the safetybelts reduce a person’s forward movement in amoderate to severe frontal or near frontal crash.

If the passenger sensing system detects that thereis not a passenger in the right front passengerposition, the safety belt pretensioner for thatposition will not activate. See Passenger SensingSystem on page 74.

Pretensioners work only once. If they activate in acrash, you will need to get new ones, andprobably other new parts for your safety beltsystem. See Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash on page 83.

Safety Belt ExtenderIf the vehicle’s safety belt will fasten around you,you should use it.

But if a safety belt is not long enough, your dealerwill order you an extender. When you go in to order

it, take the heaviest coat you will wear, so theextender will be long enough for you. To help avoidpersonal injury, do not let someone else use it, anduse it only for the seat it is made to fit. The extenderhas been designed for adults. Never use it forsecuring child seats. To wear it, just attach it to theregular safety belt. For more information, see theinstruction sheet that comes with the extender.

Always disconnect the extender from the safety beltafter you use it so that the airbag will work properlythe next time someone uses that seat.

When you use a safety belt extender in the rightfront passenger’s seat, make sure the passengerairbag status indicator shows “ON.” SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 163. Ifthe indicator shows “OFF,” disconnect theextender’s latch from the buckle then reconnectthe safety belt. Make sure the indicator light shows“ON”, then reconnect the safety belt extender. Ifyou use the safety belt extender while the indicatorlight shows “OFF,” the right front passenger’sfrontal and seat-mounted side impact airbags(if equipped) may not activate correctly. SeeAirbag System on page 63 for important safetyinformation about your airbags.

36

Child Restraints

Older Children

Older children who have outgrown booster seatsshould wear the vehicle’s safety belts.

Q: What is the proper way to wear safetybelts?

A: If possible, an older child should wear alap-shoulder belt and get the additionalrestraint a shoulder belt can provide. Theshoulder belt should not cross the faceor neck. The lap belt should fit snugly belowthe hips, just touching the top of the thighs. Itshould never be worn over the abdomen,which could cause severe or even fatal internalinjuries in a crash.

According to accident statistics, children are saferwhen properly restrained in the rear seatingpositions than in the front seating positions.

In a crash, children who are not buckled up canstrike other people who are buckled up, or can bethrown out of the vehicle. Older children needto use safety belts properly.

37

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here two children are wearing the samebelt. The belt cannot properly spread theimpact forces. In a crash, the two childrencan be crushed together and seriouslyinjured. A belt must be used by onlyone person at a time.

Q: What if a child is wearing a lap-shoulderbelt, but the child is so small that theshoulder belt is very close to the child’sface or neck?

A: If the child is sitting in a seat next to a window,move the child toward the center of the vehicle.If the child is sitting in the center rear seatpassenger position, move the child toward thesafety belt buckle. In either case, be sure thatthe shoulder belt still is on the child’s shoulder,so that in a crash the child’s upper body wouldhave the restraint that belts provide.

38

{CAUTION:

Never do this.

Here a child is sitting in a seat that has alap-shoulder belt, but the shoulder part isbehind the child. If the child wears thebelt in this way, in a crash the child mightslide under the belt. The belt’s forcewould then be applied right on the child’sabdomen. That could cause serious orfatal injuries.

Wherever the child sits, the lap portion of the beltshould be worn low and snug on the hips, justtouching the child’s thighs. This applies belt forceto the child’s pelvic bones in a crash.

39

Infants and Young ChildrenEveryone in a vehicle needs protection! Thisincludes infants and all other children. Neither thedistance traveled nor the age and size of thetraveler changes the need, for everyone, to usesafety restraints. In fact, the law in every statein the United States and in every Canadianprovince says children up to some age must berestrained while in a vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten. Never leave childrenunattended in a vehicle and never allowchildren to play with the safety belts.

Every time infants and young children ride invehicles, they should have the protection providedby appropriate restraints. Young children shouldnot use the vehicle’s adult safety belts alone,unless there is no other choice. Instead, they needto use a child restraint.

{CAUTION:

People should never hold a baby in theirarms while riding in a vehicle. A babydoes not weigh much — until a crash.During a crash a baby will become soheavy it is not possible to hold it. Forexample, in a crash at only 25 mph(40 km/h), a 12 lb (5.5 kg) baby willsuddenly become a 240 lb (110 kg) forceon a person’s arms. A baby should besecured in an appropriate restraint.

40

{CAUTION:

Children who are up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer protection foradults and older children, but not foryoung children and infants.

CAUTION: (Continued)


Neither the vehicle’s safety belt systemnor its airbag system is designed forthem. Young children and infants need theprotection that a child restraint systemcan provide.

41

Q: What are the different types of add-onchild restraints?

A: Add-on child restraints, which are purchased bythe vehicle’s owner, are available in four basictypes. Selection of a particular restraint shouldtake into consideration not only the child’sweight, height, and age but also whether or notthe restraint will be compatible with the motorvehicle in which it will be used.

For most basic types of child restraints, thereare many different models available. Whenpurchasing a child restraint, be sure it isdesigned to be used in a motor vehicle. If it is,the restraint will have a label saying that itmeets federal motor vehicle safety standards.

The restraint manufacturer’s instructions thatcome with the restraint state the weight andheight limitations for a particular child restraint.In addition, there are many kinds of restraintsavailable for children with special needs.

{CAUTION:

Newborn infants need complete support,including support for the head and neck.This is necessary because a newborninfant’s neck is weak and its head weighsso much compared with the rest of itsbody. In a crash, an infant in a rear-facingseat settles into the restraint, so the crashforces can be distributed across thestrongest part of an infant’s body, theback and shoulders. Infants alwaysshould be secured in appropriate infantrestraints.

42

{CAUTION:

The body structure of a young child isquite unlike that of an adult or older child,for whom the safety belts are designed. Ayoung child’s hip bones are still so smallthat the vehicle’s regular safety belt maynot remain low on the hip bones, as itshould. Instead, it may settle up aroundthe child’s abdomen. In a crash, the beltwould apply force on a body area that isunprotected by any bony structure. Thisalone could cause serious or fatal injuries.Young children always should be securedin appropriate child restraints.

Child Restraint Systems

An infant car bed (A), a special bed made for usein a motor vehicle, is an infant restraint systemdesigned to restrain or position a child on acontinuous flat surface. Make sure that the infant’shead rests toward the center of the vehicle.

43

A rear-facing infant seat (B) provides restraintwith the seating surface against the back of theinfant. The harness system holds the infantin place and, in a crash, acts to keep the infantpositioned in the restraint.

A forward-facing child seat (C-E) provides restraintfor the child’s body with the harness and alsosometimes with surfaces such as T-shapedor shelf-like shields.

44

A booster seat (F-G) is a child restraint designedto improve the fit of the vehicle’s safety beltsystem. Some booster seats have a shoulder beltpositioner, and some high-back booster seatshave a five-point harness. A booster seat can alsohelp a child to see out the window.

Q: How Should I Use a Child Restraint?

A: A child restraint system is any device designedfor use in a motor vehicle to restrain, seat, orposition children. A built-in child restraintsystem is a permanent part of the motorvehicle. An add-on child restraint system is aportable one, which is purchased by thevehicle’s owner. To help reduce injuries, anadd-on child restraint must be secured inthe vehicle. With built-in or add-on childrestraints, the child has to be secured withinthe child restraint.

When choosing an add-on child restraint, besure the child restraint is designed to beused in a vehicle. If it is, it will have a labelsaying that it meets federal motor vehiclesafety standards. Then follow the instructionsfor the restraint. You may find theseinstructions on the restraint itself or in abooklet, or both.

45

Securing an Add-on Child Restraint inthe Vehicle

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killed ina crash if the child restraint is not properlysecured in the vehicle. Make sure the childrestraint is properly installed in the vehicleusing the vehicle’s safety belt or LATCHsystem, following the instructions thatcame with that restraint, and also theinstructions in this manual.

To help reduce the chance of injury, the childrestraint must be secured in the vehicle. Childrestraint systems must be secured in vehicle seatsby lap belts or the lap belt portion of a lap-shoulderbelt, or by the LATCH system.

See Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 49 for more information. A childcan be endangered in a crash if the childrestraint is not properly secured in the vehicle.

When securing an add-on child restraint, refer tothe instructions that come with the restraintwhich may be on the restraint itself or in a booklet,or both, and to this manual. The child restraintinstructions are important, so if they are notavailable, obtain a replacement copy from themanufacturer.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

46

Securing the Child Within the ChildRestraintThere are several systems for securing the childwithin the child restraint. One system, thethree-point harness, has straps that come downover each of the infant’s shoulders and buckletogether at the crotch. The five-point harnesssystem has two shoulder straps, two hip straps, anda crotch strap. A shield may take the place of hipstraps. A T-shaped shield has shoulder straps thatare attached to a flat pad which rests low againstthe child’s body. A shelf- or armrest-type shield hasstraps that are attached to a wide, shelf-like shieldthat swings up or to the side.

{CAUTION:

A child can be seriously injured or killedin a crash if the child is not properlysecured in the child restraint. Make surethe childis properly secured, following theinstructions that came with that restraint.

Because there are different systems, it is importantto refer to the instructions that come with therestraint. A child can be endangered in a crash ifthe child is not properly secured in the childrestraint.

Where to Put the RestraintAccident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat, and an older child ridingin a booster seat.

47

Your vehicle has a rear seat that will accommodatea rear-facing child restraint. A label on your sunvisor says, “Never put a rear-facing child seatin the front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:

A child in a rear-facing child restraint canbe seriously injured or killed if the rightfront passenger’s airbag inflates. This isbecause the back of the rear-facing childrestraint would be very close to theinflating airbag.

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag



(if equipped) under certain conditions,no system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.

If you need to secure a forward-facingchild restraint in the right front seat,always move the front passenger seat asfar back as it will go. It is better to securethe child restraint in a rear seat.

Wherever you install a child restraint, be sure tosecure the child restraint properly.

Keep in mind that an unsecured child restraint canmove around in a collision or sudden stop andinjure people in the vehicle. Be sure to properlysecure any child restraint in your vehicle — evenwhen no child is in it.

48

Lower Anchors and Tethers forChildren (LATCH)The LATCH system holds a child restraint duringdriving or in a crash. This system is designedto make installation of a child restraint easier. TheLATCH system uses anchors in the vehicle andattachments on the child restraint that are made foruse with the LATCH system.

Make sure that a LATCH-compatible child restraintis properly installed using the anchors, or usethe vehicle’s safety belts to secure the restraint,following the instructions that came with thatrestraint, and also the instructions in this manual.When installing a child restraint with a toptether, you must also use either the lower anchorsor the safety belts to properly secure the childrestraint. A child restraint must never be installedusing only the top tether and anchor.

In order to use the LATCH system in your vehicle,you need a child restraint has LATCH attachments.The child restraint manufacturer will provide youwith instructions on how to use the child restraintand its attachments. The following explainshow to attach a child restraint with theseattachments in your vehicle.

Not all vehicle seating positions or child restraintshave lower anchors and attachments or toptether anchors and attachments.

Lower Anchors

Lower anchors (A) are metal bars built into thevehicle. There are two lower anchors for eachLATCH seating position that will accommodate achild restraint with lower attachments (B).

49

Top Tether Anchor

A top tether (A, C) anchors the top of the childrestraint to the vehicle. A top tether anchor is builtinto the vehicle. The top tether attachment (B)on the child restraint connects to the top tetheranchor in the vehicle in order to reduce the forwardmovement and rotation of the child restraintduring driving or in a crash.

Your child restraint may have a single tether (A)or a dual tether (C). Either will have a singleattachment (B) to secure the top tether tothe anchor.

Some child restraints with top tethers are designedfor use with or without the top tether beingattached. Others require the top tether always tobe attached. In Canada, the law requires thatforward-facing child restraints have a top tether,and that the tether be attached. In the UnitedStates, some child restraints also have atop tether. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions for your child restraint.

If the child restraint does not have a top tether,one can be obtained, in kit form, for manychild restraints. Ask the child restraintmanufacturer whether or not a kit is available.

50

Lower Anchor and Top Tether AnchorLocations

i (Top Tether Anchor):Seating positions withtop tether anchors.

j (Lower Anchor):Seating positions withtwo lower anchors.

To assist you in locatingthe lower anchors, eachseating position withlower anchors hastwo labels, near thecrease between theseatback and the seatcushion.

To assist you in locatingthe top tether anchors,the top tether anchorsymbol is located on thetrim cover.

The top tether anchors are located on the floor ofthe rear cargo area. Open the trim cover toaccess the anchors. You may have to fold backthe cargo mat to access the top tether anchors.

Rear Seat

51

Be sure to use an anchor located on the sameside of the vehicle as the seating positionwhere the child restraint will be placed.

Do not secure a child restraint in the right frontpassenger’s position if a national or local lawrequires that the top tether be attached, or if theinstructions that come with the child restraintsay that the top tether must be attached. There isno place to attach the top tether in this position.

Accident statistics show that children are saferif they are restrained in the rear rather thanthe front seat. See Where to Put the Restraint onpage 47 for additional information.

Securing a Child Restraint Designed forthe LATCH System

{CAUTION:

If a LATCH-type child restraint is notattached to anchors, the restraint will notbe able to protect the child correctly. In acrash, the child could be seriously injuredor killed. Make sure that a LATCH-typechild restraint is properly installed usingthe anchors, or use the vehicle’s safetybelts to secure the restraint, following theinstructions that came with that restraint,and also the instructions in this manual.

52

{CAUTION:

Each top tether anchor and lower anchorin the vehicle is designed to hold onlyone child restraint. Attaching more thanone child restraint to a single anchorcould cause the anchor or attachment tocome loose or even break during a crash.A child or others could be injured if thishappens. To help prevent injury to peopleand damage to your vehicle, attach onlyone child restraint per anchor.

{CAUTION:

Children can be seriously injured orstrangled if a shoulder belt is wrappedaround their neck and the safety beltcontinues to tighten.



Secure any unused safety belts behindthe child restraint so children cannotreach them. Pull the shoulder belt all theway out of the retractor to set the lock, ifyour vehicle has one, after the childrestraint has been installed. Be sure tofollow the instructions of the childrestraint manufacturer.

Notice: Contact between the child restraint orthe LATCH attachment parts and the vehicle’ssafety belt assembly may cause damage tothese parts. Make sure when securing unusedsafety belts behind the child restraint thatthere is no contact between the child restraintor the LATCH attachment parts and thevehicle’s safety belt assembly.

Folding an empty rear seat with the safetybelts secured may cause damage to the safetybelt or the seat. When removing the childrestraint, always remember to return the safetybelts to their normal, stowed position beforefolding the rear seat.

53

1. Attach and tighten the lower attachments tothe lower anchors. If the child restraint doesnot have lower attachments or the desiredseating position does not have lower anchors,secure the child restraint with the top tetherand the safety belts. Refer to your childrestraint manufacturer instructions and theinstructions in this manual.

1.1. Find the lower anchors for the desiredseating position.

1.2. Put the child restraint on the seat.1.3. Attach and tighten the lower

attachments on the child restraint to thelower anchors.

2. If the child restraint manufacturer recommendsthat the top tether be attached, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor,if equipped. Refer to the child restraintinstructions and the following steps:

2.1. Find the top tether anchor.2.2. You may have to fold back the cargo

mat to access the top tether anchors.2.3. Open the top tether anchor trim cover

to expose the anchor.2.4. Route, attach, and tighten the top tether

according to your child restraintinstructions and the followinginstructions:

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a singletether, route thetether over theseatback.

54

If the position you areusing does not have ahead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether over theseatback.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint andyou are using a dualtether, route thetether around the headrestraint.

If the position you areusing has an adjustablehead restraint and youare using a single tether,raise the head restraintand route the tetherunder the head restraintand in between the headrestraint posts.

3. Push and pull the child restraint in differentdirections to be sure it is secure.

55

Securing a Child Restraint in aRear Seat PositionIf your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 49.

If your child restraint does not have the LATCHsystem, you will be using the lap-shoulderbelt to secure the child restraint in this position. Besure to follow the instructions that came with thechild restraint. Secure the child in the child restraintwhen and as the instructions say.

1. Put the child restraint on the seat.

2. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

3. Buckle the belt. If the buckle does not click,check to be sure that you are using thecorrect buckle. The buckle for the centerrear passenger position has the wordCENTER on it.Make sure the release button is positioned soyou would be able to unbuckle the safetybelt quickly if you ever had to.

56

4. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

5. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt.

57

6. If your child restraint manufacturerrecommends using a top tether, attach andtighten the top tether to the top tether anchor.Refer to the instructions that came with thechild restraint and to Lower Anchors andTethers for Children (LATCH) on page 49.


To remove the child restraint, if your child restrainthas a top tether, disconnect the top tether fromthe top tether anchor. Unbuckle the vehicle’ssafety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

Securing a Child Restraint in theRight Front Seat PositionYour vehicle has a right front passenger’s airbag.A rear seat is a safer place to secure aforward-facing child restraint. See Where to Putthe Restraint on page 47.

In addition, your vehicle has the passengersensing system. The passenger sensing system isdesigned to turn off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag, seat-mounted side impact airbag (ifequipped), and the safety belt pretensioner,when a child in a child restraint or booster seat isdetected. See Passenger Sensing System onpage 74 and Passenger Airbag Status Indicator onpage 163 for more information about theconditions that could affect the passenger sensingsystem and other important safety information.

58

Your vehicle has a label on the sun visor thatsays, “Never put a rear-facing child seat inthe front.” This is because the risk to therear-facing child is so great, if the airbag deploys.

{CAUTION:


Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (ifequipped) under certain conditions, no



system is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


If you need to secure a forward-facing childrestraint in the right front seat position, move theseat as far back as it will go before securingthe forward-facing child restraint. See ManualSeats on page 8.

59

If your child restraint has the LATCH system, seeLower Anchors and Tethers for Children(LATCH) on page 49.

There is no top tether anchor at the right frontseating position. Do not secure a child seat in thisposition if a national or local law requires thatthe top tether be anchored or if the instructionsthat come with the child restraint say that the toptether must be anchored. See Lower Anchorsand Tethers for Children (LATCH) on page 49 ifthe child restraint has a top tether.

You will be using the lap-shoulder belt to securethe child restraint in this position. Be sure to followthe instructions that came with the child restraint.

Secure the child in the child restraint when and asthe instructions say.

1. Your vehicle has airbags. See PassengerSensing System on page 74. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin a rear seat, even if the airbags areoff. If your child restraint is forward-facing,move the seat as far back as it will go beforesecuring the child restraint in this seat.See Manual Seats on page 8.When the passenger sensing system hasturned off the right front passenger’s frontalairbag, seat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped), and the safety belt pretensioner,the OFF indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator should light and stay lit whenyou turn the ignition to ON. See PassengerAirbag Status Indicator on page 163.

2. Put the child restraint on the seat.

3. Pick up the latch plate, and run the lap andshoulder portions of the vehicle’s safety beltthrough or around the restraint. The childrestraint instructions will show you how.

60

4. Buckle the belt. Make sure the release buttonis positioned so you would be able to unbucklethe safety belt quickly if you ever had to.

5. Pull the rest of the shoulder belt all the wayout of the retractor to set the lock.

61

6. To tighten the belt, push down on the childrestraint, pull the shoulder portion of the beltto tighten the lap portion of the belt, andfeed the shoulder belt back into the retractor.If you are using a forward-facing childrestraint, you may find it helpful to use yourknee to push down on the child restraintas you tighten the belt. You should not be ableto pull more of the belt from the retractoronce the lock has been set.


8. If the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the airbags and safety belt pretensioner,the OFF indicator in the passenger airbagstatus indicator will be lit and stay lit when thekey is turned to ON.

If a child restraint has been installed and the ONindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint with the ignition key in the ACC(Accessory) or LOCK position.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the ON indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the seatback andadjust the seat cushion if possible. Also make surethe child restraint is not trapped under thevehicle head restraint. If this happens, adjust thehead restraint.

62

If the ON indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

If the airbag readiness light and the OFF light inthe passenger airbag status indicator comeon together, it may mean there is a malfunction inthe passenger sensing system. Secure thechild in the child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer.

To remove the child restraint, unbuckle thevehicle’s safety belt and let it go back all the way.The safety belt will move freely again and beready to work for an adult or larger childpassenger.

Airbag SystemYour vehicle has the following airbags:

• A frontal airbag for the driver.

• A frontal airbag for the right front passenger.

Your vehicle may also have the following airbags:

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for thedriver.

• A seat-mounted side impact airbag for theright front passenger.

• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for thedriver and the passenger seated directlybehind the driver.

• A roof-mounted side impact airbag for theright front passenger and the passengerseated directly behind that passenger.

If your vehicle has seat-mounted side impactairbags, it will say SRS-SIDE AIRBAG on a labelon the side of the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s seat closest to the door.

If your vehicle has roof-mounted side impactairbags, it will say SRS CURTAIN AIRBAG on thetrim on the side of the windshield.

63

Airbags are designed to supplement the protectionprovided by safety belts. Even though today’sairbags are also designed to help reduce the riskof injury from the force of an inflating bag, allairbags must inflate very quickly to do their job.

Here are the most important things to know aboutthe airbag system:

{CAUTION:

You can be severely injured or killed in acrash if you are not wearing your safetybelt — even if you have airbags. Wearingyour safety belt during a crash helpsreduce your chance of hitting thingsinside the vehicle or being ejected from it.Airbags are “supplemental restraints” tothe safety belts. All airbags are designedto work with safety belts, but do notreplace them.

{CAUTION:

Frontal airbags for the driver andpassenger are designed to deploy inmoderate to severe frontal and nearfrontal crashes. They are not designed toinflate in rollover, rear crashes, or in manyside crashes. And, for some unrestrainedoccupants, frontal airbags may provideless protection in frontal crashes thanmore forceful airbags have provided inthe past.

Side impact airbags are designed toinflate in moderate to severe crasheswhere something hits the side of yourvehicle. They are not designed to inflate infrontal, in rollover, or in rear crashes.

Everyone in your vehicle should wear asafety belt properly — whether or notthere is an airbag for that person.

64

{CAUTION:

Both frontal and side impact airbagsinflate with great force, faster than theblink of an eye. If you are too close to aninflating airbag, as you would be if youwere leaning forward, it could seriouslyinjure you. Safety belts help keep you inposition for airbag inflation before andduring a crash. Always wear your safetybelt even with frontal airbags. The drivershould sit as far back as possible whilestill maintaining control of the vehicle.Occupants should not lean on or sleepagainst the door.

{CAUTION:

Anyone who is up against, or very closeto, any airbag when it inflates can beseriously injured or killed. Airbags pluslap-shoulder belts offer the bestprotection for adults, but not for youngchildren and infants. Neither the vehicle’ssafety belt system nor its airbag system isdesigned for them. Young children andinfants need the protection that a childrestraint system can provide. Alwayssecure children properly in your vehicle.To read how, see Older Children onpage 37 or Infants and Young Children onpage 40.

65

There is an airbagreadiness light on theinstrument panel, whichshows the airbagsymbol.

The system checks the airbag electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. See Airbag Readiness Light onpage 162 for more information.

Where Are the Airbags?

The driver’s frontal airbag is in the middle of thesteering wheel.

66

The right front passenger’s frontal airbag is in theinstrument panel on the passenger’s side.

If your vehicle has a seat-mounted side impactairbag for the driver, it is in the side of the driver’sseatback closest to the door.

67

If your vehicle has a seat-mounted side impactairbag for the right front passenger, it is in the sideof the passenger’s seatback closest to the door.

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the driver and the passenger seateddirectly behind the driver, it is in the ceiling abovethe side windows.

68

If your vehicle has a roof-mounted side impactairbag for the right front passenger and thepassenger seated directly behind that passenger,it is in the ceiling above the side windows.

{CAUTION:

If something is between an occupant andan airbag, the airbag might not inflateproperly or it might force the object intothat person causing severe injury or evendeath. The path of an inflating airbag mustbe kept clear. Do not put anythingbetween an occupant and an airbag, anddo not attach or put anything on thesteering wheel hub or on or near anyother airbag covering. If your vehicle hasroof-mounted side impact airbags, neversecure anything to the roof of yourvehicle by routing the rope or tie-downthrough any door or window opening. Ifyou do, the path of an inflating airbag willbe blocked. Do not let seat covers blockthe inflation path of a side impact airbag.The path of an inflating airbag must bekept clear.

69

When Should an Airbag Inflate?The driver’s and right front passenger’s frontalairbags are designed to inflate in moderate tosevere frontal or near-frontal crashes. But they aredesigned to inflate only if the impact exceeds apredetermined deployment threshold. Deploymentthresholds take into account a variety of desireddeployment and non-deployment events and areused to predict how severe a crash is likely to be intime for the airbags to inflate and help restrain theoccupants. Whether your frontal airbags will orshould deploy is not based on only how fast yourvehicle is traveling. It depends largely on what youhit, the direction of the impact, and how quickly yourvehicle slows down.

In addition, your vehicle has “dual stage” frontalairbags, which adjust the restraint accordingto crash severity. Your vehicle is equipped withelectronic frontal sensors, which help the sensingsystem distinguish between a moderate frontalimpact and a more severe frontal impact. Formoderate frontal impacts, these airbags inflate ata level less than full deployment. For moresevere frontal impacts, full deployment occurs.

Frontal airbags may inflate at different vehiclecrash speeds. For example:

• If the vehicle hits a stationary object, theairbags could inflate at a different crash speedthan if the vehicle hits a moving object.

• If the vehicle hits an object that deforms, theairbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits an object thatdoes not deform.

• If the vehicle hits a narrow object (like a pole),the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle hits a wide object(like a wall).

• If the vehicle goes into an object at an angle,the airbags could inflate at a different crashspeed than if the vehicle goes straight into theobject.

Frontal airbags for the driver and right frontpassenger may also deploy if a serious impactoccurs to the underside of your vehicle suchas hitting a curb, falling into a deep hole, or landinghard. The frontal airbags (driver and right frontpassenger) are not intended to inflate duringvehicle rollovers, rear impacts, or in many sideimpacts.

70

It is possible that, in a crash involving the front ofyour vehicle, only one of the two frontal airbagsin your vehicle will deploy. This is rare, but it canhappen in a crash just severe enough to makea frontal airbag inflate.

Side impact airbags are intended to inflate inmoderate to severe side crashes. A side impactairbag will inflate if the crash severity is above thesystem’s designed “threshold level.” Thethreshold level can vary with specific vehicledesign. Side impact airbags are not intended toinflate in frontal or near-frontal impacts, rollovers orin many rear impacts. Your vehicle has sensorswhich detect side impacts. These sensorssignal the appropriate side airbag to inflate. Bothside impact airbags (seat-mounted androof-mounted) are intended to deploy on the sideof the vehicle that is struck. It is possible that,in a crash involving the rear side of your vehicle,that only the roof-mounted airbag will deploy.

In any particular crash, no one can say whetheran airbag should have inflated simply becauseof the damage to a vehicle or because of what therepair costs were.

For frontal airbags, inflation is determined by whatthe vehicle hits, the angle of the impact, vehiclespeed, and how quickly the vehicle slows down infrontal and near-frontal impacts. For side impactairbags, inflation is determined by the location andseverity of the impact.

What Makes an Airbag Inflate?In an impact of sufficient severity, the airbagsensing system detects that the vehicle isin a crash. The sensing system triggers a releaseof gas from the inflator, which inflates theairbag. The inflator, airbag and related hardwareare all part of the airbag modules. Frontalairbag modules are located inside the steeringwheel and the instrument panel. For vehicles withseat-mounted side impact airbags, there arealso airbag modules in the side of the frontseatbacks closest to the door. For vehicles withroof-mounted side impact airbags, there arealso airbag modules in the ceiling of the vehicle,near the side window.

71

How Does an Airbag Restrain?In moderate to severe frontal or near frontalcollisions, even belted occupants can contact thesteering wheel or the instrument panel. Inmoderate to severe side collisions, even beltedoccupants can contact the inside of the vehicle.Airbags supplement the protection providedby safety belts. Airbags distribute the force of theimpact more evenly over the occupant’s upperbody, stopping the occupant more gradually. Butthe frontal airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including rollovers, rearimpacts, and many side impacts, primarily becausean occupant’s motion is not toward the airbag.Side impact airbags would not help you in manytypes of collisions, including many frontal ornear frontal collisions, rollovers, and rear impacts.

Airbags should never be regarded as anythingmore than a supplement to safety belts, and thenonly in moderate to severe frontal or near-frontalcollisions for the driver’s and right frontpassenger’s frontal airbags, and only in moderateto severe side collisions for vehicles with sideimpact airbags.

What Will You See After an AirbagInflates?After the frontal and seat-mounted side impactairbags inflate, they quickly deflate, so quickly thatsome people may not even realize an airbaginflated. Roof-mounted side impact airbags may stillbe at least partially inflated minutes after the vehiclecomes to rest. Some components of the airbagmodule — the steering wheel hub for the driver’sairbag, the instrument panel for the right frontpassenger’s bag, the side of the seatback closest tothe door for the seat-mounted side impact airbags(if equipped), and the garnish trim and the areaalong the ceiling of your vehicle near the sidewindows for the roof–mounted side impact airbags(if equipped) — may be hot for a short time. Theparts of the airbag that come into contact with youmay be warm, but not too hot to touch.

72

There may be some smoke and dust coming fromthe vents in the deflated airbags. Airbag inflationdoes not prevent the driver from seeing out of thewindshield or being able to steer the vehicle, nordoes it prevent people from leaving the vehicle.

{CAUTION:

When an airbag inflates, there may bedust in the air. This dust could causebreathing problems for people with ahistory of asthma or other breathingtrouble. To avoid this, everyone in thevehicle should get out as soon as it issafe to do so. If you have breathingproblems but cannot get out of the vehicleafter an airbag inflates, then get fresh airby opening a window or a door. If youexperience breathing problems followingan airbag deployment, you should seekmedical attention.

Your vehicle has a feature that may automaticallyunlock the doors, turn the interior lamps on,and turn the hazard warning flashers on when theairbags inflate. You can lock the doors, turn theinterior lamps off, and turn the hazard warningflashers off again by using the controls for thosefeatures.

In many crashes severe enough to inflate theairbag, windshields are broken by vehicledeformation. Additional windshield breakage mayalso occur from the right front passenger airbag.

• Airbags are designed to inflate only once. Afteran airbag inflates, you will need some newparts for the airbag system. If you do not getthem, the airbag system will not be there to helpprotect you in another crash. A new system willinclude airbag modules and possibly otherparts. The service manual for your vehiclecovers the need to replace other parts.

73

• Your vehicle has a crash sensing anddiagnostic module which records informationafter a crash. See Vehicle Data Collection andEvent Data Recorders on page 411.

• Let only qualified technicians work on theairbag system. Improper service can mean thatthe airbag system will not work properly. Seeyour dealer for service.

Passenger Sensing SystemYour vehicle has a passenger sensing system. Apassenger airbag status indicator on theinstrument panel will be visible when you turn yourignition key to ON.

The words ON and OFFwill be visible in thepassenger airbag statusindicator during thesystem check.

When the system check is complete, either theword ON or the word OFF will be visible dependingon whether the seat is occupied and/or theweight of the occupant. See Passenger AirbagStatus Indicator on page 163. The passengersensing system will turn off the right frontpassenger’s frontal airbag, seat-mounted sideimpact airbag (if equipped), and the safetybelt pretensioner under certain conditions. Thedriver’s airbags are not part of the passengersensing system.

The passenger sensing system works with sensorsthat are part of the right front passenger’s seatassembly and safety belt assembly. The sensorsare designed to detect the presence of aproperly-seated occupant and determine if the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag, seat-mounted sideimpact airbag (if equipped), and the safety beltpretensioner should be enabled (may inflate) or not.

74

Accident statistics show that children are safer ifthey are restrained in the rear rather than the frontseat. We recommend that child restraints besecured in a rear seat, including an infant riding ina rear-facing infant seat, a child riding in aforward-facing child seat and an older child ridingin a booster seat.


{CAUTION:




Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off thepassenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (ifequipped) under certain conditions, nosystem is fail-safe, and no one canguarantee that an airbag will not deployunder some unusual circumstance, eventhough it is turned off. We recommendthat rear-facing child restraints be securedin the rear seat, even if the airbag is off.


75

The passenger sensing system is designed to turnoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag,seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped),and the safety belt pretensioner if:

• The right front passenger seat is unoccupied.

• The system determines that a small childis present in a child restraint.

• The system determines that a small child ispresent in a booster seat.

• A right front passenger takes his/her weight offof the seat for a period of time.

• The right front passenger seat is occupied bya smaller person, such as a child who hasoutgrown child restraints.

• Or, if there is a critical problem with the airbagsystem or the passenger sensing system.

When the passenger sensing system has turnedoff the right front passenger’s frontal airbag,seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped),and the safety belt pretensioner, the OFF indicatorwill light and stay lit to remind you that theairbag is off.

If a child restraint has been installed and the ONindicator is lit, turn the vehicle off. Removethe child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall thechild restraint with the ignition key in the ACC orLOCK position, following the child restraintmanufacturer’s directions and refer to Securing aChild Restraint in the Right Front Seat Positionon page 58.

If, after reinstalling the child restraint and restartingthe vehicle, the ON indicator is still lit, check tomake sure that the vehicle’s seatback is notpressing the child restraint into the seat cushion. Ifthis happens, slightly recline the vehicle’sseatback and adjust the seat cushion if possible.Also make sure the child restraint is not trappedunder the vehicle head restraint. If this happens,adjust the head restraint.

If the ON indicator is still lit, secure the child in thechild restraint in a rear seat position in thevehicle and check with your dealer.

76

An object, person or child in the rear seatcontacting or pressing the right front passenger’sseatback, or objects stowed under the rightfront passenger’s seat, may affect the properfunctioning of the passenger sensing system.

When you use a safety belt extender in the rightfront passenger’s seat, make sure the passengerairbag status indicator shows the word ON. Ifthe indicator shows OFF, disconnect theextender’s latch from the buckle then reconnectthe safety belt. Make sure the indicator light showsON, then reconnect the safety belt extender. Ifyou use the safety belt extender while the indicatorlight shows OFF, the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag, seat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped), and the safety belt pretensioner maynot activate correctly. See Airbag System onpage 63 for important safety information about yourairbags.

The passenger sensing system is designed toenable (may inflate) the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag, seat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped), and the safety belt pretensioneranytime the system senses that a person ofadult size is sitting properly in the right frontpassenger’s seat. When the passenger sensingsystem has allowed the airbags and pretensionerto be enabled, the ON indicator will light andstay lit to remind you that the airbags andpretensioner are active.

For some children who have outgrown childrestraints and for very small adults, the passengersensing system may or may not turn off theairbags and pretensioner, depending upon theperson’s seating posture and body build. Everyonein your vehicle who has outgrown child restraintsshould wear a safety belt properly — whetheror not there is an airbag for that person.

77

If a person of adult-size is sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat, but the OFF indicator is lit, itcould be because that person is not sitting properlyin the seat. If this happens, turn the vehicle offand ask the person to place the seatback inthe fully upright position, then sit upright in theseat, centered on the seat cushion, with theperson’s legs comfortably extended. Restart thevehicle and have the person remain in this positionfor about two minutes. This will allow the systemto detect that person and then enable thepassenger’s airbags.

If the airbag readiness light and the OFF light inthe passenger airbag status indicator comeon together, it may mean there is a malfunction inthe passenger sensing system. Secure thechild in the child restraint in a rear seat position inthe vehicle and check with your dealer.

78

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light in theinstrument panel cluster ever comes onand stays on, it means that somethingmay be wrong with the airbag system. Ifthis ever happens, have the vehicleserviced promptly, because an adult-sizeperson sitting in the right frontpassenger’s seat may not have theprotection of the frontal airbag. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 162 formore on this, including important safetyinformation.

Aftermarket equipment, such as seat covers orseat backpacks, can affect how well the passengersensing system operates. You may want toconsider not using seat covers, seat backpacks, orother aftermarket equipment if your vehicle hasthe passenger sensing system. See AddingEquipment to Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 81 for more information about modificationsthat can affect how the system operates.

{CAUTION:

Stowing of articles under the passenger’sseat or between the passenger’s seatcushion and seatback may interfere withthe proper operation of the passengersensing system.

79

Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicleAirbags affect how your vehicle should beserviced. There are parts of the airbag system inseveral places around your vehicle. You donot want the system to inflate while someone isworking on your vehicle. Your dealer and theservice manual have information about servicingyour vehicle and the airbag system. To purchase aservice manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 417.

{CAUTION:

For up to 10 seconds, after the ignition isturned off and the battery is disconnected,an airbag can still inflate during improperservice. You can be injured if you areclose to an airbag when it inflates. Avoidyellow connectors. They are probably partof the airbag system. Be sure to followproper service procedures, and make surethe person performing work for you isqualified to do so.

The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.

80

Adding Equipment to YourAirbag-Equipped Vehicle

Q: Is there anything I might add to the frontor sides of the vehicle that could keep theairbags from working properly?

A: Yes. If you add things that change yourvehicle’s frame, bumper system, height,front end or side sheet metal, they may keepthe airbag system from working properly.Also, the airbag system may not work properlyif you relocate any of the airbag sensors. Ifyou have any questions about this, you shouldcontact Customer Assistance before youmodify your vehicle. The phone numbers andaddresses for Customer Assistance are inStep Two of the Customer SatisfactionProcedure in this manual. See CustomerSatisfaction Procedure on page 400.

Q: Because I have a disability, I have to getmy vehicle modified. How can I find outwhether this will affect my airbag system?

A: Changing or moving any parts of thefront seats, safety belts, the airbag sensingand diagnostic module, steering wheel,instrument panel, ceiling headliner, ceiling andpillar garnish trim, roof-mounted airbagmodules, or airbag wiring can affect theoperation of the airbag system. If you havequestions, call Customer Assistance. Thephone numbers and addresses for CustomerAssistance are in Step Two of the CustomerSatisfaction Procedure in this manual.See Customer Satisfaction Procedure onpage 400.

81

Restraint System Check

Checking the Restraint SystemsNow and then, make sure the safety belt reminderlight and all your belts, buckles, latch plates,retractors and anchorages are working properly.Look for any other loose or damaged safetybelt system parts. If you see anything that mightkeep a safety belt system from doing its job, haveit repaired. Keep safety belts clean and dry.See Care of Safety Belts on page 357 for moreinformation.

Torn or frayed safety belts may not protect you ina crash. They can rip apart under impact forces.If a belt is torn or frayed, get a new one right away.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcovers, and have them repaired or replaced.(The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.)

Notice: If you damage the covering for thedriver’s or the right front passenger’s airbag, orthe airbag covering on the driver’s and rightfront passenger’s seatback (if equipped), or theside impact airbag covering on the ceiling nearthe side windows (if equipped), the bag may notwork properly. You may have to replace theairbag module in the steering wheel, both theairbag module and the instrument panel for theright front passenger’s airbag, the airbagmodule and seatback for the driver’s and rightfront passenger’s seat-mounted side impactairbags (if equipped), or side impact airbagmodule and ceiling covering for theroof-mounted side impact airbags (if equipped).Do not open or break the airbag coverings.

82

Replacing Restraint System PartsAfter a Crash

{CAUTION:

A crash can damage the restraint systemsin your vehicle. A damaged restraintsystem may not properly protect theperson using it, resulting in serious injuryor even death in a crash. To help makesure your restraint systems are workingproperly after a crash, have theminspected and any necessaryreplacements made as soon as possible.

If you have had a crash, do you need new belts orLATCH system parts?After a very minor collision, nothing may benecessary. But if the belts were stretched, as theywould be if worn during a more severe crash,then you need new parts.If the LATCH system was being used during amore severe crash, you may need new LATCHsystem parts.

If belts are cut or damaged, replace them.Collision damage also may mean you will need tohave LATCH system, safety belt or seat partsrepaired or replaced. New parts and repairs maybe necessary even if the belt or LATCH systemwas not being used at the time of the collision.

If an airbag inflates, you will need to replace airbagsystem parts. See the part on the airbag systemearlier in this section.

If the frontal airbags inflate you will also need toreplace the driver and front passenger’s safety beltretractor assembly. Be sure to do so. Then thenew retractor assembly will be there to help protectyou in a collision.

After a crash you may need to replace the driverand front passenger’s safety belt retractorassemblies, even if the frontal airbags have notdeployed. The driver and front passenger’s safetybelt retractor assemblies contain the safety beltpretensioners. Have your safety belt pretensionerschecked if your vehicle has been in a collision,or if your airbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle or while you are driving. SeeAirbag Readiness Light on page 162.

83

✍ NOTES

84

Keys .............................................................. 87Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System .......... 89Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System

Operation ................................................. 90Doors and Locks .......................................... 92

Door Locks ................................................. 92Power Door Locks ....................................... 94Rear Door Security Locks ........................... 95Liftgate/Liftglass ........................................... 96

Windows ....................................................... 98Manual Windows ......................................... 99Power Windows .......................................... 99Sun Visors .................................................. 99

Theft-Deterrent Systems ............................. 100Content Theft-Deterrent ............................. 100

Starting and Operating Your Vehicle ......... 102New Vehicle Break-In ................................ 102Ignition Positions ....................................... 103Starting the Engine .................................... 104Engine Coolant Heater .............................. 106

Automatic Transaxle Operation .................. 108Overdrive Off ............................................. 111Manual Transaxle Operation ...................... 111Parking Brake ........................................... 114Shifting Into Park (P)

(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 115Shifting Out of Park (P)

(Automatic Transaxle) ............................ 117Parking Your Vehicle

(Manual Transaxle) ................................ 118Parking Over Things That Burn ................. 118Engine Exhaust ......................................... 119Running the Engine While Parked ............. 120

Mirrors ......................................................... 121Manual Rearview Mirror ............................. 121Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ....... 121Automatic Dimming Rearview Mirror .......... 122Outside Remote Control Mirrors ................ 122Outside Convex Mirror ............................... 123

OnStar® System .......................................... 123

Section 2 Features and Controls

85

Storage Areas ............................................. 127Glove Box ................................................. 127Cupholder(s) .............................................. 127Coinholder(s) ............................................. 127Instrument Panel Storage Area .................. 127Center Console Storage Area .................... 127

Floor Mats ................................................. 127Rear Storage Area .................................... 128Rear Cargo Accessory Track System ........ 129Cargo Cover ............................................. 129Cargo Tie Downs ...................................... 130

Sunroof ....................................................... 131

Section 2 Features and Controls

86

Keys

{CAUTION:

Leaving children in a vehicle with theignition key is dangerous for manyreasons, children or others could be badlyinjured or even killed. They could operatethe power windows or other controls oreven make the vehicle move. The windowswill function with the keys in the ignitionand they could be seriously injured orkilled if caught in the path of a closingwindow. Do not leave the keys in a vehiclewith children.

87

One key is used for theignition, the doors andall other locks.

When a new vehicle is delivered, the dealerremoves the key tag from the key and gives it tothe first owner.

Each tag has a code on it that tells your dealer ora qualified locksmith how to make extra keys.Keep the tag in a safe place. If you lose your key,you’ll be able to have a new one made easilyusing this code.

If you need a new key, contact your dealership toobtain the correct key code. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 406 for moreinformation.

Notice: If you ever lock your keys in yourvehicle, you may have to damage the vehicleto get in. Be sure you have spare keys.

88

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)SystemIf the vehicle has the Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)system, it operates on a radio frequency subjectto Federal Communications Commission (FCC)Rules and with Industry Canada.

This device complies with Part 15 of the FCCRules. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

This device complies with RSS-210 of IndustryCanada. Operation is subject to the followingtwo conditions:

1. This device may not cause interference.

2. This device must accept any interferencereceived, including interference that maycause undesired operation of the device.

Changes or modifications to this system by otherthan an authorized service facility could voidauthorization to use this equipment.

At times you may notice a decrease in range. Thisis normal for any RKE system. If the transmitterdoes not work or if you have to stand closerto your vehicle for the transmitter to work, try this:

• Check the distance. You may be too farfrom your vehicle. You may need to standcloser during rainy or snowy weather.

• Check the location. Other vehicles or objectsmay be blocking the signal. Take a few stepsto the left or right, hold the transmitterhigher, and try again.

• Check to determine if battery replacement isnecessary. See “Battery Replacement”under Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) SystemOperation on page 90.

• If you are still having trouble, see your dealeror a qualified technician for service.

89

Remote Keyless Entry (RKE)System OperationIf your vehicle has this feature, you can lock andunlock your doors from about 3 feet (1 m) upto 30 feet (9 m) away using the remote keylessentry transmitter supplied with your vehicle.The remote keyless entry transmitter will lookdifferent if your vehicle was purchased in Canada,however it will operate the same.

LOCK: Press this buttonto lock all of the doors.

The turn signal lights will flash once to confirmthat the doors have locked.

UNLOCK: Press this button once to unlock thedriver’s door. The turn signal lights will flash twiceand the interior lamps will come on to confirm thatthe door has unlocked. If the UNLOCK button ispressed again within three seconds, all remainingdoors will unlock and the turn signal lights will flashtwice and interior lamps will remain on to confirmthat all doors & hatch have unlocked. The interiorlamps will stay on for 15 seconds or until theignition is turned on.

HATCH/GLASS: Press this button to open therear liftglass. If the ignition key is in the ONposition, the liftglass cannot be opened by theHATCH/GLASS button on the transmitter.

90

Matching Transmitter(s) to YourVehicleEach remote keyless entry transmitter is coded toprevent another transmitter from unlocking yourvehicle. If a transmitter is lost or stolen, areplacement can be purchased through yourdealer. Remember to bring any remainingtransmitters with you when you go to your dealer.When the dealer matches the replacementtransmitter to your vehicle, any remainingtransmitters must also be matched. Once yourdealer has coded the new transmitter, thelost transmitter will not unlock your vehicle. Eachvehicle can have a maximum of four transmittersmatched to it.

Battery ReplacementUnder normal use, the battery in your remotekeyless entry transmitter should last aboutthree years.

You can tell the battery is weak if the transmitterwill not work at the normal range in any location.If you have to get close to your vehicle beforethe transmitter works, it is probably time to changethe battery.

Notice: When replacing the battery, use carenot to touch any of the circuitry. Staticfrom your body transferred to these surfacesmay damage the transmitter.

91

To replace the battery, do the following:

1. Insert a small coin or similar object to separatethe bottom half from the top half of thetransmitter.

2. Remove the battery and replace it with thenew one. Make sure the positive side of thebattery faces upward. For battery replacement,use a three-volt battery, type CR2032, orequivalent.

3. Snap the transmitter back together tightly tobe sure no moisture can enter.

Doors and Locks

Door Locks

{CAUTION:

Unlocked doors can be dangerous.• Passengers, especially children, can

easily open the doors and fall out of amoving vehicle. When a door islocked, the handle will not open it.You increase the chance of beingthrown out of the vehicle in a crash ifthe doors are not locked. So, wearsafety belts properly and lock thedoors whenever you drive.


92


• Young children who get into unlockedvehicles may be unable to get out. Achild can be overcome by extremeheat and can suffer permanent injuriesor even death from heat stroke.Always lock your vehicle wheneveryou leave it.

• Outsiders can easily enter through anunlocked door when you slow downor stop your vehicle. Locking yourdoors can help prevent this fromhappening.

There are several ways to lock and unlock yourvehicle.

From the outside, use your key or the remotekeyless entry transmitter, if equipped. See RemoteKeyless Entry (RKE) System Operation onpage 90 for more information.

If your vehicle has power door locks, open thedriver’s door by turning the key in the lock towardthe rear of the vehicle. Turning the key backtoward the center, then toward the rear again willunlock all of the doors. Using the key in thepassenger’s door will also unlock all of the doors.

Lock a door by turning the key toward the frontof the vehicle. If you have power door locks, all thedoors will lock.

93

To manually lock the door from the inside, pressthe knob on the door forward. To unlock thedoor, press the knob rearward. With manual locks,you must use the key to lock and unlock theliftgate.

Power Door Locks

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the power doorlock switch is locatedon the armrest ofthe driver’s and frontpassenger’s door.

e (Power Door Lock): Press the top of theswitch to lock all the doors. Press the bottom ofthe switch to unlock all the doors.

94

Rear Door Security LocksYour vehicle is equipped with rear door securitylocks that help prevent passengers from openingthe rear doors on your vehicle from the inside.

The security locks arelocated on the inside ofthe rear door trim.

To use these locks, do the following:

1. Slide the lever down.

2. Close the door.

3. Do the same thing to the other rear door lock.

The rear doors on your vehicle cannot beopened from the inside when this feature is in use.

To open a rear door with the security lock, dothe following:

1. Unlock the door from the inside.

2. Then open the door from the outside.

If you don’t cancel the security lock feature, adultsand older children who ride in the rear won’t beable to open the rear door from the inside.You should let adults and older children know howthese security locks work, and how to cancelthe locks.

95

To cancel the rear door security lock, do thefollowing:

1. Unlock the door from the inside and open thedoor from the outside.

2. Slide the lever up.

3. Do the same for the other rear door.

The rear door locks will now work normally.

Liftgate/Liftglass

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to drive with theliftgate or liftglass open because carbonmonoxide (CO) gas can come into yourvehicle. You cannot see or smell CO. Itcan cause unconsciousness and evendeath. If you must drive with the liftgateopen or if electrical wiring or other cableconnections must pass through the sealbetween the body and the liftgate orliftglass:

• Make sure all other windows are shut.• Turn the fan on your climate control

system to its highest speed and selectthe control setting that will forceoutside air into your vehicle. See“Climate Control System” in the Index.

• If you have air outlets on or under theinstrument panel, open them all theway. See Engine Exhaust on page 119.

96

Liftgate/Liftglass ReleaseTo unlock and open the liftgate using the key,insert the key into the keyhole and turncounterclockwise. Raise the liftgate by hand.

When closing the liftgate, use the handle to pullit down.

To lock the liftgate, turn the key clockwise to thefirst position.

To open the liftglass using the key, insert the keyinto the keyhole and turn clockwise to thesecond position. Use the handle in the center ofthe liftglass to help in lifting the glass.

Your vehicle may havea liftglass release buttonwhich is located onthe instrument panel tothe left of the steeringwheel. Press this buttonto release the liftglass.

97

Windows

{CAUTION:

Leaving children, helpless adults, or petsin a vehicle with the windows closed isdangerous. They can be overcome by theextreme heat and suffer permanentinjuries or even death from heat stroke.Never leave a child, a helpless adult, or apet alone in a vehicle, especially with thewindows closed in warm or hot weather.

98

Manual WindowsUse the window crank to open and close eachwindow.

Power Windows

If your vehicle has thisfeature, the switchescontrolling the driver’sand passenger’swindows are located onthe driver’s door.

The power window switch on each passengerdoor controls that window only. These switcheswork while the ignition is turned to ON.

Press the front of a switch to lower a window andlift the front of the switch to raise a window.

AUTO (Express-Down): Press this switch all theway down and release it to lower the driver’swindow quickly.

o (Lock-Out): Press the window lock-out button,located near the driver’s power door lock switches,to disable the passenger’s power window switches.Press the button again to enable the windowswitches.

Only the driver’s window will operate with thelock-out button pressed.

Sun VisorsTo block out glare, swing down the sun visors.You can also swing them to the side.

The visors can be slid along the rod for extendedcoverage for the side windows unless yourvehicle has roof-mounted side impact airbags.

Visor Vanity MirrorSwing down the sun visor to expose the vanitymirror. The vanity mirror may have a cover. Lift thecover to expose the mirror.

99

Theft-Deterrent SystemsVehicle theft is big business, especially in somecities. Although your vehicle has a number oftheft-deterrent features, we know that nothing weput on it can make it impossible to steal.

Content Theft-DeterrentIf your vehicle has this feature, the theft-deterrentsystem is designed to activate an alarm if anyof the side doors or the liftgate is forcibly unlockedor if the battery terminal is disconnected andthen reconnected while the system is set.

The alarm will sound the horn intermittently andflash the headlamps, turn signal lamps and interiorlights. If the driver’s or front passenger’s sidedoors are unlocked forcibly, the other side doorsand the liftgate will be locked automatically.

Arming the SystemTo arm the system, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition key to the LOCK positionand remove it.

2. Close and lock all doors and liftgate with thekey or remote keyless entry transmitter.

The indicator lightlocated on theinstrument panel to theleft of the steeringwheel will comeon when all doors andliftgate are closedand locked.

The system will be automatically set after30 seconds. When the system is set,the indicator light will start flashing.

3. After the indicator light starts flashing, youmay leave the vehicle.Do not leave anyone in the vehicle when youset the system, because unlocking thevehicle from the inside will activate the system.

100

Testing the AlarmTo test the alarm, do the following:

1. Open all the windows.

2. Set the system as described in the previousprocedure. The doors and liftgate should belocked with the key or remote keylessentry transmitter. Be sure to wait until theindicator light starts flashing.

3. Unlock the driver’s door from the inside. Thesystem should activate the alarm.

4. Stop the alarm as described in the disarmingprocedure following.

5. Repeat this operation for the other doors. Alsocheck that the system is activated when thebattery terminal is disconnected and thenreconnected.If the system does not work properly, have itchecked by your dealer.

How the System Alarm is ActivatedThe system will activate the alarm under thefollowing conditions:

• If the driver’s or front passenger’s door isunlocked or if any of the other doors orthe liftgate is forcibly opened without the keyor remote keyless entry transmitter.

• If the battery terminal is disconnected andthen reconnected.

• If the ignition is hot-wired.

• If the side window glass is broken or damaged.

The indicator light will come on when thesystem is activated.

If the driver’s or front passenger’s doors areunlocked without using the key or remote keylessentry transmitter, the other doors and theliftgate will be automatically locked again.

After one minute the alarm will automatically stopand the indicator light will start flashing again.

101

Reactivating the SystemOnce the system is set, it will automatically resetthe alarm after the alarm stops. The alarm willactivate again under the same conditions asdescribed earlier.

Disarming the SystemThe alarm can be disarmed by doing one of thefollowing:

• Turn the ignition key from LOCK to ON.

• Unlock any of the doors with the key or withthe remote keyless entry transmitter.If the liftgate or liftglass is opened with thekey, the system will still be activated.

Starting and Operating YourVehicle

New Vehicle Break-In

Notice: Your vehicle does not need anelaborate break-in. But it will perform better inthe long run if you follow these guidelines:• Do not drive at any one constant speed, fast

or slow, for the first 500 miles (805 km). Donot make full-throttle starts. Avoiddownshifting to brake, or slow, the vehicle.

• Avoid making hard stops for the first200 miles (322 km) or so. During this timeyour new brake linings are not yet brokenin. Hard stops with new linings can meanpremature wear and earlier replacement.Follow this breaking-in guideline every timeyou get new brake linings.

• Do not tow a trailer during break-in. SeeTowing a Trailer on page 261 for the trailertowing capabilities of your vehicle and moreinformation.

Following break-in, engine speed and load canbe gradually increased.

102

Ignition PositionsWith the key in the ignition switch, you can turn itto four different positions.

Notice: If your key seems stuck in LOCK andyou cannot turn it, be sure you are using thecorrect key; if so, is it all the way in? If it is, thenturn the steering wheel left and right while youturn the key hard. Turn the key only with yourhand. Using a tool to force it could break thekey or the ignition switch. If none of these work,then your vehicle needs service.

(A) LOCK: This is the only position from which youcan remove the key. This locks your steering wheel,ignition and automatic transaxle. Push in theignition switch as you turn the key toward you.

If you have an automatic transaxle, the ignitionswitch cannot be turned to LOCK unless the shiftlever is in PARK (P).

{CAUTION:

On manual transaxle vehicles, turning thekey to LOCK and removing it will lock thesteering column and result in a loss ofability to steer the vehicle. This couldcause a collision. If you need to turn theengine off while the vehicle is moving,turn the key only to ACC. Do not push thekey in while the vehicle is moving.

(B) ACC (ACCESSORY): This position operatessome of your electrical accessories, such asthe radio, but not the ventilation fan. It unlocks thesteering wheel and ignition. To move the keyfrom ACC to LOCK, push in the key and then turnit to LOCK.

103

(C) ON: This is the position the switch returns toafter you start your engine and release the switch.The switch stays in the ON position when theengine is running. But even when the ignition is notrunning, you can use ON to operate your electricalaccessories, including the ventilation fan and115 volt power outlet, and to display some warningand indicator lights.

The battery could be drained if you leave the key inthe ACC or On position with the engine off. Youmay not be able to start your vehicle if the battery isallowed to drain for an extended period of time.

(D) START: This position starts the engine. Whenthe engine starts, release the key. The ignitionswitch will return to ON for normal driving.

When the engine is not running, ACC and ONallow you to operate some of your electricalaccessories.

A warning tone will sound if you open the driver’sdoor when the ignition is still in ACC or LOCKand the key is in the ignition.

Key In the IgnitionNever leave your vehicle with the keys inside, as itis an easy target for joy riders or thieves. If youleave the key in the ignition and park your vehicle,a chime will sound, when you open the driver’sdoor. Always remember to remove your key fromthe ignition and take it with you. This will lockyour ignition and transaxle. Also, always rememberto lock the doors.

The battery could be drained if you leave the keyin the ignition while your vehicle is parked.You may not be able to start your vehicle after ithas been parked for an extended period of time.

Starting the EnginePlace the transaxle in the proper gear.

104

Automatic TransaxleMove your shift lever to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N). Your engine will not start inany other position — this is a safety feature.To restart when you are already moving,use NEUTRAL (N) only.

Notice: Shifting into PARK (P) with the vehiclemoving could damage the transaxle. Shift intoPARK (P) only when your vehicle is stopped.

Manual TransaxleThe shift lever should be in the neutral positionand the parking brake engaged. Hold theclutch pedal to the floor and start the engine. Yourvehicle will not start if the clutch pedal is not allthe way down. That is a safety feature.

Starting Procedure1. With your foot off the accelerator pedal, turn

the ignition key to START. When the enginestarts, let go of the key. The idle speed willgo down as your engine gets warm. Donot race the engine immediately after startingit. Operate the engine and transaxle gentlyto allow the oil to warm up and lubricateall moving parts.

Your vehicle has a Computer-ControlledCranking System. This feature assists instarting the engine and protects components. Ifthe ignition key is turned to the START position,and then released when the engine beginscranking, the engine will continue cranking for afew seconds or until the vehicle starts. If theengine does not start and the key is held inSTART for many seconds, cranking will bestopped after 15 seconds to prevent crankingmotor damage. To prevent gear damage, thissystem also prevents cranking if the engine isalready running. Engine cranking can bestopped by turning the ignition switch to theACC or LOCK position.

Notice: Cranking the engine for long periodsof time, by returning the key to the STARTposition immediately after cranking has ended,can overheat and damage the crankingmotor, and drain the battery. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allowthe cranking motor to cool down.

105

2. If the engine does not start after 5-10 seconds,especially in very cold weather (below 0°For −18°C), it could be flooded with too muchgasoline. Try pushing the acceleratorpedal all the way to the floor and holding itthere as you hold the key in START for up toa maximum of 15 seconds. Wait at least15 seconds between each try, to allow thecranking motor to cool down. When the enginestarts, let go of the key and accelerator. Ifthe vehicle starts briefly but then stops again,do the same thing. This clears the extragasoline from the engine. Do not race theengine immediately after starting it. Operatethe engine and transaxle gently until theoil warms up and lubricates all moving parts.

Notice: Your engine is designed to work withthe electronics in your vehicle. If you addelectrical parts or accessories, you couldchange the way the engine operates. Beforeadding electrical equipment, check withyour dealer. If you do not, your engine mightnot perform properly. Any resulting damagewould not be covered by your vehicle’swarranty.

Engine Coolant HeaterYour vehicle may have an engine coolant heater.In very cold weather, 0°F (−18°C) or colder,the engine coolant heater can help. You will geteasier starting and better fuel economy duringengine warm-up. Usually, the coolant heatershould be plugged in a minimum of four hoursprior to starting your vehicle. At temperaturesabove 32°F (0°C), use of the coolant heater isnot required.

106

To Use the Engine Coolant Heater1. Turn off the engine.

2. Open the hood and unwrap the electricalcord. The electrical cord is located on thedriver’s side of the engine compartment.

3. Plug it into a normal, grounded 110-volt ACoutlet.

{CAUTION:

Plugging the cord into an ungroundedoutlet could cause an electrical shock.Also, the wrong kind of extension cordcould overheat and cause a fire. Youcould be seriously injured. Plug the cordinto a properly grounded three-prong110-volt AC outlet. If the cord will notreach, use a heavy-duty three-prongextension cord rated for at least 15 amps.

4. Before starting the engine, be sure to unplugand store the cord as it was before to keep itaway from moving engine parts. If you donot, it could be damaged.

How long should you keep the coolant heaterplugged in? The answer depends on the outsidetemperature, the kind of oil you have, andsome other things. Instead of trying to listeverything here, we ask that you contact yourdealer in the area where you will be parking yourvehicle. The dealer can give you the bestadvice for that particular area.

107

Automatic Transaxle OperationThere are severaldifferent positions foryour shift lever.

PARK (P): This position locks your front wheels. Itis the best position to use when you start yourengine because your vehicle cannot move easily.

{CAUTION:

It is dangerous to get out of your vehicleif the shift lever is not fully in PARK (P)with the parking brake firmly set. Yourvehicle can roll.



Do not leave your vehicle when the engineis running unless you have to. If you haveleft the engine running, the vehicle canmove suddenly. You or others could beinjured. To be sure your vehicle will notmove, even when you are on fairly levelground, always set your parking brakeand move the shift lever to PARK (P). SeeShifting Into Park (P) (AutomaticTransaxle) on page 115. If you are pullinga trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 261.

Make sure that the shift lever is fully in PARK (P)before starting the engine.

108

Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lockcontrol system. You have to fully apply yourregular brakes first and then press the shift leverbutton before you can shift from PARK (P)when the ignition key is in ON. If you cannot shiftout of PARK (P), ease pressure on the shiftlever, push the shift lever all the way intoPARK (P) and release the shift lever button as youmaintain brake application. Then press the shiftlever button and move the shift lever into the gearyou wish. See Shifting Out of Park (P) (AutomaticTransaxle) on page 117.

REVERSE (R): Use this gear to back up.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transaxle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

To rock your vehicle back and forth to get out ofsnow, ice or sand without damaging yourtransaxle, see If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or Snow on page 252.

NEUTRAL (N): In this position, your engine doesnot connect with the wheels. To restart whenyou are already moving, use NEUTRAL (N) only.

{CAUTION:

Shifting into a drive gear while yourengine is running at high speed isdangerous. Unless your foot is firmly onthe brake pedal, your vehicle could movevery rapidly. You could lose control andhit people or objects. Do not shift into adrive gear while your engine is running athigh speed.

Notice: Shifting out of PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) while the engine is running athigh speed may damage the transaxle.The repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Be sure the engine is not running athigh speeds when shifting your vehicle.

109

DRIVE (D): This position is for normal driving. Itprovides the best fuel economy for your vehicle. Ifyou need more power for passing, and you are:

• Going less than about 27 mph (43 km/h),push your accelerator pedal abouthalfway down.

• Going about 29 mph (47 km/h) or more, pushyour accelerator pedal all the way down. Youwill shift down to the next gear and havemore power.Downshifting the transaxle in slippery roadconditions could result in skidding, seeSkidding under Loss of Control on page 237.

SECOND (2): This position reduces vehicle speedmore than DRIVE (D) without using your brakes.You can use SECOND (2) on hills. It can helpcontrol your speed as you go down steep mountainroads, but then you would also want to use yourbrakes off and on.

LOW (L): This position reduces vehicle speedeven more than SECOND (2) without using yourbrakes. You can use it on very steep hills, orin deep snow or mud. If the shift lever is put inLOW (L), the transaxle will not shift into low gearuntil the vehicle is going slow enough.

Notice: Spinning the tires or holding thevehicle in one place on a hill using only theaccelerator pedal may damage the transaxle. Ifyou are stuck, do not spin the tires. Whenstopping on a hill, use the brakes, or parkingbrake to hold the vehicle in place.

110

Overdrive OffVehicles with an automatic transaxle have an O/D(overdrive off) button located on the left side ofthe shift lever.

When you turn on your vehicle overdrive willautomatically come on until you turn it off.

Press the O/D button toturn overdrive off or on.A light on the instrumentpanel cluster comes onwhen the overdrive is on.See Overdrive Off Lighton page 174.

Drive your vehicle with the overdrive on for betterfuel economy and quieter driving.

Manual Transaxle Operation

Five-Speed Transaxle

FIRST (1): Press theclutch pedal and shiftinto FIRST (1). Then,slowly let up on theclutch pedal as youpress the acceleratorpedal.

You can shift into FIRST (1) when you are goingless than 20 mph (32 km/h). If you have come to acomplete stop and it is hard to shift into FIRST (1),put the shift lever in NEUTRAL and let up onthe clutch. Press the clutch pedal back down. Thenshift into FIRST (1).

111

SECOND (2): Press the clutch pedal as you letup on the accelerator pedal and shift intoSECOND (2). Then, slowly let up on the clutchpedal as you press the accelerator pedal.

THIRD (3), FOURTH (4), FIFTH (5): Shift intoTHIRD (3), FOURTH (4) and FIFTH (5) the sameway you do for SECOND (2). Slowly let up onthe clutch pedal as you press the acceleratorpedal.

To stop, let up on the accelerator pedal and pressthe brake pedal. Just before the vehicle stops,press the clutch pedal and the brake pedal,and shift to NEUTRAL.

NEUTRAL: Use this position when you start oridle your engine.

REVERSE (R): To back up, press down on theclutch pedal and shift into REVERSE (R). Letup on the clutch pedal slowly while pressing theaccelerator pedal.

Notice: Shifting to REVERSE (R) while yourvehicle is moving forward could damagethe transaxle. The repairs would not becovered by your warranty. Shift toREVERSE (R) only after your vehicle isstopped.

Also, use REVERSE (R) along with the parkingbrake for parking your vehicle.

112

Shift Speeds

{CAUTION:

If you skip a gear when you downshift,you could lose control of your vehicle.You could injure yourself or others. Donot shift down more than one gear at atime when you downshift.

This chart shows when to shift to the next gear forthe best fuel economy.

Manual Transaxle Recommended ShiftSpeeds

Engine 1 to 2or

2 to 1

2 to 3or

3 to 2

3 to 4or

4 to 3

4 to 5or

5 to 4

5 to 6or

6 to 51.8 L

(Code 8)15 mph24 km/h

25 mph40 km/h

40 mph64 km/h

45 mph72 km/h —

If your speed drops below 20 mph (32 km/h), or ifthe engine is not running smoothly, you shoulddownshift to the next lower gear. You may have todownshift two or more gears to keep the enginerunning smoothly or for good performance.

113

Parking BrakeTo set the parking brake, hold the brake pedaldown and pull up on the parking brake lever. If theignition is on, the brake system warning light willcome on.

To release the parking brake, hold the brakepedal down.

Pull the parking brake lever up until you can pressthe release button. Hold the release button inas you move the lever all the way down.

Notice: Driving with the parking brake oncan overheat the brake system and causepremature wear or damage to brake systemparts. Verify that the parking brake is fullyreleased and the brake warning light isoff before driving.

If you are towing a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 261.

114

Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. If you have leftthe engine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,use the steps that follow. If you arepulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer onpage 261.

To shift into PARK (P), do the following:

1. Hold the brake pedal down with your right footand set the parking brake by pulling up on theparking brake lever.

2. Move the shift lever into PARK (P) by holdingin the button on the shift lever and pushingthe lever all the way toward the front ofthe vehicle.

3. Turn the ignition key to LOCK.

4. Remove the key and take it with you. If youcan leave your vehicle with the key in yourhand, your vehicle is in PARK (P).

115

Leaving Your Vehicle With the EngineRunning (Automatic Transaxle)

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to leave your vehiclewith the engine running. Your vehiclecould move suddenly if the shift lever isnot fully in PARK (P) with the parkingbrake firmly set. And, if you leave thevehicle with the engine running, it couldoverheat and even catch fire. You orothers could be injured. Do not leave yourvehicle with the engine running.

If you have to leave your automatic transaxlevehicle with the engine running, be sure yourvehicle is in PARK (P) and your parking brake isfirmly set before you leave it. After you have movedthe shift lever into PARK (P), hold the regular brakepedal down. Then, see if you can move the shiftlever away from PARK (P) without first pulling ittoward you. If you can, it means that the shift leverwas not fully locked into PARK (P).

Torque Lock (Automatic Transaxle)If you are parking on a hill and you do not shift intoPARK (P) properly, the weight of the vehiclemay put too much force on the parking pawl in thetransaxle. You may find it difficult to pull theshift lever out of PARK (P). This is called “torquelock.” To prevent torque lock, set the parkingbrake and then shift into PARK (P) properly beforeyou leave the driver’s seat. To find out how, seeShifting Into Park (P) (Automatic Transaxle)on page 115.

When you are ready to drive, move the shift leverout of PARK (P) before you release the parkingbrake.

If torque lock does occur, you may need to haveanother vehicle push yours a little uphill totake some of the pressure from the parking pawlin the transaxle, so you can pull the shift leverout of PARK (P).

116

Shifting Out of Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle)Your vehicle has an automatic transaxle shift lockcontrol system. You have to fully apply yourregular brakes before you can shift from PARK (P)when the ignition is in ON. See AutomaticTransaxle Operation on page 108.

If you cannot shift out of PARK (P), ease pressureon the shift lever – push the shift lever all theway into PARK (P) and release the shift leverbutton as you maintain brake application. Thenpress the shift lever button and move theshift lever into the gear you wish.

Shift Lock ReleaseIf you ever hold the brake pedal down but stillcannot shift out of PARK (P), try this:

1. Turn the ignition to LOCK. Make sure theparking brake is applied.

2. Carefully pry thecover from the shiftlock override,located to the rightof the shift lever.

3. Insert the end of a flat-tipped tool into theround slot and press down firmly.

4. While maintaining brake application, move theshift lever into the drive gear you want.

5. Have the vehicle fixed as soon as possible.

117

Parking Your Vehicle(Manual Transaxle)Before you get out of your vehicle, move the shiftlever into REVERSE (R), and firmly apply theparking brake. Once the shift lever has beenplaced into REVERSE (R) with the clutch pedalpressed in, you can turn the ignition key to LOCK,remove the key and release the clutch.

If you are parking on a hill, or if your vehicle ispulling a trailer, see Towing a Trailer on page 261.

Evaporation PumpYour vehicle is equipped with a vacuum pump forthe vehicle’s fuel evaporation system. Thispump performs a fuel evaporation leakage testapproximately five hours after the engine is turnedoff. You may hear a sound coming fromunderneath the rear cargo compartment forseveral minutes.

The noise is normal and does not signify amalfunction. See your dealer with any questions.

Parking Over Things That Burn

{CAUTION:

Things that can burn could touch hotexhaust parts under your vehicle andignite. Do not park over papers, leaves,dry grass, or other things that can burn.

118

Engine Exhaust

{CAUTION:

Engine exhaust can kill. It contains thegas carbon monoxide (CO), which youcannot see or smell. It can causeunconsciousness and death.

You might have exhaust coming in if:• The exhaust system sounds strange

or different.• Your vehicle gets rusty underneath.• Your vehicle was damaged in a

collision.• Your vehicle was damaged when

driving over high points on the roador over road debris.



• Repairs were not done correctly.• Your vehicle or the exhaust system

has been modified improperly.

If you ever suspect exhaust is coming intoyour vehicle:

• Drive it only with all the windowsdown to blow out any CO; and

• Have your vehicle fixed immediately.

119

Running the Engine While ParkedIt is better not to park with the engine running. But ifyou ever have to, here are some things to know.

{CAUTION:

Idling the engine with the climate controlsystem off could allow dangerous exhaustinto your vehicle. See the earlier cautionunder Engine Exhaust on page 119.

Also, idling in a closed-in place can letdeadly carbon monoxide (CO) into yourvehicle even if the climate control fan is atthe highest setting. One place this canhappen is a garage. Exhaust — withCO — can come in easily. NEVER park ina garage with the engine running.

Another closed-in place can be a blizzard.See Winter Driving on page 248.

{CAUTION:

It can be dangerous to get out of yourvehicle if the shift lever is not fully inPARK (P) with the parking brake firmlyset. Your vehicle can roll. Do not leaveyour vehicle when the engine is runningunless you have to. If you have left theengine running, the vehicle can movesuddenly. You or others could be injured.To be sure your vehicle will not move,even when you are on fairly level ground,always set your parking brake and movethe shift lever to PARK (P).

Follow the proper steps to be sure your vehiclewill not move. See Shifting Into Park (P)(Automatic Transaxle) on page 115.

If you are parking on a hill and if you are pulling atrailer, also see Towing a Trailer on page 261.

120

Mirrors

Manual Rearview MirrorWhile sitting in a comfortable driving position,adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behindyour vehicle. Move the mirror in the center tomove it up or down and side to side.

The control at the bottom of the mirror is theday/night feature that allows adjustment tothe mirror so that the glare of headlamps frombehind is reduced. Pull the control for night drivingto reduce glare; push it to return to the dayposition.

The mirror may have map lights beneath themirror. Press the switch to turn each lighton or off.

Manual Rearview Mirror withOnStar®

The vehicle may have an inside rearview mirrorwith OnStar®. See your dealer for more informationon the system and how to subscribe to OnStar®.See OnStar® System on page 123 for informationon the services OnStar® provides.

While sitting in a comfortable position, adjust themirror so you can see clearly behind yourvehicle. Move the mirror in the center to move itup or down and side to side. The control atthe bottom of the mirror is the day/night featurethat allows adjustment to the mirror so thatthe glare of headlamps from behind is reduced.Move the control from left to right for day or nightconditions.

121

Automatic Dimming Rearview MirrorWhile sitting in a comfortable driving position,adjust the mirror so you can see clearly behindyour vehicle. Hold the mirror in the center to moveit up or down and side to side.

The mirror may have an automatic dimmingfeature that darkens gradually to reduce the glareof headlamps from behind. When the ignitionkey is inserted and turned on, the inside rear viewmirror always turns on in the automatic functionmode. An indicator light located on the mirrorwill come on to show you that the function is on.When the inside air temperature is low, it may takea little longer for the mirror to darken in responseto the detection of headlights. Press the buttonin the center of the mirror to turn this featureon or off.

One photocell on the front of the mirror senseswhen it is becoming dark outside. Anotherphotocell, facing rearward, senses headlampsbehind you.

To keep the photocells operating well, occasionallyclean them with a cotton swab and glass cleaner.

Outside Remote Control MirrorsYour vehicle has outside power adjustable mirrors.

The controls are locatedto the left of the steeringwheel on the instrumentpanel.

To adjust either mirror, push the button labeledL (left) or R (right). Use the arrows on the controlpad to adjust the direction of the mirror. Onceboth mirrors have been adjusted, move theselector switch back to the center. This preventsthe mirrors from being moved once they have beenadjusted.

122

Outside Convex Mirror

{CAUTION:

A convex mirror can make things (likeother vehicles) look farther away thanthey really are. If you cut too sharply intothe right lane, you could hit a vehicle onyour right. Check your inside mirror orglance over your shoulder beforechanging lanes.

The passenger’s side mirror is convex. A convexmirror’s surface is curved so more can beseen from the driver’s seat.

OnStar® System

OnStar® uses several innovative technologies andlive advisors to provide you with a wide rangeof safety, security, information, and convenienceservices. If your airbags deploy, the system isdesigned to make an automatic call to OnStar®

Emergency advisors who can request emergencyservices be sent to your location. If you lockyour keys in the vehicle, call OnStar® at1-888-4-ONSTAR and they can send a signal tounlock your doors. If you need roadsideassistance, press the OnStar® button and theycan contact Roadside Service for you.

123

OnStar® service is provided to you subject to theOnStar® Terms and Conditions. You maycancel your OnStar® service at any time bycontacting OnStar® as provided below. A completeOnStar® Owner’s Guide and the OnStar® Termsand Conditions are included in the vehicle’sOnStar® Subscriber glove box literature. For moreinformation, visit onstar.com or onstar.ca,contact OnStar® at 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827) or TTY 1-877-248-2080, orpress the OnStar® button to speak with anOnStar® advisor 24 hours a day, 7 days a week.

Not all OnStar® features are available on allvehicles. To check if your vehicle is equipped toprovide the services described below, or for afull description of OnStar® services and systemlimitations, see the OnStar® Owner’s Guide in yourglove box or visit onstar.com.

OnStar® ServicesFor new vehicles equipped with OnStar®, the Safe& Sound Plan, or the Directions & Connections®

Plan is included for one year from the date ofpurchase. You can extend this plan beyond thefirst year, or upgrade to the Directions &Connections® Plan.

For more information, press the OnStar® button tospeak with an advisor. Some OnStar® services(such as Remote Door Unlock or Stolen VehicleLocation Assistance) may not be availableuntil you register with OnStar®.

Available Services with Safe &Sound® Plan• Automatic Notification of Airbag Deployment

• Advanced Automatic Crash Notification(AACN) (If equipped)

• Link to Emergency Services

• Roadside Assistance

• Stolen Vehicle Location Assistance

• AccidentAssist

• Remote Door Unlock/Vehicle Alert

• OnStar® Vehicle Diagnostics

• GM® Goodwrench® On Demand Diagnostics

• OnStar® Hands-Free Calling with30 complimentary minutes

• OnStar® Virtual Advisor (U.S. Only)

124

Available Services included with Directions& Connections® Plan• All Safe and Sound Plan Services

• Driving Directions - Advisor delivered orOnStar® Turn-by-Turn Navigation (If equipped)

• RideAssist

• Information and Convenience Services

OnStar® Hands-Free CallingOnStar® Hands-Free Calling allows eligibleOnStar® subscribers to make and receive callsusing voice commands. Hands-Free Calling is fullyintegrated into the vehicle, and can be usedwith OnStar® Pre-Paid Minute Packages.Hands-Free Calling may also be linked to aVerizon Wireless service plan in the U.S. or a BellMobility service plan in Canada, depending oneligibility. To find out more, refer to the OnStar®

Owner’s Guide in the vehicle’s glove box, visitwww.onstar.com or www.onstar.ca, or speak withan OnStar® advisor by pressing the OnStar®

button or calling 1-888-4-ONSTAR(1-888-466-7827).

OnStar® Virtual AdvisorOnStar® Virtual Advisor is a feature of OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling that uses your minutesto access location-based weather, local trafficreports, and stock quotes. By pressing the phonebutton and giving a few simple voice commands,you can browse through the various topics.See the OnStar® Owner’s Guide for moreinformation. (Only available in thecontinental U.S.)

OnStar® Steering Wheel ControlsYour vehicle may be equipped with a Talk/Mutebutton that can be used to interact with OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling.

On some vehicles, you may have to hold thebutton for a few seconds and give the command“ONSTAR” in order to activate the OnStar®

Hands-Free Calling feature.

On some vehicles, the mute button can be used todial numbers into voicemail systems, or to dialphone extensions. See the OnStar® Owner’sGuide for more information.

125

How OnStar® Service WorksIn order to provide you with OnStar® services,your vehicle’s OnStar® system has the capabilityof recording and transmitting vehicle information.This information is automatically sent to anOnStar® Call Center at the time of an OnStar®

button press, Emergency button press or ifyour airbags or AACN system deploys. The vehicleinformation usually includes your GPS locationand, in the event of a crash, additional informationregarding the accident that your vehicle hasbeen involved in (e.g. the direction from whichyour vehicle was hit). When you use the VirtualAdvisor feature of OnStar® Hands-Free Calling,your vehicle also sends OnStar® your GPSlocation so that we can provide you withlocation-based services.OnStar® service cannot work unless your vehicleis in a place where OnStar® has an agreementwith a wireless service provider for service in thatarea. OnStar® service also cannot work unlessyou are in a place where the wireless serviceprovider OnStar® has hired for that areahas coverage, network capacity and receptionwhen the service is needed, and technology thatis compatible with the OnStar® service.

Not all services are available everywhere,particularly in remote or enclosed areas, orat all times.

OnStar® service that involves location informationabout your vehicle cannot work unless GPSsatellite signals are unobstructed and available inthat place as well.Your vehicle must have a working electricalsystem (including adequate battery power) for theOnStar® equipment to operate. There are otherproblems OnStar® cannot control that may preventOnStar® from providing OnStar® service to youat any particular time or place. Some examples aredamage to important parts of your vehicle in anaccident, hills, tall buildings, tunnels, weatheror wireless phone network congestion.

Your ResponsibilityYou may need to increase the volume of yourradio to hear the OnStar® advisor. If the light nextto the OnStar® buttons is red, this means thatyour system is not functioning properly and shouldbe checked by a dealer. If the light appearsclear (no light is appearing), your OnStar®

subscription has expired. You can always pressthe blue OnStar® button to confirm that yourOnStar® equipment is active.

126

Storage Areas

Glove BoxOpen the glove box by pulling up on the bottom ofthe handle.

Cupholder(s)There are two fixed cupholders located in theconsole area between the two front seats. Thereare also two cupholders that fold out of the rear ofthe console storage unit.

Coinholder(s)Your instrument panel may have a coinholderlocated to the left of the steering wheel and on thecenter console near the parking brake.

Instrument Panel Storage AreaThere are storage compartments located on theinstrument panel in two places. They are below theinterior/instrument panel brightness dial andbelow the shift lever. Pull the top of the doortoward you to open it or for the compartment belowthe shift lever, push the button to open it.

Center Console Storage AreaA storage area is located in the console betweenthe seats.

To access the storage area, pull up the lockrelease lever while raising the lid.

Floor MatsThe driver’s side floor mat is held in place bytwo locator hooks.

Be sure the driver’s side floor mat is properlyplaced on the floor so that it does not block themovement of the accelerator pedal.

127

How to Remove and Replace theFloor Mat

To remove the floormat, pull up on the rearof the mat to disconnectit from the locatorhooks.

To reinstall the floor mat, line up the openings inthe floor mat over the locator hooks and pushdown into place.

Rear Storage AreaA storage area is located under the rear cargoarea floor panel.

Turn the knobs on thefloor panel to unlock thestorage area accesscover.

Be sure to lock the access cover to close itsecurely.

128

Rear Cargo Accessory TrackSystemYour vehicle has a track system located on thefloor of the rear cargo area. This system canbe used to carry accessories in your vehicle inmany ways by using the tie-down anchorsprovided in your vehicle or accessory packagesavailable from your GM dealer.

Make sure the cargo being carried in the rearcargo area is secure. See Loading Your Vehicleon page 253.

Cargo CoverTo use the cargo cover, loosen the straps andattach the side hooks of the cargo cover tothe upper tie down hooks located along both sidesof the rear cargo area. Pull straps to adjust.

{CAUTION:

An improperly stored cargo cover couldbe thrown about the vehicle during acollision or sudden maneuver. You orothers could be injured. If you remove thecover, always store it in the properstorage location. When you put it back,always be sure that it is securelyreattached.

129

Cargo Tie Downs The tire tie-down straps are designed to secure aflat tire. You can also use the straps and hooksto secure your luggage.

There are eight tie-down hooks located in the rearof the vehicle. The straps are located under thecargo area floor panel. To use the straps, hook theends to the lower tie-down hooks in a criss-crosspattern across the cargo. Pull on the straps atthe buckle to tighten the straps as needed.

130

Sunroof If the vehicle has a sunroof, it can be opened orput in a tilt position. To tilt the sunroof, slidethe sunshade rearward, then press the switchmarked UP. Press the other end of the switch tolower the sunroof. The ignition must be in theON position for the switch to work.

To open or close the sunroof, press the switchmarked SLIDE rearward or forward. The sunroofwill close partially and stop. Once the sunroofstops, release the switch and press the buttonagain to fully close it. The sunroof can be openedto any position. The sunshade will open whenthe sunroof is opened. The sunshade mustbe closed manually.

131

✍ NOTES

132

Instrument Panel Overview ........................ 136Hazard Warning Flashers .......................... 138Other Warning Devices ............................. 138Horn .......................................................... 138Tilt Wheel .................................................. 139Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................. 139Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................. 140Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer .......... 140Flash-to-Pass ............................................ 141Windshield Wipers ..................................... 141Windshield Washer .................................... 142Rear Window Wiper/Washer ...................... 142Cruise Control ........................................... 143Exterior Lamps .......................................... 146Headlamps on Reminder ........................... 146Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) ................. 147Automatic Headlamp System ..................... 147Fog Lamps ................................................ 148Instrument Panel Brightness ...................... 148Interior Lamps Control ............................... 149Entry Lighting ............................................ 149Reading Lamps ......................................... 150Accessory Power Outlet(s) ........................ 150

Power Outlet 115 Volt AlternatingCurrent .................................................. 151

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter ................ 151Climate Controls ......................................... 152

Climate Control System ............................. 152Outlet Adjustment ...................................... 155Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............. 156

Warning Lights, Gages, and Indicators ..... 158Instrument Panel Cluster ........................... 159Speedometer and Odometer ...................... 160Trip Odometers ......................................... 160Tachometer ............................................... 161Safety Belt Reminder Light ........................ 161Airbag Readiness Light ............................. 162Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............. 163Charging System Light .............................. 165Brake System Warning Light ..................... 166Anti-Lock Brake System Warning Light ...... 167Low Tire Pressure Warning Light .............. 167Traction Control System (TCS)

Warning Light ........................................ 168StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ......................... 168

Section 3 Instrument Panel

133

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage ............ 169Malfunction Indicator Lamp ........................ 170Oil Pressure Light ..................................... 173Lights On Reminder .................................. 174Taillamp Indicator Light ............................. 174Cruise Control Light .................................. 174Overdrive Off Light .................................... 174Highbeam On Light ................................... 175Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ............... 175Door Ajar Light .......................................... 175Fuel Gage ................................................. 176Low Fuel Warning Light ............................ 177

Audio System(s) ......................................... 177Setting the Time ........................................ 178Radio with CD (Base Level) ...................... 179Radio with CD (MP3) ................................ 188Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................. 198Using an MP3 ........................................... 210XM Radio Messages ................................. 216Radio Reception ........................................ 218Care of Your CDs ..................................... 219Care of the CD Player .............................. 219Fixed Mast Antenna .................................. 219XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ....... 219

Section 3 Instrument Panel

134

✍ NOTES

135

Instrument Panel Overview

136

The main components of your instrument panel are the following:

A. Air Outlets. See Outlet Adjustment onpage 155.

B. Instrument Panel Cluster. See InstrumentPanel Cluster on page 159.

C. Climate Control System. See Climate ControlSystem on page 152.

D. Hazard Warning Flasher Button. See HazardWarning Flashers on page 138.

E. Audio System. See Audio System(s) onpage 177.

F. Rear Window Defogger Button. See “RearWindow Defogger” under Climate ControlSystem on page 152.

G. Passenger Airbag Status Indicator. SeePassenger Airbag Status Indicator on page 163.Front Passenger Safety Belt Reminder Light.See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 161.

H. Power Remote Control Mirror Button. SeeOutside Remote Control Mirrors on page 122.

I. Instrument Panel Brightness Control. SeeInstrument Panel Brightness on page 148.

J. Rear Liftglass Release Button. SeeLiftgate/Liftglass on page 96.

K. Tire Pressure Monitor Reset Button. See TirePressure Monitor System on page 330.

L. Coinholder. See Coinholder(s) on page 127.M. TRAC OFF Button. See Traction Control

System (TCS) on page 230.N. Content Theft-Deterrent Security Light. See

Content Theft-Deterrent on page 100.O. Storage Compartment. See Instrument Panel

Storage Area on page 127.P. Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever and Exterior

Lamp Stalk. See Turn Signal/MultifunctionLever on page 139 and Exterior Lampson page 146.

Q. Hood Release. See Hood Release onpage 280.

R. Tilt Lever. See Tilt Wheel on page 139.S. Horn. See Horn on page 138.T. Cruise Control Lever (Option). See Cruise

Control on page 143.U. Ignition Switch. See Ignition Positions on

page 103.

137

V. Windshield Wiper Lever. See WindshieldWipers on page 141.

W. Cigarette Lighter or Accessory Power Outlet.See Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter onpage 151 or Accessory Power Outlet(s) onpage 150.

X. Shift Lever. See Automatic Transaxle Operationon page 108 or Manual Transaxle Operationon page 111.

Y. Power Outlet. See Power Outlet 115 VoltAlternating Current on page 151.

Z. Parking Brake. See Parking Brake onpage 114.

AA. Center Console Storage Area. See CenterConsole Storage Area on page 127.

AB. Glove Box. See Glove Box on page 127.

Hazard Warning FlashersThe hazard warning flashers let you warn thepolice and others that you have a problem. Thefront and rear turn signal lamps will flash onand off.

The hazard warningflasher button is locatedin the center of theinstrument panel.

The hazard warning flashers work no matter whatposition the key is in, and even if the key is notin the ignition switch.

Press the button to make the front and rear turnsignal lamps flash on and off. Press the buttonagain to turn the flashers off.

While the hazard warning flashers are on, the turnsignals do not work.

Other Warning DevicesIf you carry reflective triangles, you can setthem up at the side of the road about 300 feet(100 m) behind your vehicle.

HornPress near or on the horn symbols on yoursteering wheel pad to sound the horn.

138

Tilt WheelA tilt steering column allows you to adjust thesteering column before you drive. You can alsoraise it to the highest level to give your legs moreroom when you exit and enter the vehicle.

The tilt lever is locatedunderneath, on the leftside of the steeringwheel column.

To tilt the column, move the lever downward.Adjust the steering wheel to a comfortable position,then move the lever upward to lock the columnin place.

Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever

The turn signal/multifunction lever is located onthe left side of the steering column.This lever operates the following:

• Exterior Lamps. See Exterior Lamps onpage 146.

• Turn and Lane-Change Signals. See Turn andLane-Change Signals on page 140.

• Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer. SeeHeadlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 140.

• Flash-to-Pass. See Flash-to-Pass onpage 141.

• Fog Lamps. See Fog Lamps on page 148.

139

Turn and Lane-Change SignalsThe turn signal has an upward (for right) and adownward (for left) position. These positions allowyou to signal a turn or a lane change.

To signal a turn, move the lever all the way up ordown. When the turn is finished, the lever willreturn automatically.

To signal a lane change, raise or lower the leveruntil the arrow starts to flash. Hold it there until youcomplete your lane change. The lever will returnby itself when you release it.

An arrow on theinstrument panel clusterwill flash in thedirection of the turn orlane change.

If you signal a turn or a lane change and noticethe arrow flashing rapidly, a signal bulb maybe burned out and other drivers will not see yourturn signal.

If a bulb is burned out, have it replaced to helpavoid an accident. If the arrows do not go on at allwhen you signal a turn, check for burned-outbulbs and then check the fuse. See Fuses andCircuit Breakers on page 365.

Headlamp High/Low-Beam ChangerThe headlamps must be on for this feature towork. For high beams, push the turn signal leveraway from you.

When the high beamsare on, this light on theinstrument panelcluster also will be on.

It will go off when you switch to the low beams. Toswitch back to low beams, pull the lever toward you.

140

Flash-to-PassWith the lever in the low-beam position, pull thelever toward you to momentarily switch tohigh beams (to signal that you are going to pass).If you have the headlamps on when you releasethe lever, they will return to the low beams.

Windshield Wipers

The lever on the right side of the steering columncontrols the windshield wipers and washer.

Move the lever to one of the following positions:

MIST: Move the lever to MIST, for a single wipingcycle. Hold it there until the wipers start, thenlet go. The wipers will stop after one wipe.

OFF: Move the lever to this position to turn thewipers off.

INT (Intermittent): Move the lever to INT tochoose a delayed wiping cycle. The time betweenwipes can be changed by turning the INT band.Turn the band forward or rearward for a longer orshorter delay interval. This position is useful inlight rain or snow, rather than continuous wiping.

LO (Low): Move the lever to LO for steadywiping at low speed.

HI (High): Move the lever to HI for steady wipingat high speed.

REAR: Turn the end of the lever upward to LO orHI, to turn on the rear window wiper. The wiperdoes not work with the rear liftglass open.

141

Be sure to clear ice and snow from the wiperblades before using them. If they are frozen to thewindshield, carefully loosen or thaw them. If theblades become damaged, get new blades or bladeinserts.

Heavy snow or ice can overload the wipers. Acircuit breaker stops them until the motor cools.Clear away snow or ice to prevent an overload.

Windshield WasherPull the lever toward you to spray washer fluid onthe windshield. The spray will continue untilyou release the lever. The wipers will run a fewtimes. See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 305.

The knob automatically returns from the positionafter you release it.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

Rear Window Wiper/WasherTurn the knob up or down as far as it will go, tosquirt washer fluid on the rear window. Theknob automatically returns from these positionsafter it is released.

The rear window washer uses the same fluidbottle as the windshield washer. However, the rearwindow washer will run out of fluid before thewindshield washer. If you can wash the windshieldbut not the rear window, check the fluid level.

{CAUTION:

In freezing weather, do not use yourwasher until the windshield is warmed.Otherwise the washer fluid can form iceon the windshield, blocking your vision.

142

Cruise Control

If your vehicle hascruise control, the leveris located on theright side of the steeringwheel.

Cruise control, lets you maintain a speed of25 mph (40 km/h) or more without keeping yourfoot on the accelerator. This can really helpon long trips. Cruise control does not work atspeeds below 25 mph (40 km/h).

{CAUTION:

Cruise control can be dangerous whereyou cannot drive safely at a steady speed.So, do not use your cruise control onwinding roads or in heavy traffic.

Cruise control can be dangerous onslippery roads. On such roads, fastchanges in tire traction can causeexcessive wheel slip, and you could losecontrol. Do not use cruise control onslippery roads.

143

Setting Cruise Control

{CAUTION:

If you leave your cruise control on whenyou are not using cruise, you might hit abutton and go into cruise when you donot want to. You could be startled andeven lose control. Keep the cruise controlswitch off until you want to use cruisecontrol.

1. Press the ON-OFF button at the end of thecruise control lever. The CRUISE light on theinstrument panel cluster comes on. SeeCruise Control Light on page 174 for moreinformation.

2. Get up to the desired speed.

3. Move the lever down to −SET and release it.

4. Take your foot off the accelerator pedal.

Resuming a Set SpeedSuppose the cruise control is set at a desiredspeed and then you apply the brake. This shutsoff cruise control. But you do not need to reset it.

If the vehicle speed is 25 mph (40 km/h) orgreater, push the lever up to +RES(Resume/Accelerate). The vehicle returns to thepreviously set speed and stays there.

Increasing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are three ways to go to a higher speed:

• Use the accelerator pedal to get to the higherspeed. Move the lever down to −SET.Release the lever and the accelerator pedal.You will now cruise at the higher speed.

• Move the cruise lever up to +RES. Hold itthere until you get up to the speed desired,and then release the lever.

• To increase the vehicle speed in very smallamounts, move the lever to +RES brieflyand then release it. Each time this is done,the vehicle goes about 1 mph (1.6 km/h)faster.

144

Reducing Speed While Using CruiseControlThere are two ways to reduce your speed whileusing cruise control:

• Push and hold the lever to −SET until you reachthe lower speed desired, then release it.

• To slow down in very small amounts, push thelever down briefly. Each time this is done, thevehicle will go about 1 mph (1.6 km/h) slower.

Passing Another Vehicle While UsingCruise ControlUse the accelerator pedal to increase the vehiclespeed. When you take your foot off the pedal,the vehicle slows down to the cruise control speedyou set earlier.

Using Cruise Control on HillsHow well the cruise control works on hills dependsupon the vehicle speed, load, and the steepnessof the hills.

When going up steep hills, you might have to stepon the accelerator pedal to maintain the vehiclespeed.

When going downhill, you might have to brake orshift to a lower gear to keep the vehicle speeddown. Of course, applying the brake ordownshifting to SECOND (2) or LOW (L) turns offthe cruise control. Many drivers find this to betoo much trouble and do not use cruise control onsteep hills.

Ending Cruise ControlThere are several ways to turn off the cruisecontrol:

• Step lightly on the brake pedal or push theclutch pedal, if you have a manual transaxle.

• Press the ON-OFF button again.

• Pull the cruise control lever toward you.

Erasing Speed MemoryWhen you turn off the cruise control or theignition, the cruise control set speed memoryis erased.

145

Exterior Lamps

The lever on the left side of the steering columnoperates the exterior lamps.

O (Exterior Lamps): Turn the outside part of thelever with the symbol on it, to operate the lamps.For vehicles sold in the U. S., this symbol willappear on the instrument panel cluster when yourexterior lamps are on.

The exterior lamp switch has three positions:

OFF: Turning the switch to this position turns offall lamps, except the Daytime RunningLamps (DRL).

O (Parking Lamps): Turning the switch to thisposition turns on the parking lamps togetherwith the following:

• Sidemarker Lamps

• Taillamps

• License Plate Lamp

• Instrument Panel Lights

A symbol will appear on the instrument panelcluster when your parking lamps are on.See Lights On Reminder on page 174 andTaillamp Indicator Light on page 174 for additionalinformation.

3 (Headlamps): Turning the switch to thisposition turns on the headlamps, together with thepreviously listed lamps and lights.

Headlamps on ReminderIf you turn the ignition to LOCK or ACC and leavethe lamps on, you will hear a tone when youopen the driver’s door.

146

Daytime Running Lamps (DRL)Daytime Running Lamps (DRL) can make it easierfor others to see the front of your vehicle duringthe day. DRL can be helpful in many differentdriving conditions, but they can be especiallyhelpful in the short periods after dawn and beforesunset. Fully functional daytime running lampsare required on all vehicles first sold in Canada.

The DRL system will make the headlampscome on at a reduced brightness when thefollowing conditions are met:

• The ignition is on with the engine running.

• The exterior lamps switch is off.

• The parking brake is released.

When the DRL are on, only the headlamps will beon at a reduced brightness. The taillamps,sidemarker and other lamps will not be on. Theinstrument panel will not be lit up either.

When you turn the exterior lamp switch to theheadlamp position, the DRL will go off andthe headlamps will come on. The other lamps thatcome on with the headlamps will also come on.

When it begins to get dark, the headlamps willautomatically switch from DRL to the regularheadlamps. See “Automatic Headlamp System”following.

When you turn the exterior lamp switch off, theregular lamps will go off and the headlampswill change to the reduced brightness of DRLprovided it is not dark outside. DRL also comes onif only the parking lamps are being used.

Automatic Headlamp SystemYour vehicle has an automatic light sensor on thetop left corner of the instrument panel, so besure it is not covered or the headlamps will be oncontinuously.

When it is dark enough outside, the automaticheadlamp system will turn on the low-beamheadlamps at the normal brightness along withother lamps such as the taillamps, sidemarker,parking lamps and instrument panel lights. This isindicated by the headlamp symbol on yourinstrument panel cluster. See Instrument PanelCluster on page 159.

147

If you are driving through a parking garage,overcast weather, or a tunnel, the automaticheadlamp system may turn on the low-beamheadlamps at a normal brightness along with thetaillamps, sidemarker, parking lamps and theinstrument panel lights. The radio lights will bedimmer, and the instrument panel clusterlights may dim. There will be a delay before thelights will turn on when starting the car at night.

Fog Lamps

- (Fog Lamps): Turn the band on the turnsignal/multifunction lever to the fog lamp symbol toturn the fog lamps on. They will come on onlywhen the headlamps are on low beam.

Some localities have laws that require theheadlamps to be on along with the fog lamps.

Instrument Panel Brightness

The instrument panelbrightness control islocated to the left of thesteering wheel on theinstrument panel.Turn the wheel on theleft of the controlup or down to increaseor decrease brightness.

Turn the wheel all the way up for the maximumsetting. It is recommended that the brightness levelbe kept at the maximum setting for all daytimedriving to ensure proper visibility.

The brightness of the instrument panel lights willdecrease when the headlamps are on.

148

Interior Lamps ControlThe interior lights control is located on theoverhead light. To change the interior lightssetting, slide the switch to one of the followingpositions:

OFF: This position turns the light off.

ON: This position keeps the light on all the time.

Door: This position turns the light on whenany door, the liftgate or the liftglass is opened.The light goes off when all the side doors,the liftgate and the liftglass are closed.

Entry LightingWhile the interior lights control is in the doorposition, the light will come on when any side door,the liftgate or the liftglass is opened. After all thedoors, liftgate and liftglass are closed, and the keyis out of the ignition, in LOCK or ACC, the lightwill remain on for about 15 seconds and thengo out except under the following conditions:

• The ignition is turned to ACC or ON after allthe doors, the liftgate and the liftglass areclosed.

• All the doors and liftgate are locked when theliftglass is closed and the light is still on.

When any door is unlocked with the key or remotekeyless entry system transmitter, the light comeson for 15 seconds, even if the door is not opened.

149

Reading LampsIf your vehicle has a sunroof, there will be a readinglamp near the sunroof switch. Press the button toturn the lamp on and press it again to turn it off.

If your vehicle does not have a sunroof, thevehicle’s inside rearview mirror may have readinglamps. If your vehicle has reading lamps, thereare two buttons located on the bottom of themirror. Press the buttons to turn the lamps on andpress them again to turn the lamps off.

Accessory Power Outlet(s)With the accessory power outlet, you can plug inauxiliary electrical equipment.

Your vehicle has an outlet under the climatecontrols.

To use the outlet, the ignition must be in ON orACC. Pull down the small cover to accessthe outlet.

Notice: Leaving electrical equipment on forextended periods will drain the battery. Alwaysturn off electrical equipment when not inuse and do not plug in equipment that exceedsthe maximum amperage rating.

This circuit is protected by a fuse and has amaximum current level. Do not use equipmentexceeding the maximum amperage rating.

Certain power accessory plugs may not becompatible to the power accessory outlet and couldresult in blown vehicle or adapter fuses. If youexperience a problem see your dealer for additionalinformation on the power accessory plugs.

Notice: Adding any electrical equipment toyour vehicle may damage it or keep othercomponents from working as they should. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Do not use equipment exceeding maximumamperage rating of 20 amperes. Check withyour dealer before adding electrical equipment.

When adding electrical equipment, be sure tofollow the proper installation instructions includedwith the equipment.

Notice: Improper use of the power outlet cancause damage not covered by your warranty.Do not hang any type of accessory oraccessory bracket from the plug because thepower outlets are designed for accessorypower plugs only.

150

Power Outlet 115 Volt AlternatingCurrentWith this power outlet, you can plug in auxiliaryelectrical equipment with a maximum limit of115 VAC. If you try to use equipment that requiresmore than the limit, a protection circuit will cutthe power supply. The power will automaticallyrestart when equipment that operates withinthe limit is plugged in.

The power outlet is located near the center of theinstrument panel. Before using the outlet, turnon the ignition and press the button next tothe outlet. An indicator light in the button will comeon. After using the outlet, press the button againto turn it off.

The power outlet is not designed for the followingelectrical equipment and they may not workproperly:

• Equipment with high initial peakwattage: cathode-ray tube type televisions,compressor-driven refrigerators, electricpower tools.

• Other equipment requiring an extremely stablepower supply: microcomputer-controlledelectric blankets, touch sensor lamps, etc.

Ashtray(s) and Cigarette Lighter

Notice: If you put papers, pins, or otherflammable items in the ashtray, hot cigarettesor other smoking materials could ignitethem and possibly damage your vehicle. Neverput flammable items in the ashtray.

To use the lighter, if your vehicle has one, pushthe lighter in all the way and let go. When itis ready, it will pop back out by itself. If the engineis not running, the key must be in ACC to usethe lighter.

151

It is not recommended to use the cigarette lighterto plug in auxiliary electrical equipment. Usethe accessory power outlet for phones and otherelectrical equipment. See Accessory PowerOutlet(s) on page 150 or Power Outlet 115 VoltAlternating Current on page 151.

Notice: Holding a cigarette lighter in while itis heating does not let the lighter backaway from the heating element when it is hot.Damage from overheating can occur to thelighter or heating element, or a fuse could beblown. Do not hold a cigarette lighter in while itis heating.

Your vehicle may have a removable ashtray thatsits in your front cupholder in the center consolestorage area.

Climate Controls

Climate Control SystemWith this system you can control the heating,cooling and ventilation for your vehicle.

Operation

9 (Fan): Turn the center knob away from OFF toturn the system on. Turn the knob toward HI toincrease fan speed.

If the airflow seems low when the fan is at thehighest setting, the passenger compartmentair filter may need to be replaced. For moreinformation, see Passenger Compartment Air Filteron page 156 and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 377.

152

To change the current mode, select one of thefollowing:

H (Vent): Air is directed to the upper instrumentpanel outlets.

) (Bi-Level): Air is directed to the upperinstrument panel outlets, and to the floor outlets.

6 (Floor): Air is directed to the floor outletsand to the outboard outlets (for the side windows).

? (Recirculation): Press this button, locatedin the center of the instrument panel to theleft of the audio system, to turn the recirculationmode on or off. This mode recirculates theair inside the vehicle. It can be used to preventoutside air and odors from entering your vehicle orto help heat or cool the air inside your vehiclemore quickly. When the button is pressed,an indicator light in the button comes on. Pressthe button again to turn off recirculate and tocirculate outside air through the system.The indicator light will go off. Recirculate isautomatically turned off when the climate controlsystem mode knob is turned to defog or defrost oris between modes.

Temperature Control: Turn the right knobclockwise or counterclockwise to increase ordecrease the temperature inside the vehicle.

A/C (Air Conditioning): Press this button, locatedin the center of the instrument panel to the leftof the audio system, to turn the air-conditioningsystem on or off. When A/C is pressed, anindicator light in the button comes on to let youknow that the air conditioning is activated.

MAX A/C (Maximum Air Conditioning): Pressthe A/C and recirculation buttons at the same timeto select MAX A/C.

On hot days, open the windows to let hot insideair escape; then close them. This helps to reducethe time it takes for the vehicle to cool down. Italso helps the system to operate more efficiently.

The air-conditioning system removes moisturefrom the air, so you might notice a small amountof water dripping underneath your vehiclewhile idling or after turning off the engine.This is normal.

153

Defogging and DefrostingFog on the inside of windows is a result of highhumidity (moisture) condensing on the cool windowglass. This can be minimized if the climate controlsystem is used properly. There are two modes toclear fog or frost from the windshield. Use the defogmode to clear the inside of the windshield of fog ormoisture and warm the passengers. Use the defrostmode to remove fog or frost from the outside of thewindshield more quickly.

- (Defog): Air is directed between thewindshield, side windows, instrument panel outletsand the floor outlets. The air-conditioningcompressor will run automatically in this settingwithout pressing A/C, unless the outsidetemperature is at or below 32°F (0°C).

1 (Defrost): Air is directed to the windshield,instrument panel outlets and the side windows.The air-conditioning compressor will runautomatically in this setting without pressing A/C,unless the outside temperature is at or below32°F (0°C).

Do not drive the vehicle until all the windowsare clear.

Rear Window DefoggerThe rear window defogger uses a warming grid toclear fog from the rear window.

The rear windowdefogger button islocated on the center ofthe instrument panel,above the audio system.The defogger doesnot operate with the rearliftglass opened.

The rear window defogger will only work when theignition is in the ON position.

= (Rear Defogger): Press the defogger buttonto turn the rear window defogger on or off. Anindicator light in the button comes on to letyou know that the rear window defogger isactivated. Be sure to clear as much snow fromthe rear window as possible.

154

The rear window defogger will turn offautomatically approximately 15 minutes after thebutton is pressed. The defogger can also be turnedoff by pressing the button again or by turning offthe engine.

Notice: Do not use a razor blade or sharpobject to clear the inside rear window. Do notadhere anything to the defogger grid linesin the rear glass. These actions may damagethe rear defogger. Repairs would not becovered by your warranty.

Outlet AdjustmentUse the air outlets located in the center andoutboard sides of the instrument panel, to changethe direction of the air flowing through the vents.

Operation Tips• Clear away any ice, snow or leaves from the

air inlets at the base of the windshield thatmay block the flow of air into your vehicle.

• Use of non-GM approved hood deflectors mayadversely affect the performance of the system.

• Keep the path under the front seats clear ofobjects to help circulate the air inside of yourvehicle more effectively.

• If the airflow seems low when the fan is at thehighest setting, the passenger compartment airfilter may need to be replaced. For moreinformation, see “Passenger Compartment AirFilter” following and Scheduled Maintenance onpage 377.

155

Passenger Compartment Air FilterPassenger compartment air, both outside andrecirculated air, is routed through a passengercompartment air filter. The filter removes certaincontaminants from the air, including pollenand dust particles. Reductions in airflow, whichmay occur more quickly in dusty areas, indicatethat the filter needs to be replaced early. Anair filter is available through your dealer. For howoften to change the air filter, see ScheduledMaintenance on page 377.

The access panel for the air filter is behind theglove box. To replace the filter, follow these steps:

1. Lower the glove box door and remove thescrew on the right side of the glovebox witha tool. Slide the arm of the glovebox off.

2. Push each side of the glovebox in and pulltoward you.

156

3. Lift the snaps on the filter cover to remove thecover.

4. Remove the air filter.

5. Reverse the steps to install the new air filter.

It will not cause damage to your vehicle if youchoose not to replace the air filter after removingit. However, the air coming into your vehiclewill not be filtered.

157

Warning Lights, Gages, andIndicatorsThis part describes the warning lights and gagesthat may be on your vehicle. The pictures willhelp you locate them.

Warning lights and gages can signal thatsomething is wrong before it becomes seriousenough to cause an expensive repair orreplacement. Paying attention to your warninglights and gages could also save you or othersfrom injury.

Warning lights come on when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions. Asyou will see in the details on the next fewpages, some warning lights come on briefly whenyou start the engine just to let you know they’reworking. If you are familiar with this section,you should not be alarmed when this happens.

Gages can indicate when there may be or is aproblem with one of your vehicle’s functions.Often gages and warning lights work together tolet you know when there’s a problem withyour vehicle.

When one of the warning lights comes on andstays on when you are driving, or when one ofthe gages shows there may be a problem, checkthe section that tells you what to do about it.Please follow this manual’s advice. Waiting to dorepairs can be costly and even dangerous. Soplease get to know your warning lights and gages.They are a big help.

158

Instrument Panel ClusterThe instrument panel is designed to let you know at a glance how your vehicle is running. You will knowhow fast you are going, how much fuel is left in the fuel tank and many other things you need to drivesafely and economically.

United States Cluster shown, Canada similar

159

Speedometer and OdometerThe speedometer lets you see your vehicle’sspeed in both miles per hour (mph) and kilometersper hour (km/h). The odometer shows how faryour vehicle has been driven.

If your vehicle needs a new odometer installed,the new one must be set to the mileage total of theold odometer. If it cannot, then it is set at zeroand a label must be put on the driver’s doorto show the old mileage reading when the newodometer was installed. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Trip OdometersThe trip odometers can tell you how far yourvehicle has been driven since you last set the tripodometer to zero.

The button located onthe right side of theinstrument panel clusterallows you to switchbetween the odometerand the two tripodometers.

Press the button once to switch to TRIP A andagain to switch to TRIP B. To return the display tothe odometer reading, press the trip odometerbutton again.

To set the trip odometers to zero, press and holdthe button.

160

Tachometer

The tachometer showsengine speed inthousands of revolutionsper minute (rpm).

Notice: If you operate the engine with thetachometer in the shaded warning area, yourvehicle could be damaged, and the damageswould not be covered by your warranty. Do notoperate the engine with the tachometer inthe shaded warning area.

Temperature DisplayThe outside air temperature is displayed on thecenter of the instrument panel, within thespeedometer. The display will show the outside airtemperature in Fahrenheit with a range from−22°F to 122°F (−30°C to 50°C).

Safety Belt Reminder LightWhen the key is turned to ON or START, a chimewill come on for several seconds to remindpeople to fasten their safety belts, unless thedriver’s safety belt is already buckled.

The safety belt light willalso flash until thedriver’s belt is buckled.If the driver’s belt isalready buckled, neitherthe chime nor thelight will come on.

161

Your vehicle also has a safety belt reminder lightfor the right front passenger position.

This light is located onthe center of theinstrument panel, abovethe audio system.

When the key is turned to ON or START, this lightwill come on as a reminder for the right frontpassenger to fasten their safety belt. This light willflash until the right front passenger’s safety beltis buckled. The passenger’s safety belt reminderlight will not come on if the right front passenger’sbelt is already buckled or if a sensor does notdetect the weight of a passenger in that seat.

If something is placed on the right front passengerseat, the sensors in the seat may detect thatobject and cause the right front passenger safetybelt reminder light to come on. If this happens,remove the object.

Airbag Readiness LightThere is an airbag readiness light on the instrumentpanel cluster, which shows the airbag symbol. Thesystem checks the airbag’s electrical system formalfunctions. The light tells you if there is anelectrical problem. The system monitors the airbagsensor assembly, front airbag sensors,seat-mounted side impact and roof-mounted airbagsensors, driver’s seat position sensor, driver’s seatbelt buckle switch, right front occupant sensingsystem and indicator light, front passenger’s seatbelt buckle switch, seat belt pretensionerassemblies, inflators, interconnecting wiring andpower sources. For more information on the airbagsystem, see Airbag System on page 63.

This light will come onbriefly when you startyour vehicle, thenit should go out. Thismeans the systemis ready.

162

If the airbag readiness light stays on after youstart the vehicle or comes on when you are driving,your airbag system may not work properly.Have your vehicle serviced right away.

{CAUTION:

If the airbag readiness light stays on orkeeps flashing after you start yourvehicle, it means the airbag system andsafety belt pretension system may not beworking properly. The airbags in yourvehicle may not inflate in a crash, or theycould even inflate without a crash. To helpavoid injury to yourself or others, haveyour vehicle serviced right away if theairbag readiness light stays on after youstart your vehicle.

Passenger Airbag Status IndicatorYour vehicle has a passenger airbag statusindicator in the instrument panel.

The indicator next to thepassenger airbag statusindicator lights is thepassenger safetybelt reminder light.

See Safety Belt Reminder Light on page 161 formore information on that indicator.

When the ignition key is turned to ON, thepassenger airbag status indicator will light ON andOFF as a system check.

Then, after several more seconds, the statusindicator will light either ON or OFF if there is weighton the seat or if the safety belt is buckled, to let youknow the status of the right front passenger’s frontaland seat-mounted side impact airbag (if equipped).

163


{CAUTION:

Even though the passenger sensingsystem is designed to turn off the rightfront passenger’s frontal airbag andseat-mounted side impact airbag (ifequipped) if the system detects arear-facing child restraint, no system isfail-safe, and no one can guarantee that anairbag will not deploy under some unusualcircumstance, even though it is turned off.We recommend that rear-facing childrestraints be transported in vehicles with arear seat that will accommodate arear-facing child restraint, wheneverpossible.

If the word ON is lit on the passenger airbagstatus indicator, it means that the right frontpassenger’s frontal and seat-mounted side impactairbag (if equipped) are enabled (may inflate).

{CAUTION:

If the on indicator comes on when you havea rear-facing child restraint installed in theright front passenger’s seat, it means thatthe passenger sensing system has notturned off the passenger’s frontal airbagand seat-mounted side impact airbag (ifequipped). A child in a rear-facing childrestraint can be seriously injured or killed ifthe right front passenger’s airbag inflates.This is because the back of the rear-facingchild restraint would be very close to theinflating airbag. Do not use a rear-facingchild restraint in the right front passenger’sseat if the airbag is turned on.

164

If the word OFF is lit on the passenger airbag statusindicator, it means that the passenger sensingsystem has turned off the right front passenger’sfrontal airbag and seat-mounted side impact airbag(if equipped). See Passenger Sensing System onpage 74 for information about the conditions thatmay affect the airbag system and also importantsafety information.

If, after several seconds, all status indicator lightsremain on, or if there are no lights at all, theremay be a problem with the lights or the passengersensing system. See your dealer for service.

{CAUTION:

If the off indicator and the airbag readinesslight ever come on together, it means thatsomething may be wrong with the airbagsystem. If this ever happens, have thevehicle serviced promptly, because anadult-size person sitting in the right frontpassenger seat may not have theprotection of an airbag. See AirbagReadiness Light on page 162.

Charging System Light

This light comes onbriefly when you turn onthe ignition, with theengine not running, as acheck to show you itis working.

It should go out when the engine starts. If it stayson, or comes on while you are driving, youmay have a problem with the electrical chargingsystem. It could indicate that you have a loosegenerator drive belt or another electrical problem.Have it checked right away. Driving while thislight is on could drain your battery.

If you must drive a short distance with thecharging system light on, be certain to turnoff all your accessories, such as the radio andair conditioner.

165

Brake System Warning LightYour vehicle’s hydraulic brake system is dividedinto two parts. If one part is not working, the otherpart can still work and stop you. For goodbraking, though, you need both parts working well.

If the warning light comes on, there is a brakeproblem. Have your brake system inspectedright away.

If your vehicle has anti-lock brakes, this lightshould come on when you turn the key to START.If it does not come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

When the ignition is on, the brake system warninglight will also come on when you set yourparking brake. The light will stay on if your parkingbrake does not release fully. If it stays on afteryour parking brake is fully released, it means youhave a brake problem.

If the light comes on while you are driving, pull offthe road and stop carefully. You may noticethat the pedal is harder to push or the pedal maygo closer to the floor. It may take longer tostop. If the light is still on, have the vehicle towedfor service. See Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light on page 167 and Towing YourVehicle on page 259.

{CAUTION:

Your brake system may not be workingproperly if the brake system warning lightis on. Driving with the brake systemwarning light on can lead to an accident.If the light is still on after you have pulledoff the road and stopped carefully, havethe vehicle towed for service.

United States Canada

166

Anti-Lock Brake SystemWarning Light

With the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS), this lightcomes on when the engine is started and canstay on for several seconds. This is normal.

If the light stays on, turn the ignition to LOCK. Ifthe light comes on while you are driving, stopas soon as possible and turn the ignition off. Thenstart the engine again to reset the system. Ifthe light still stays on, or comes on again whileyou are driving, your vehicle needs service. If theregular brake system warning light is not on,you still have brakes, but you do not have anti-lockbrakes. If the regular brake system warning lightis also on, you do not have anti-lock brakesand there is a problem with the regular brakes.See Brake System Warning Light on page 166.

The ABS warning light comes on briefly when youturn the ignition key to ON. This is normal. Ifthe light does not come on then, have it fixed so itwill be ready to warn you if there is a problem.

Low Tire Pressure Warning Light

This light should comeon briefly as you startthe engine.

It will then come on only when a low tire pressurecondition exists.

See Tire Pressure Monitor System on page 330for more information.


167

Traction Control System (TCS)Warning Light

This light should comeon briefly when youstart the engine.

If it stays on or comes on while you are driving,there is a problem with your Traction ControlSystem (TCS).The TCS warning light comes on briefly when theignition is turned to ON. It will come on againwhen you press the TRAC OFF button to turn offthe TCS. See Traction Control System (TCS)on page 230 for more information.In the following cases, contact your dealer:• The indicator light does not come on when the

ignition is turned to ON.• The indicator light remains on after the ignition

is turned ON.• The indicator light comes on with the normal

driving mode while driving.

StabiliTrak® Indicator Light

This light warns thatthere is a problem withthe Traction ControlSystem (TCS) orthe Vehicle StabilityControl (VSC) system.

The light will come on when the ignition is turnedto ON and will go off after a few seconds.

If the light comes on while driving, the systemdoes not work. However, as conventional brakingoperates when applied, there is no problem tocontinue driving.

168

In the following cases, contact your dealer:

• The warning light does not come on after theignition is turned to ON.

• The warning light remains on after the ignitionis turned to ON.

• The warning light comes on while driving.

The TCS light will come on when the VSC systemwarning light comes on, even if the TRAC OFFbutton is not pressed.

See StabiliTrak® System on page 231 for moreinformation on Vehicle Stability Control System.

See Traction Control System (TCS) on page 230for more information.

Engine Coolant Temperature Gage

This gage shows the engine coolant temperature.If the gage pointer moves into the red area,the engine is too hot. It means that the engine hasoverheated. Pull off the road, stop your vehicle,and turn off the engine as soon as possible.See Engine Overheating on page 297.


169

Malfunction Indicator Lamp

Check Engine Light

Your vehicle has a computer which monitorsoperation of the fuel, ignition, and emission controlsystems.

This system is called OBD II (On-BoardDiagnostics-Second Generation) and is intended toassure that emissions are at acceptable levels forthe life of the vehicle, helping to produce a cleanerenvironment. The CHECK ENGINE light comes onto indicate that there is a problem and service isrequired. Malfunctions often will be indicated by thesystem before any problem is apparent. This mayprevent more serious damage to your vehicle. Thissystem is also designed to assist your servicetechnician in correctly diagnosing any malfunction.

Notice: If you keep driving your vehicle withthis light on, after awhile, the emission controlsmight not work as well, your vehicle’s fueleconomy might not be as good, and the enginemight not run as smoothly. This could leadto costly repairs that might not be covered byyour warranty.

Notice: Modifications made to the engine,transaxle, exhaust, intake, or fuel systemof your vehicle or replacement tires that do notmatch your vehicle’s original tires can affectyour vehicle’s emission controls and maycause this light to come on. Modifications tothese systems could lead to costly repairs notcovered by your warranty. This may alsoresult in a failure to pass a required EmissionInspection/Maintenance test. See Accessoriesand Modifications on page 272.

This light should come on, as a check to showyou it is working, when the ignition is on and theengine is not running. If the light does notcome on, have it repaired.


170

This light will also come on during a malfunction inone of two ways:

• Light Flashing — A misfire condition hasbeen detected. A misfire increases vehicleemissions and may damage the emissioncontrol system on your vehicle. Diagnosis andservice may be required.

• Light On Steady — An emission controlsystem malfunction has been detected on yourvehicle. Diagnosis and service may berequired.

If the Light Is FlashingThe following may prevent more serious damageto your vehicle:

• Reducing vehicle speed

• Avoiding hard accelerations

• Avoiding steep uphill grades

• If you are towing a trailer, reduce the amountof cargo being hauled as soon as it ispossible

If the light stops flashing and remains on steady,see “If the Light Is On Steady” following.

If the light continues to flash, when it is safe to doso, stop the vehicle. Find a safe place to parkyour vehicle. Turn the key off, wait at least10 seconds and restart the engine. If the lightremains on steady, see “If the Light Is On Steady”following. If the light is still flashing, follow theprevious steps, and see your dealer for service assoon as possible.

If the Light Is On SteadyYou also may be able to correct the emissionsystem malfunction by considering the following:

Did you recently put fuel into your vehicle?

If so, reinstall the fuel cap, making sure to fullyinstall the cap. See Filling the Tank on page 277.The diagnostic system can determine if thefuel cap has been left off or improperly installed.A loose or missing fuel cap will allow fuel toevaporate into the atmosphere. A few driving tripswith the cap properly installed should turn thelight off.

171

Did you just drive through a deep puddle of water?

If so, your electrical system may be wet. Thecondition will usually be corrected when theelectrical system dries out. A few driving tripsshould turn the light off.

Have you recently changed brands of fuel?

If so, be sure to fuel your vehicle with quality fuel.See Gasoline Octane on page 274. Poor fuelquality will cause your engine not to run asefficiently as designed. You may notice this asstalling after start-up, stalling when you putthe vehicle into gear, misfiring, hesitation onacceleration, or stumbling on acceleration. (Theseconditions may go away once the engine iswarmed up.) This will be detected by the systemand cause the light to turn on.

If you experience one or more of these conditions,change the fuel brand you use. It will require atleast one full tank of the proper fuel to turn thelight off.

If none of the above steps have made the lightturn off, your dealer can check the vehicle.Your dealer has the proper test equipment anddiagnostic tools to fix any mechanical or electricalproblems that may have developed.

Emissions Inspection and MaintenanceProgramsSome state/provincial and local governments haveor may begin programs to inspect the emissioncontrol equipment on your vehicle. Failure to passthis inspection could prevent you from getting avehicle registration.

Here are some things you need to know to helpyour vehicle pass an inspection:

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if theCheck Engine light is on or not working properly.

Your vehicle will not pass this inspection if the OBD(on-board diagnostic) system determines thatcritical emission control systems have not beencompletely diagnosed by the system. The vehiclewould be considered not ready for inspection. Thiscan happen if you have recently replaced yourbattery or if your battery has run down. Thediagnostic system is designed to evaluate criticalemission control systems during normal driving.This may take several days of routine driving. If youhave done this and your vehicle still does not passthe inspection for lack of OBD system readiness,your dealer can prepare the vehicle for inspection.

172

Oil Pressure Light

If there is a problemwith the oil, this lightmay stay on afteryou start the engine orcome on while youare driving.

{CAUTION:

Do not keep driving if the oil pressure islow. If you do, your engine can become sohot that it catches fire. You or otherscould be burned. Check your oil as soonas possible and have your vehicleserviced.

Notice: Lack of proper engine oil maintenancemay damage the engine. The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Always followthe maintenance schedule in this manual forchanging engine oil.

This indicates that there is not enough oil pressureto keep the engine properly lubricated and cool.

The engine could be low on oil, or have someother oil related problem. Have it fixed right away.

The oil light could also come on in three othersituations.

• When the ignition is on but the engine is notrunning, the light comes on as a test toshow you it is working, but the light goes outwhen you turn the ignition to START. If itdoes not come on with the ignition on,you could have a problem with the fuse orbulb. Have it fixed right away.

• Sometimes when the engine is idling at astop, the light could blink on and off. Haveit checked at your dealer.

• If you make a hard stop, the light could comeon for a moment. Have it checked at yourdealer.

173

Lights On Reminder

This light comes onwhenever the headlightsare on.

See Headlamps on Reminder on page 146 formore information.

Taillamp Indicator Light

This light will come onwhen your taillampsare on.

See Exterior Lamps on page 146 for moreinformation.

Cruise Control Light

The CRUISE lightcomes on whenever youpress the ON-OFFbutton to set your cruisecontrol.

See Cruise Control Light on page 174 for moreinformation.

Overdrive Off Light

The automatic transaxlehas overdrive. This lightcomes on wheneveryou turn off theoverdrive.

See Overdrive Off on page 111 for moreinformation.

Canada Only

174

Highbeam On Light

This light comes onwhen the high-beamheadlamps are in use.

See Headlamp High/Low-Beam Changer onpage 140.

Low Washer Fluid Warning Light

This light will come onwhen your windshieldwasher fluid is low.

See Windshield Washer Fluid on page 305 formore information.

Door Ajar Light

This light will come on ifany door, the rearliftgate or the rearliftglass are notcompletely closed.

Canada Only

175

Fuel Gage

The fuel gage shows about how much fuel is inyour fuel tank. An arrow on the fuel gage indicatesthat the fuel filler door is on the driver side ofyour vehicle. The fuel gage works only when theignition switch is ON. When the gage first indicatesE or empty, you still have a little fuel left, about1 or 2 gallons (3.8 L or 7.6 L), but you need to getmore right away. When your vehicle is low onfuel the low fuel warning light, located below theempty mark, will also come on to remind youto add fuel.

Here are five things some owners ask about.None of these show a problem with the fuel gage:

• At the gas station, the fuel pump shuts offbefore the gage reads F or full.

• It takes a little more or less fuel to fill up thanthe gage indicated. For example, the gagemay have indicated the tank was half full, butit actually took more or less than half thetank’s capacity to fill it.

• It takes the gage several minutes to read F orfull after filling the vehicle with fuel.

• The gage moves a little when you turn, stopor speed up.

• The gage does not go back to E or emptywhen you turn off the ignition.


176

Low Fuel Warning Light

This light is located onthe fuel gage andcomes on when the fueltank is low on fuel.

To turn it off, add fuel to the fuel tank. See Fuelon page 274 for more information.

Audio System(s)Determine which radio your vehicle has and thenread the pages following to familiarize yourselfwith its features.

Driving without distraction is a necessity for asafer driving experience. See Defensive Driving onpage 222. By taking a few moments to read thismanual and get familiar with your vehicle’s

audio system, you can use it with less effort, aswell as take advantage of its features. While yourvehicle is parked, set up your audio system bypresetting your favorite radio stations, setting thetone and adjusting the speakers. Then, whendriving conditions permit, you can tune toyour favorite stations using the presets andsteering wheel controls if the vehicle has them.

{CAUTION:

This system provides you with a far greateraccess to audio stations and song listings.Giving extended attention to entertainmenttasks while driving can cause a crash andyou or others can be injured or killed.Always keep your eyes on the road andyour mind on the drive — avoid engagingin extended searching while driving.

177

Keeping your mind on the drive is important forsafe driving. Here are some ways in which you canhelp avoid distraction while driving.

While your vehicle is parked:

• Familiarize yourself with all of its controls.

• Familiarize yourself with its operation.

• Set up your audio system by presetting yourfavorite radio stations, setting the tone, andadjusting the speakers. Then, when drivingconditions permit, you can tune to your favoriteradio stations using the presets and steeringwheel controls if the vehicle has them.

Notice: Before adding any sound equipment toyour vehicle, such as an audio system, CDplayer, CB radio, mobile telephone, or two-wayradio, make sure that it can be added bychecking with your dealer. Also, check federalrules covering mobile radio and telephoneunits. If sound equipment can be added, it isvery important to do it properly. Added soundequipment can interfere with the operation ofyour vehicle’s engine, radio, or other systems,and even damage them. Your vehicle’s systemscan interfere with the operation of soundequipment that has been added.

Setting the TimeThe radio might have a button marked with anH or HR to represent hours and an M or MIN torepresent minutes.

Press and hold the hour button until the correcthour displays. AM appears for morning hours.Press and hold the minute button until the correctminute displays. The time can be set with theignition on or off.

To synchronize the time with an FM stationbroadcasting Radio Data System (RDS)information, press and hold the hour and minutebuttons at the same time until UPDATED displays.If the time is not available from the station, NOUPDATE displays.

RDS time is broadcast once a minute. After tuningto an RDS broadcast station, it could take afew minutes for the time to update.

178

Radio with CD (Base Level)

The radio has a theft-deterrent feature. A red lightblinks while the engine is off to indicate theradio is protected. It will not operate if it is installedin a different vehicle.

Radio Data System (RDS)The audio system has a Radio Data System(RDS). RDS features are available for use only onFM stations that broadcast RDS information.

With RDS, the radio can do the following:

• Seek to stations broadcasting the selectedtype of programming

• Receive announcements concerning local andnational emergencies

• Display messages from radio stations

• Seek to stations with traffic announcements

This system relies upon receiving specificinformation from these stations and only workswhen the information is available. In rare cases, aradio station can broadcast incorrect informationthat causes the radio features to work improperly.If this happens, contact the radio station.

While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters display instead of thefrequency. RDS stations can also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.

179

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ is a satellite radio service that is based inthe 48 contiguous United States and Canada.XM™ offers a large variety of coast-to-coastchannels including music, news, sports, talk,traffic/weather (U.S. subscribers), and children’sprogramming. XM™ provides digital qualityaudio and text information that includes song titleand artist name. A service fee is required inorder to receive the XM™ service. For moreinformation, contact XM™; In the U.S. atwww.xmradio.com or call 1-800-852-XMXM (9696)or in Canada at www.xmradio.ca or call1-877-GET-XMSR (438-9677).

Playing the Radio

PWR (Power): Push this knob to turn the systemon and off.

VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decrease thevolume.

RCL (Recall): Push this button to display the timewith the ignition off.

For RDS, push the RCL button to change whatdisplays while using RDS. The display options arestation, RDS station frequency, PTY (programtype), and the name of the program (if available).

For XM™ (if equipped), push the RCL buttonwhile in XM™ mode to retrieve four differentcategories of information related to the currentsong or channel: Artist, Song Title, Categoryor PTY, Channel Number/Channel Name.

To change the default on the display, push theRCL button until the desired option displays, thenhold the button until the display flashes. Theselected display becomes the default.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Thedisplay shows the selection.

TUNE: Turn this knob to select radio stations.

180

wSEEK x: Press the up or the down arrow togo to the next or to the previous station andstay there.

The radio seeks stations only with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

wSCAN x: Press and hold either SCAN arrowfor two seconds until SCAN displays and abeep sounds. The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press either SCAN arrow again to stopscanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than four seconds untilPSCAN and the preset number displays. A doublebeep sounds. The radio goes to the first presetstation stored on your pushbuttons, plays fora few seconds, then goes to the next presetstation. Press either SCAN arrow again to stopscanning presets.

The radio scans stations only with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 30 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM,six XM1 and six XM2 (if equipped)), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:

1. Turn the radio on.

2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, AM, or XM1or XM2.

3. Tune in the desired station.

4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, thestation that was set returns and theequalization that was selected is stored forthat pushbutton.

5. Repeat the steps for each pushbutton.

181

Setting the Tone (Bass/Treble)

TONE: Press and release this button until BASS,MID (midrange), or TREB (treble) displays. TheSELECT LED indicator lights to show that the tonecontrol can be adjusted. Turn the SELECT knobto increase or to decrease the tone. If a station isweak or has static, decrease the treble.

To return all of the tone controls to the middleposition press and hold the TONE buttonuntil FLAT displays.

EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to selectcustomized equalization settings.

Up to six customized equalization settings, can beprogrammed, by performing the following steps:


2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knobto create the equalization.

3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds.SELECT EQ # displays and the EQ symbolflashes.

4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to selectthe EQ number.

5. Press and hold the EQ button to store theequalization setting and the number. EQSAVED displays and a beep sounds.

6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settingsand numbers.

EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for usewith talk radio, but it can be set to a different tone.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance betweenthe right and the left speakers, press and releasethis button until BAL (balance) displays. TheSELECT LED indicator lights to show thatthe speakers can be adjusted. Turn the SELECTknob to move the sound toward the right orthe left speakers.

FADE: To adjust the fade between the front andthe rear speakers, press and release thisbutton until FADE displays. The SELECT LEDindicator lights to show that the speakers can beadjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to move thesound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To return all speaker settings to the middleposition, press and hold the BAL FADE buttonfor two seconds.

182

Finding a Program Type (PTY) Station(RDS and XM™)To select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:

1. Press PROG TYPE to activate program typeselect mode. The PTY symbol displays.

2. Turn the SELECT knob to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, presseither SEEK arrow to select the PTY andtake you to the PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY andthe PTY is displayed, press either SEEKarrow once. If the PTY is not displayed, presseither SEEK arrow twice to display the PTYand then to go to another station.

5. Press PROG TYPE to exit program typeselect mode.If PTY times out and is no longer on thedisplay, go back to Step 1.

If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio searchesfor stations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

w SCAN x: Scan the stations within a PTY byperforming the following:



3. Once the desired PTY displays, press andhold either SCAN arrow, and the radiobegins scanning the stations in the PTY.

4. Press either SCAN arrow to stop at a station.

If both PTY and TRAF are on, the radio scansfor stations with the selected PTY and trafficannouncements.

BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency lets the radio switch to a stronger FMstation with the same program type. To turnalternate frequency on, press and hold BAND fortwo seconds. AF ON displays. The radio canswitch to FM stations with a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and holdBAND again for two seconds. AF OFF displays.The radio does not switch to stronger FM stations.

This function does not apply for XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

183

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Upto 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.



4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTYthat was set returns, if program type selectmode is on.


RDS MessagesALERT!: Alert warns of local or nationalemergencies. When an alert announcementcomes on the current radio station, ALERT!displays. You will hear the announcement, even ifthe volume is low or a CD is playing. If a CD isplaying, play stops during the announcement. Alertannouncements cannot be turned off.ALERT! is not affected by tests of the emergencybroadcast system. This feature is not supportedby all RDS stations.

INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO displays. Press this button tosee the message. The message can display theartist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage displays every three seconds. Toscroll through the message, press and release theINFO button. A new group of words displaysafter every press of the button. Once the completemessage displays, INFO disappears from thedisplay until another new message is received.The last message can be displayed by pressingthe INFO button. The last message is shown untila new message is received or you tune to adifferent station.

184

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF displays, the tunedstation broadcasts traffic announcements. Pressthis button to receive the traffic announcementfrom the station. TRAF inside brackets displays.When a traffic announcement broadcasts onthe tuned radio station, you will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press the TRAF button and theradio seeks to a station that does. When a stationthat broadcasts traffic announcements is found,the radio stops seeking and TRAF inside bracketsdisplays. If no station is found that broadcaststraffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC displays.

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,press the TRAF button to remove the bracketsor use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to goto a station that broadcasts traffic announcements.If no station is found that broadcasts trafficannouncements, NO TRAFFIC displays.

The radio plays the traffic announcement if thevolume is low. The radio interrupts the playof a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements and the brackets are displayed.

This function does not apply to XM™ SatelliteRadio Service.

Radio MessagesIf any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer.

Radio Messages for XM™ OnlySee XM Radio Messages on page 216 later in thissection for further detail.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and the CD should beginplaying. If you insert a CD with the radio off andthe ignition on, it starts to play.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player, it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts playingwhere it stopped, if it was the last selected audiosource.

When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displayson the CD. As each new track starts to play,the track number displays.

The CD player can play the smaller 3 inch (8 cm)single CDs with an adapter ring. Full-size CDsand the smaller CDs are loaded in the samemanner.

185

If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can bereduced due to CD-R quality, the method ofrecording, the quality of the music that has beenrecorded, and the way the CD-R has beenhandled. There can be an increase in skipping,difficulty in finding tracks, and/or difficulty in loadingand ejecting. If these problems occur, check thebottom surface of the CD. If the surface of the CDis damaged, such as cracked, broken, orscratched, the CD will not play properly. If thesurface of the CD is soiled, see Care of Your CDson page 219 for more information.

If there is no apparent damage, try a knowngood CD.

Do not add any label to a CD, it could get caughtin the CD player. If a CD is recorded on apersonal computer and a description label isneeded, try labeling the top of the recorded CDwith a marking pen.

Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or morethan one CD is inserted into the slot at a time,or an attempt is made to play scratched ordamaged CDs, the CD player could bedamaged. While using the CD player, use onlyCDs in good condition without any label,load one CD at a time, and keep the CD playerand the loading slot free of foreign materials,liquids, and debris.

If an error displays, see “CD Messages” later inthis section.

\1 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbuttonto advance quickly within a track. Sound isheard at a reduced volume. Release thepushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed timeof the track displays.

RDM 3 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hearthe tracks in random, rather than sequential,order. RDM and the track number displays. PressRDM again to turn off random play.

186

4s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbuttonto reverse quickly within a track. Sound is heard ata reduced volume. Release the pushbutton toplay the passage. The elapsed time of the trackdisplays.

EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select anequalization setting while playing a CD. Theequalization is set when a CD is played. See “EQ”listed previously for more information. If youselect an EQ setting for your CD, it is activatedeach time a CD is played.

wSEEK x: Press the down arrow to go to thestart of the current track if more than eight secondshave played. Press the up arrow to go to thenext track. If either arrow is held or pressed morethan once, the player continues moving backwardor forward through the CD.

wSCAN x: Press and hold either arrow formore than two seconds until SCAN and the tracknumber displays and a beep sounds. The CDgoes to the next track, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next track. Press either arrowagain to stop scanning.

RCL (Recall): Push this button to see how longthe current track has been playing. To change thedefault on the display, track, and elapsed time,push the button until the desired option displays,then hold the button until the display flashes.The selected display becomes the default. Whileelapsed time is showing, CD TIME displays.

BAND: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD remainsinside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD when listening to the radio. The CD symboldisplays when a CD is loaded.

Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Ejectcan be activated with either the ignition or radiooff. CDs can be loaded with the ignition and radiooff if this button is pressed first.

187

CD Messages

CHECK CD: If this message displays and/or theCD comes out, it could be for one of thefollowing reasons:

• It is very hot. When the temperature returns tonormal, the CD should play.

• You are driving on a very rough road. Whenthe road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.

• The CD is dirty, scratched, wet, orupside down.

• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.

• The label could be caught in the CD player.

If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.

If any error occurs repeatedly or if an error cannotbe corrected, contact your dealer. If the radiodisplays an error message, write it downand provide it to your dealer when reporting theproblem.

Radio with CD (MP3)


188








While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or the call letters display instead ofthe frequency. RDS stations can also providethe time of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the programbeing broadcast.

Playing the Radio


VOL (Volume): Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decrease thevolume.

RCL (Recall): Push this button to switch thedisplay between the radio station frequency andthe time. When the ignition is turned off, push thisbutton to display the time.

To change the default on the display, push theRCL button until the desired option displays, thenhold the button until the display flashes. Theselected display becomes the default.

Finding a Station

BAND: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, AM, or XM1 or XM2 (if equipped). Thedisplay shows the selection.


189

w SEEK x: Press the up or the down arrow togo to the next or to the previous station andstay there.

The radio only seeks stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

w SCAN x: Press and hold either SCAN arrowfor two seconds until SCAN displays and abeep sounds. The radio goes to a station, playsfor a few seconds, then goes to the nextstation. Press either SCAN arrow again to stopscanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than four seconds untilPSCAN and the preset number displays and adouble beep sounds. The radio goes to thefirst preset station, plays for a few seconds, thengoes to the next preset station. Press eitherSCAN arrow again to stop scanning presets.

The radio scans stations only with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:


2. Press BAND to select FM1, FM2, or AM.


4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, thestation that was set, returns and theequalization that was selected is stored forthat pushbutton.


190

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

TONE: Press and release this button until BASS,MID (midrange), or TREB (treble) displays. TheSELECT LED indicator lights to show that the tonecontrol can be adjusted. Turn the SELECT knobto increase or to decrease. If a station is weakor has static, decrease the treble.

Pressing and holding the TONE button until FLATdisplays, returns all of the tone controls to themiddle position.

EQ (Equalizer): Press this button to selectcustomized bass, midrange, and trebleequalization settings.

Up to six customized equalization settings, can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons,by performing the following steps:


2. Use the TONE button and the SELECT knobto create the desired equalization.

3. Press and hold the EQ button for two seconds.SELECT EQ # displays and the EQ symbolflashes.

4. Press EQ or turn the SELECT knob to selectthe desired EQ number.

5. Press and hold the EQ button to store theequalization setting and the number. Abeep sounds and EQ SAVED displays.

6. Repeat the steps for the other EQ settingsand numbers.

EQ 5 has been programmed at the factory for usewith talk radio, but it can be set to a different tone.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)BAL (Balance): To adjust the balance betweenthe right and the left speakers, press and releasethis button until BAL displays. The SELECTLED indicator lights to show that the speakers canbe adjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to movethe sound toward the right or the left speakers.

FADE: To adjust the fade between the front andthe rear speakers, press and release thisbutton until FADE displays. The SELECT LEDindicator lights to show that the speakers can beadjusted. Turn the SELECT knob to move thesound toward the front or the rear speakers.

Pressing and holding the BAL FADE button fortwo seconds returns all speaker settings tothe middle position.

191

Finding a Program Type (PTY)Station (RDS)To select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:



3. Once the desired PTY displays, press eitherSEEK arrow to select the PTY and to takeyou to the PTY’s first station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY, andthe PTY displays, press either SEEK arrowonce. If the PTY is not displayed, press eitherSEEK arrow twice to display the PTY andthen to go to another station.

5. Press PROG TYPE to exit program typeselect mode.If PTY times out and is no longer on thedisplay, go back to Step 1.


w SCAN x: Scan the stations within a PTY byperforming the following:



3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press andhold either SCAN arrow, and the radio beginsscanning the stations in the PTY.



BAND (Alternate Frequency): Alternatefrequency lets the radio switch to a stronger FMstation with the same program type. To turnalternate frequency on, press and hold BAND fortwo seconds. AF ON displays. The radio canswitch to FM stations with a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and holdBAND again for two seconds. AF OFF displays.The radio does not switch to stronger FM stations.

192

Setting Preset PTYs (RDS Only)These pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Upto 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:

1. Press BAND to select FM1 or FM2.



4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTYthat was set, returns, if program type selectmode is activated.



INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO displays. Press this button tosee the message. The message can display theartist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage displays every three seconds. Toscroll through the message, press and release theINFO button. A new group of words displayafter every press of this button. Once the completemessage has displayed, the information symboldisappears from the display until another newmessage is received. The last message can bedisplayed by pressing the INFO button. Thelast message is shown until a new message isreceived or you tune to a different station.

193

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF displays, the tunedstation broadcasts traffic announcements.To receive the traffic announcement from thetuned station, press this button. Bracketsare displayed around TRAF and when a trafficannouncement broadcasts on the tuned radiostation, you will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press the TRAF button and theradio seeks to a station that does. When a stationthat broadcasts traffic announcements is found,the radio stops seeking and brackets are displayedaround TRAF. If no station is found thatbroadcasts traffic announcements, NO TRAFFICdisplays.

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,press the TRAF button to remove the bracketsor use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to goto a station that supports traffic announcements.If no station is found that broadcasts trafficannouncements, NO TRAFFIC displays.

The radio plays the traffic announcement if thevolume is low. The radio interrupts the playof a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements and the brackets display.

Playing a CDInsert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in and READING DISC and theCD symbol displays. If you want to insert a CDwith the ignition off, first press the eject button orpush the RCL button.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts to playwhere it stopped, if it was the last selected audiosource.

When the CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays.As each new track starts to play, the tracknumber displays.


194




Notice: If a label is added to a CD, or more thanone CD is inserted into the slot at a time, or anattempt is made to play scratched or damagedCDs, the CD player could be damaged. Whileusing the CD player, use only CDs in goodcondition without any label, load one CD at atime, and keep the CD player and the loadingslot free of foreign materials, liquids, anddebris.


\ 1 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbuttonto advance quickly within a track. Sound isheard at a reduced volume. Release thispushbutton to play the passage. The elapsed timeof the track displays.

RDM 2 (Random): Press this pushbutton to hearthe tracks in random, rather than sequential,order. RDM and the track number displays. PressRDM again to turn off random play.

# 3 (Next Folder): This button does not have afunction for non-MP3 CDs.

195

4s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbuttonto reverse quickly within a track. Sound is heardat a reduced volume. Release this pushbuttonto play the passage. The elapsed time of the trackdisplays.

6 ! (Previous Folder): This button does nothave a function for non-MP3 CDs.

EQ (Equalizer): Press EQ to select the desiredcustomized equalization setting while playinga CD. The equalization is automatically setwhenever a CD is played. See “EQ” listedpreviously for more information.

w SEEK x: Press the up arrow to go to thestart of the next track. Press the down arrow to goto the start of the previous track. Pressingeither arrow for more than two seconds searchesthe previous or next tracks at two tracks persecond. When the desired track number displays,release the arrow to stop searching and to playthe track.

w SCAN x: Press and hold either arrow formore than two seconds until SCAN and the tracknumber displays and a beep sounds. The CDgoes to the next track, plays for a few seconds,then goes to the next track. Press either arrowagain to stop scanning.

RCL (Recall): Push this button to see how longthe current track has been playing. To change thedefault on the display, track and elapsed time,push the button until the desired option displays,then hold the button until the display flashes.The selected display is now the default. Whileelapsed time displays, CD TIME displays.



Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Ejectcan be activated with either the ignition or radiooff. CDs can be loaded with the radio and ignitionoff if this button is pressed first.

196

Playing an MP3 CD-R DiscYour vehicle’s radio system may have the MP3feature. If it has this feature, it is capable of playingan MP3 CD-R disc. For more information onhow to play an MP3 CD-R disc, see Using an MP3on page 210 later in this section.

CD Messages



• You are driving on a very rough road.When the road becomes smoother, the CDshould play.


• The air is very humid. If so, wait about anhour and try again.

• The format of the CD may not be compatible.See Using an MP3 on page 210 later in thissection.

• There could have been a problem whileburning the CD.


If the CD is not playing correctly, for anyother reason, try a known good CD.


197

Radio with Six-Disc CD

If your vehicle has the Monsoon audio system, itincludes seven speakers. The radio displaysMONSOON while the radio or the ignition is turnedon. See your dealer for details.


Playing the Radio


VOLUME: Turn this knob clockwise orcounterclockwise to increase or to decrease thevolume.

RCL (Recall): Press this button to display thecurrent radio station frequency. While the ignitionis off, press this button to display the time.

To change the default on the display, press theRCL button until the desired option displays, thenhold the button until the display flashes. Theselected display is now the default.

198

Finding a Station

AM/FM: Press this button to switch between FM1,FM2, or AM. The selection displays.


sSEEK t: Press the right or the left arrow to goto the next or to the previous station and stay there.

The radio only seeks stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

sSCAN t: Press and hold either SCAN arrowfor two seconds until SC displays and a beepsounds. The radio goes to a station, plays for afew seconds, then goes to the next station. Presseither SCAN arrow again to stop scanning.

To scan preset stations, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than four seconds. PRESETSCAN displays and a double beep sounds. Theradio goes to a preset station stored on thepushbuttons, plays for a few seconds, then goesto the next preset station. Press either SCANarrow again to stop scanning presets.

The radio only scans stations with a strong signalthat are in the selected band.

Setting Preset StationsUp to 18 stations (six FM1, six FM2, and six AM),can be programmed on the six numberedpushbuttons, by performing the following steps:


2. Press AM/FM to select FM1, FM2, or AM.


4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, thestation that was set, returns and theequalization that was selected, is stored forthat pushbutton.


199

Setting the Tone(Bass/Midrange/Treble)

AUDIO: Push and release the AUDIO knob untilBASS, MID (midrange), or TREB (treble)displays. Turn the knob to increase or to decreasethe tone. If a station is weak or has static,decrease the treble.

To adjust bass, midrange, or treble to the middleposition, select BASS, MID, or TREB and pushand hold the AUDIO knob. The radio beeps onceand adjusts the display level to the middleposition.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker controls display.CENTERED displays and a beep sounds.

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): Press thisbutton to select customized equalization settingsdesigned for country, jazz, talk, pop, rock, andclassical.

To return to the manual mode, press the AUTOEQ button until CUSTOM displays. Then manuallyadjust the bass, midrange, and treble using theAUDIO knob.

Adjusting the Speakers (Balance/Fade)

AUDIO: To adjust the balance between theright and the left speakers, push and release theAUDIO knob until BAL (balance) displays.Turn the knob to move the sound toward the rightor the left speakers.

To adjust the fade between the front and rearspeakers, push and release the AUDIO knob untilFAD (fade) displays. Turn the knob to movethe sound toward the front or the rear speakers.

To adjust the balance and the fade to themiddle position, select balance or fade and pushand hold the AUDIO knob. The radio beepsonce and adjusts the display level to the middleposition.

To adjust all tone and speaker controls to themiddle position, push and hold the AUDIO knobwhen no tone or speaker controls display.CENTERED displays and a beep sounds.

200








While the radio is tuned to an RDS station, thestation name or call letters display instead of thefrequency. RDS stations can also provide thetime of day, a program type (PTY) for currentprogramming, and the name of the program beingbroadcast.

Finding a Program Type (PTY) StationTo select and find a desired PTY perform thefollowing:

1. Press the P-TYPE button to activate programtype select mode. P-TYPE and the lastselected PTY displays.

2. Turn the P-TYPE knob to select a PTY.

3. Once the desired PTY displays, press eitherSEEK arrow to select and to go to the PTY’sfirst station.

4. To go to another station within that PTY andthe PTY displays, press either SEEK arrowonce. If the PTY does not display, press eitherSEEK arrow twice to display the PTY andthen to go to another station.

5. Press the P-TYPE button to exit program typeselect mode.If PTY times out and is no longer on thedisplay, go back to Step 1.


201

To use the PTY interrupt feature, press and holdthe P-TYPE button until a beep sounds on thePTY you want to interrupt with. When selected, anasterisk displays beside that PTY on the display.Select multiple interrupts if desired. When listeningto a CD, the last selected RDS station interruptsplay if that selected program type format isbroadcast.

s SCAN t: Scan the stations within a PTY byperforming the following:



3. Once the desired PTY is displayed, press andhold either SCAN arrow, and the radio beginsscanning the stations in the PTY.



Alternate Frequency: Alternate frequencyallows the radio to switch to a stronger FM stationwith the same program type. To turn alternatefrequency on, press and hold AM/FM fortwo seconds. AF ON displays. The radio canswitch to FM stations with a stronger frequency.

To turn alternate frequency off, press and holdAM/FM again for two seconds. AF OFF displays.The radio does not switch to stronger FM stations.

Setting Preset PTYsThese pushbuttons have factory PTY presets. Upto 12 PTYs (six FM1 and six FM2), can beprogrammed on the six numbered pushbuttons, byperforming the following steps:

1. Press AM/FM to select FM1 or FM2.



4. Press and hold one of the six numberedpushbuttons until a beep sounds. Whenthat numbered pushbutton is pressed, the PTYthat was set, returns.


202


INFO (Information): If the current station has amessage, INFO displays. Press this button tosee the message. The message can display theartist, song title, call in phone numbers, etc.If the entire message is not displayed, parts of themessage displays every three seconds. Toscroll through the message, press and release theINFO button. A new group of words displayafter every press of this button. Once the completemessage displays, INFO disappears from thedisplay until another new message is received.The last message can be displayed by pressingthe INFO button. The last message is shown untila new message is received or you tune to adifferent station.

TRAF (Traffic): If TRAF displays, the tunedstation broadcasts traffic announcements.To receive the traffic announcement from thetuned station, press this button. Bracketsare displayed around TRAF and when a trafficannouncement broadcasts on the tuned radiostation, you will hear it.

If the station does not broadcast trafficannouncements, press the TRAF button and theradio seeks to a station that does. When a stationthat broadcasts traffic announcements is found,the radio stops seeking and brackets are displayedaround TRAF. If no station is found that broadcasttraffic announcements, NO TRAFFIC displays.

If the brackets are on the display and TRAF is not,press the TRAF button to remove the bracketsor use the TUNE knob or the SEEK arrows to goto a station that supports traffic announcements.If no station is found that broadcasts trafficannouncements, NO TRAFFIC displays.

The radio plays the traffic announcements if thevolume is low. The radio interrupts the playof a CD if the last tuned station broadcasts trafficannouncements and the brackets display.

203

Playing a CDIf the ignition or radio is turned off, with a CD in theplayer, it stays in the player. When the ignition orradio is turned on, the CD starts playing where itstopped, if it was the last selected audio source.

When a CD is inserted, the CD symbol displays onthe CD. As each new track starts to play, thetrack number displays.


If playing a CD-R, the sound quality can be reduceddue to CD-R quality, the method of recording, thequality of the music that has been recorded, and theway the CD-R has been handled. There can be anincrease in skipping, difficulty in finding tracks,and/or difficulty in loading and ejecting. If theseproblems occur, check the bottom surface of theCD. If the surface of the CD is damaged, such ascracked, broken, or scratched, the CD will not playproperly. If the surface of the CD is soiled, see Careof Your CDs on page 219 for more information.





LOAD CDZ: Press the LOAD side of thisbutton to load CDs into the CD player. This CDplayer holds up to six CDs.

To insert one CD, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and release the LOAD button.

3. Wait for the indicator light, located to the rightof the slot, to turn green.

204

4. Load a CD. Insert the CD partway intothe slot, label side up. The player pullsthe CD in.

To insert multiple CDs, do the following:

1. Turn the ignition on.

2. Press and hold the LOAD button fortwo seconds.A beep sounds and the indicator light, locatedto the right of the slot, begins to flash.

3. Once the light stops flashing and turns green,load a CD. Insert the CD partway into the slot,label side up. The player pulls the CD in.Once the CD is loaded, the light beginsflashing again. Once the light stops flashingand turns green you can load another CD. TheCD player takes up to six CDs. Do not try toload more than six.

To load more than one CD but less than six,complete Steps 1 through 3. When finished loadingCDs, the radio begins to play the last CD loaded.

If more than one CD has been loaded, anumber for each CD displays.

Playing a Specific Loaded CDFor every CD loaded, a number appears on thedisplay. To play a specific CD, first press theCD AUX button, then press the numberedpushbutton that corresponds to the CD. A smallbar appears under the CD number that isplaying and the track number displays.

If an error appears on the display, see “CDMessages” later in this section.

LOAD CDZ (Eject): Press the CD eject side ofthis button to eject a CD(s). To eject the CDthat is currently playing, press and release thisbutton. To eject multiple CDs, press and hold thisbutton for two seconds. A beep sounds andthe indicator light flashes while a CD is beingejected.

REMOVE CD displays. The CD can be removed.If the CD is not removed, after 25 seconds,the CD automatically pulls back into the player. Ifthe CD is pushed back into the player, beforethe 25 second time period is complete, the playersenses an error and tries to eject the CDseveral times before stopping.

205

Do not repeatedly press the CD eject button toeject a CD after trying to push it in manually. Theplayer’s 25-second eject timer resets at eachpress of eject, causing the player to not eject theCD until the 25-second time period has elapsed.

Once the player stops and the CD is ejected,remove the CD. After removing the CD, push thePWR knob off and then on again, or wait forthe system to reset. This clears the CD-sensingfeature and enables CDs to be loaded intothe player again.

{ REV (Reverse): Press and hold this button toreverse quickly within a track. Sound is heardat a reduced volume. Release this button to playthe passage. The elapsed time of the trackdisplays.

FWD | (Forward): Press and hold this button toadvance quickly within a track. Sound is heardat a reduced volume. Release this button to playthe passage. The elapsed time of the trackdisplays.

RPT (Repeat): With the repeat setting, one trackor an entire CD can be repeated.

To use repeat, do the following:

• To repeat the track you are listening to, pressand release the RPT button. RPT displays.Press RPT again to turn off repeat play.

• To repeat the CD you are listening to, pressand hold the RPT button for two seconds.RPT displays. Press RPT again to turnoff repeat play.

RDM (Random): With the random setting, thetracks can be listened to in random order, ratherthan sequential order, on one CD or on all ofthe CDs.

To use random, do one of the following:

• To play the tracks on the CD in random order,press and release the RDM button. RANDOMONE displays. Press RDM again to turn offrandom play.

• To play the tracks on all of the CDs that areloaded in random order, press and hold RDMfor more than two seconds. A beep sounds andRANDOM ALL displays. Press RDM again toturn off random play.

206

AUTO EQ (Automatic Equalization): PressAUTO EQ to select the equalization setting whileplaying a CD. The equalization is storedwhenever a CD is played. For more information onAUTO EQ, see “AUTO EQ” listed previously inthis section.

sSEEK t: Press the left arrow to go to thestart of the current track, if more than ten secondshave played. Press the right arrow to go to thenext track. If either arrow is held or pressed morethan once, the player continues moving backwardor forward through the CD.

sSCAN t: To scan one CD, press and holdeither SCAN arrow for more than two seconds untilSCAN displays and a beep sounds. The radiogoes to the next track, plays for 10 seconds, thengoes to the next track. Press either SCANarrow again, to stop scanning.

To scan all loaded CDs, press and hold eitherSCAN arrow for more than four seconds until CDSCAN displays and a beep sounds. Use thisfeature to listen to 10 seconds of the first track ofeach loaded CD. Press either SCAN arrowagain, to stop scanning.

RCL (Recall): Press this button to see how longthe current track has been playing. To changethe default on the display, track, and elapsed time,press the button until the desired display isshown, then hold the button until the displayflashes. The selected display becomes the default.

AM/FM: Press this button to listen to the radiowhen a CD is playing. The inactive CD(s) remainsinside the radio for future listening.

CD AUX (Auxiliary): Press this button to play aCD when listening to the radio.

Using Song List ModeThe six-disc CD changer has a feature calledsong list. This feature is capable of saving 20 trackselections.

To save tracks into the song list feature, performthe following steps:

1. Turn the CD player on and load it with at leastone CD. See “LOAD CD” listed previously inthis section for more information.

2. Check to see that the CD changer is not insong list mode. S-LIST should not display. IfS-LIST displays, press the SONG LISTbutton to turn it off.

207

3. Select the desired CD by pressing thenumbered pushbutton and then use the SEEKSCAN right arrow to locate the track to besaved. The track begins to play.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button tosave the track into memory. When SONGLIST is pressed, one beep sounds. Aftertwo seconds of continuously pressingthe SONG LIST button, two beeps sound toconfirm the track has been saved.

5. Repeat Steps 3 and 4 for saving otherselections.

S-LIST FULL displays if you try to save more than20 selections.

To play the song list, press the SONG LISTbutton. One beep sounds and S-LIST displays.The recorded tracks begins to play in theorder they were saved.

Seek through the song list by using the SEEKSCAN arrows. Seeking past the last saved trackreturns to the first saved track.

To delete tracks from the song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song liston. S-LIST displays.

3. Press the SEEK SCAN arrows to select thedesired track to be deleted.

4. Press and hold the SONG LIST button fortwo seconds. When SONG LIST is pressed,one beep sounds. After two seconds ofcontinuously pressing the SONG LIST button,two beeps sound to confirm the track hasbeen deleted.

After a track has been deleted, the remainingtracks are moved up the list. When another trackis added to the song list, the track is added tothe end of the list.

208

To delete the entire song list, perform thefollowing steps:

1. Turn the CD player on.

2. Press the SONG LIST button to turn song liston. S-LIST displays.

3. Press and hold the SONG LIST button formore than four seconds. One beep sounds,followed by two beeps after two seconds, anda final beep sounds after four seconds.S-LIST EMPTY displays indicating the songlist has been deleted.

If a CD is ejected, and the song list containssaved tracks from that CD, those tracks areautomatically deleted from the song list. Any trackssaved to the song list again are added to thebottom of the list.

To end song list mode, press the SONG LISTbutton. One beep sounds and S-LIST is removedfrom the display.

CD Messages



• You are driving on a very rough road. When theroad becomes smoother, the CD should play.


• The air is very humid. If so, wait about an hourand try again.

• There could have been a problem while burningthe CD.


If the CD is not playing correctly, for any otherreason, try a known good CD.


209

Using an MP3

MP3 CD-R DiscMP3 FormatIf you burn your own MP3 disc on a personalcomputer:

• Make sure the MP3 files are recorded on aCD-R disc.

• Make sure to finalize the disc when burningan MP3 disc, using multiple sessions. It isusually better to burn the disc all at once.

• Files can be recorded with a variety of fixed orvariable bit rates. Song title, artist name, andalbum are available for display by the radiowhen recorded using ID3 tags version 1 and 2.

• Do not mix standard audio and MP3 fileson one disc.

• Make sure playlists have a .mp3 or .wplextension, other file extensions might not work.

• Create a folder structure that makes it easy tofind songs while driving. Organize songs byalbums using one folder for each album. Eachfolder or album should contain 18 songsor less.

The player is able to read and play a maximumof 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions, and255 files. Long file names, folder names, or playlistnames can use more disc memory space thannecessary. To conserve space on the disc,minimize the length of the file, folder, or playlistnames. You can also play an MP3 CD thatwas recorded using no file folders. The systemcan support up to 11 folders in depth, though, keepthe depth of the folders to a minimum in orderto keep down the complexity and confusionin trying to locate a particular folder duringplayback. If a CD contains more than themaximum of 50 folders, 50 playlists, 10 sessions,and 255 files the player lets you access andnavigate up to the maximum, but all items overthe maximum are ignored.

Root DirectoryThe root directory is treated as a folder. If theroot directory has compressed audio files,the directory is displayed as F1 ROOT. All filescontained directly under the root directoryare accessed prior to any root directory folders.However, playlists (Px) are always be accessedbefore root folders or files.

210

Empty Directory or FolderIf a root directory or a folder exists somewhere inthe file structure that contains only folders/subfolders and no compressed files directlybeneath them, the player advances to the nextfolder in the file structure that contains compressedaudio files. The empty folder does not display.

No FolderWhen the CD contains only compressed files, thefiles are located under the root folder. The nextand previous folder functions do not function on aCD that was recorded without folders or playlists.When displaying the name of the folder theradio displays ROOT.

When the CD contains only playlists andcompressed audio files, but no folders, all filesare located under the root folder. The folder downand the folder up buttons searches playlists (Px)first and then go to the root folder. When the radiodisplays the name of the folder the radiodisplays ROOT.

Order of PlayTracks are played in the following order:

• Play begins from the first track in the firstplaylist and continues sequentially throughall tracks in each playlist. When the last trackof the last playlist has played, play continuesfrom the first track of the first playlist.

• If the CD does not contain any playlists, thenplay begins from the first track under the rootdirectory. When all tracks from the rootdirectory have played, play continues fromfiles according to their numerical listing. Afterplaying the last track from the last folder,play begins again at the first track of the firstfolder or root directory.

When play enters a new folder, the display doesnot automatically show the new folder name unlessyou have chosen the folder mode as the defaultdisplay. See RCL later in this section for moreinformation. The new track name displays.

211

File System and NamingThe song name that displays is the song namethat is contained in the ID3 tag. If the song name isnot present in the ID3 tag, then the radio displaysthe file name without the extension (suchas .mp3) as the track name.

Track names longer than 39 characters or 3 pagesare shortened. The display does not show partsof words on the last page of text and the extensionof the filename does not display.

Preprogrammed PlaylistsPreprogrammed playlists which were created byWinAmp™, MusicMatch™, or Real Jukebox™software can be accessed, however, they cannotbe edited using the radio. These playlists aretreated as special folders containing compressedaudio song files.

Playing an MP3Insert a CD partway into the slot, label side up.The player pulls it in, and READING DISCdisplays. The CD should begin playing and theCD symbol displays. If you want to insert aCD with the ignition off, first press the eject buttonor the RCL button.

If the ignition or radio is turned off with a CD inthe player it stays in the player. When the ignitionor radio is turned on, the CD starts to playwhere it stopped, if it was the last selected audiosource.

As each new track starts to play, the track numberdisplays.




212




\ 1 (Forward): Press and hold this pushbuttonto advance quickly within a track. Press andhold this pushbutton for less than two seconds toadvance at 10 times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two secondsto advance at 20 times the normal playing speed.Release this pushbutton to play the track. FWDand the elapsed time of the track displays.

RDM 2 (Random): To repeat the tracks in thecurrent folder or playlist, press and releasethis pushbutton. FOLDER RANDOM displays.Once all of the tracks in the current folderor playlist have been played, the system moveson to the next folder or playlist and plays all of thetracks in random order.

To repeat the tracks on the CD, press and holdthis pushbutton for two seconds. A beep soundsand DISC RANDOM displays. This featuredoes not work with playlists.

While in random, pressing and releasing eitherSEEK arrow goes to the next or previous randomtrack.

Press and release this pushbutton again to turn offrandom play. NO RANDOM displays.

# 3 (Next Folder): Press this pushbutton to goto the first track in the next folder or playlist. Ifthe disc contains playlists, it goes throughthe playlist, then the folders. Pressing this buttonwhile in folder random mode takes you to thenext folder and randomizes the tracks in thatfolder. This function does not work on a CD thatdoes not contain folders or playlists.

213

4s (Reverse): Press and hold this pushbuttonto reverse quickly within a track. Press andhold this pushbutton for less than two seconds toreverse at 10 times the normal playing speed.Press and hold it for more than two secondsto reverse at 20 times the normal playing speed.Release this pushbutton to play the track. REV andthe elapsed time of the track appears on thedisplay. If this pushbutton is pressed for more than20 seconds, the radio stops reversing andbegins to play.

6 ! (Previous Folder): Press this pushbuttonto go to the first track in the previous folder orplaylist. If the disc contains playlists, it goesthrough the playlist, then the folders. Pressing thispushbutton while in folder random mode takesyou to the previous folder and randomizesthe tracks in that folder. This function does notwork on a CD that does not contain foldersor playlists.

w SEEK x: Press the up arrow to go to thestart of the next track. Press the down arrow to goto the start of the previous track. Pressingeither arrow for more than two seconds searchesthe previous or next tracks at two tracksper second. When the desired track numberdisplays, release the arrow to stop searching andto play the track.

TUNE: Turn this knob to fast track reverse oradvance through tracks in all folders or playlists.The track number and file name appears onthe display for each track. Turn this knob while inrandom to fast track reverse or advance thetracks in sequential order.

214

RCL (Recall): Push this button to switch betweentrack mode, folder, or playlist mode, and time ofday mode. The display shows only 13 characters,but there can be up to three pages of text. Ifthere are more than 13 characters in the song,folder, or playlist name pushing this button withintwo seconds takes you to the next page oftext. If there are no other pages to be shown,pushing this button within two seconds takes youto the next display mode.

Track mode displays the current track number andthe ID3 tag song name.

Folder/playlist mode displays the current folder orplaylist number and the folder/playlist name.

Time of day mode displays the time of day andthe ID3 tag song name.

To change the default on the display, push thisbutton until you see the desired display, then holdthis button for two seconds. The radio producesone beep and the selected display is now thedefault.

INFO (Information): INFO displays whenever acurrent track has ID3 tag information. Pressthis button to display the artist name and albumcontained in the tag. INFO disappears fromthe display when the information in the ID3 taghas finished.



Z (Eject): Press this button to eject a CD. Ejectmay be activated with either the ignition or radiooff. CDs can be loaded with the radio andignition off if this button is pressed first.

215

XM Radio Messages

Radio Display Message Condition Action RequiredXL (Explicit LanguageChannels)

XL on the radio display,after the channel name,indicates content withexplicit language.

These channels, or any others, can be blocked at acustomer’s request, by calling 1-800-852-XMXM (9696).

Updating Updating encryption code The encryption code in the receiver is being updated, andno action is required. This process should take no longerthan 30 seconds.

No Signal Loss of signal The system is functioning correctly, but the vehicle is in alocation that is blocking the XM™ signal. When the vehiclemoves into an open area, the signal should return.

Loading XM Acquiring channel audio(after a four second delay)

The audio system is acquiring and processing audio and textdata. No action is needed. This message should disappearshortly.

CH Off Air Channel not in service This channel is not currently in service. Tune to anotherchannel.

CH Unavail Channel no longeravailable

This previously assigned channel is no longer assigned. Tuneto another station. If this station was one of the presets,choose another station for that preset button.

No Info Artist Name/Featurenot available

No artist information is available at this time on this channel.The system is working properly.

216

Radio Display Message Condition Action RequiredNo Info Song/Program Title not

availableNo song title information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info Category Name notavailable

No category information is available at this time on thischannel. The system is working properly.

No Info No Text/Informationalmessage available

No text or informational messages are available at this timeon this channel. The system is working properly.

Not Found No channel available forthe chosen category

There are no channels available for the selected category.The system is working properly.

XM Locked Theft lock active The XM™ receiver in the vehicle could have previouslybeen in another vehicle. For security purposes, XM™receivers cannot be swapped between vehicles. If thismessage is received after having your vehicle serviced,check with the servicing facility.

Radio ID Radio ID label (channel 0) If tuned to channel 0, this message alternates with theXM™ Radio eight digit radio ID label. This label is neededto activate the service.

Unknown Radio ID not known(should only be ifhardware failure)

If this message is received when tuned to channel 0, therecould be a receiver fault. Consult with your dealer.

Chk XMRcvr Hardware failure If this message does not clear within a short period of time,the receiver could have a fault. Consult with your dealer.

217

Radio ReceptionFrequency interference and static during normalradio reception can occur if items such ascellphone chargers, vehicle convenienceaccessories, and external electronic devices areplugged into the accessory power outlet. If there isinterference or static, unplug the item from theaccessory power outlet.

AMThe range for most AM stations is greater than forFM, especially at night. The longer range can causestation frequencies to interfere with each other. Forbetter radio reception, most AM radio stations boostthe power levels during the day, and then reducethese levels during the night. Static can also occurwhen things like storms and power lines interferewith radio reception. When this happens, tryreducing the treble on your radio.

FM StereoFM stereo gives the best sound, but FM signalsreach about 10 to 40 miles (16 to 65 km). Tallbuildings or hills can interfere with FM signals,causing the sound to fade in and out.

XM™ Satellite Radio ServiceXM™ Satellite Radio Service gives digital radioreception from coast-to-coast in the 48 contiguousUnited States, and in Canada. Just as with FM,tall buildings or hills can interfere with satelliteradio signals, causing the sound to fade in and out.In addition, traveling or standing under heavyfoliage, bridges, garages, or tunnels can causeloss of the XM™ signal for a period of time.The radio could display NO XM SIGNAL to indicateinterference.

218

Care of Your CDsHandle CDs carefully. Store them in their originalcases or other protective cases and away fromdirect sunlight and dust. The CD player scans thebottom surface of the disc. If the surface of aCD is damaged, such as cracked, broken,or scratched, the CD will not play properly or notat all. If the surface of a CD is soiled, take asoft, lint free cloth or dampen a clean, soft cloth ina mild, neutral detergent solution mixed withwater, and clean it. Make sure the wiping processstarts from the center to the edge.

Do not touch the bottom side of a CD whilehandling it; this could damage the surface. Pick upCDs by grasping the outer edges or the edge ofthe hole and the outer edge.

Care of the CD PlayerDo not use CD lens cleaners for CD playersbecause the lens of the CD optics can becomecontaminated by lubricants.

Fixed Mast AntennaThe fixed mast antenna can withstand most carwashes without being damaged. If the mast shouldever become slightly bent, straighten it out byhand. If the mast is badly bent, replace it.

Check occasionally to make sure the mast is stilltightened to the antenna base located on theroof of the vehicle. If tightening is required, tightenby hand.

XM™ Satellite Radio AntennaSystemThe XM™ Satellite Radio antenna is located onthe roof of your vehicle. Keep this antenna clear ofsnow and ice build up for clear radio reception.

A vehicle with a sunroof might not get thebest performance from the XM™ system if thesunroof is open.

Loading items onto the roof of your vehicle caninterfere with the performance of the XM™ system.Make sure the XM™ Satellite Radio antenna isnot obstructed.

219

✍ NOTES

220

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle ............................................ 222Defensive Driving ...................................... 222Drunken Driving ........................................ 223Control of a Vehicle .................................. 226Braking ...................................................... 226Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................. 227Braking in Emergencies ............................. 229Traction Control System (TCS) .................. 230StabiliTrak® System ................................... 231Panic Brake Assist .................................... 231Steering .................................................... 232Off-Road Recovery .................................... 234Passing ..................................................... 235Loss of Control .......................................... 237Driving at Night ......................................... 238

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads ............ 239City Driving ............................................... 242Freeway Driving ........................................ 243Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................. 244Highway Hypnosis ..................................... 245Hill and Mountain Roads ........................... 246Winter Driving ........................................... 248If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand, Mud,

Ice, or Snow .......................................... 252Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It Out ........... 253Loading Your Vehicle ................................ 253

Towing ........................................................ 259Towing Your Vehicle ................................. 259Recreational Vehicle Towing ...................... 259Towing a Trailer ........................................ 261

Section 4 Driving Your Vehicle

221

Your Driving, the Road, andYour Vehicle

Defensive DrivingThe best advice anyone can give about driving is:Drive defensively.

Please start with a very important safety device inyour vehicle: Buckle up. See Safety Belts: TheyAre for Everyone on page 18.

{CAUTION:

Defensive driving really means “Be readyfor anything.” On city streets, rural roads,or expressways, it means “Always expectthe unexpected.” Assume that pedestriansor other drivers are going to be carelessand make mistakes. Anticipate what theymight do and be ready. Rear-endcollisions are about the most preventableof accidents. Yet they are common. Allowenough following distance. Defensivedriving requires that a driver concentrateon the driving task. Anything thatdistracts from the driving task makesproper defensive driving more difficultand can even cause a collision, withresulting injury. Ask a passenger to helpdo these things, or pull off the road in asafe place to do them. These simpledefensive driving techniques could saveyour life.

222

Drunken DrivingDeath and injury associated with drinking anddriving is a national tragedy. It is the number onecontributor to the highway death toll, claimingthousands of victims every year.

Alcohol affects four things that anyone needs todrive a vehicle:

• Judgment

• Muscular Coordination

• Vision

• Attentiveness

Police records show that almost half of all motorvehicle-related deaths involve alcohol. In mostcases, these deaths are the result of someone whowas drinking and driving. In recent years, morethan 16,000 annual motor vehicle-related deathshave been associated with the use of alcohol, withmore than 300,000 people injured.

Many adults — by some estimates, nearly half theadult population — choose never to drink alcohol,so they never drive after drinking. For personsunder 21, it is against the law in every U.S. state todrink alcohol. There are good medical,psychological, and developmental reasons forthese laws.

The obvious way to eliminate the leading highwaysafety problem is for people never to drinkalcohol and then drive. But what if people do?How much is “too much” if someone plansto drive? It is a lot less than many might think.Although it depends on each person and situation,here is some general information on the problem.

The Blood Alcohol Concentration (BAC) ofsomeone who is drinking depends uponfour things:

• The amount of alcohol consumed

• The drinker’s body weight

• The amount of food that is consumed beforeand during drinking

• The length of time it has taken the drinker toconsume the alcohol

223

According to the American Medical Association, a180 lb (82 kg) person who drinks three 12 ounce(355 ml) bottles of beer in an hour will end up witha BAC of about 0.06 percent. The person wouldreach the same BAC by drinking three 4 ounce(120 ml) glasses of wine or three mixed drinks ifeach had 1-1/2 ounces (45 ml) of liquors likewhiskey, gin, or vodka.

It is the amount of alcohol that counts. Forexample, if the same person drank three doublemartinis (3 ounces or 90 ml of liquor each)within an hour, the person’s BAC would be closeto 0.12 percent. A person who consumes foodjust before or during drinking will have a somewhatlower BAC level.

There is a gender difference, too. Womengenerally have a lower relative percentage of bodywater than men. Since alcohol is carried in bodywater, this means that a woman generally willreach a higher BAC level than a man of her samebody weight will when each has the samenumber of drinks.

The law in most U.S. states, and throughoutCanada, sets the legal limit at 0.08 percent. Insome other countries, the limit is even lower. Forexample, it is 0.05 percent in both France andGermany. The BAC limit for all commercial driversin the United States is 0.04 percent.

The BAC will be over 0.10 percent after three tosix drinks (in one hour). Of course, as we haveseen, it depends on how much alcohol is in thedrinks, and how quickly the person drinks them.

224

But the ability to drive is affected well below aBAC of 0.10 percent. Research shows thatthe driving skills of many people are impaired at aBAC approaching 0.05 percent, and that theeffects are worse at night. All drivers are impairedat BAC levels above 0.05 percent. Statisticsshow that the chance of being in a collisionincreases sharply for drivers who have a BAC of0.05 percent or above. A driver with a BAC level of0.06 percent has doubled his or her chance ofhaving a collision. At a BAC level of 0.10 percent,the chance of this driver having a collision is12 times greater; at a level of 0.15 percent, thechance is 25 times greater!

The body takes about an hour to rid itself of thealcohol in one drink. No amount of coffee ornumber of cold showers will speed that up. “I willbe careful” is not the right answer. What ifthere is an emergency, a need to take suddenaction, as when a child darts into the street?A person with even a moderate BAC might not beable to react quickly enough to avoid thecollision.

There is something else about drinking and drivingthat many people do not know. Medical researchshows that alcohol in a person’s system can makecrash injuries worse, especially injuries to thebrain, spinal cord, or heart. This means that whenanyone who has been drinking — driver orpassenger — is in a crash, that person’s chanceof being killed or permanently disabled ishigher than if the person had not been drinking.

{CAUTION:

Drinking and then driving is verydangerous. Your reflexes, perceptions,attentiveness, and judgment can beaffected by even a small amount ofalcohol. You can have a serious — or evenfatal — collision if you drive after drinking.Please do not drink and drive or ride with adriver who has been drinking. Ride home ina cab; or if you are with a group, designatea driver who will not drink.

225

Control of a VehicleYou have three systems that make your vehicle gowhere you want it to go. They are the brakes, thesteering, and the accelerator. All three systemshave to do their work at the places where the tiresmeet the road.

Sometimes, as when you are driving on snow orice, it is easy to ask more of those control systemsthan the tires and road can provide. That meansyou can lose control of your vehicle.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 272.

BrakingSee Brake System Warning Light on page 166.

Braking action involves perception time andreaction time.

First, you have to decide to push on the brakepedal. That is perception time. Then you have tobring up your foot and do it. That is reaction time.

Average reaction time is about three-fourths ofa second. But that is only an average. It might beless with one driver and as long as two orthree seconds or more with another. Age, physicalcondition, alertness, coordination, and eyesightall play a part. So do alcohol, drugs, andfrustration. But even in three-fourths of a second,a vehicle moving at 60 mph (100 km/h) travels66 feet (20 m). That could be a lot of distance in anemergency, so keeping enough space betweenyour vehicle and others is important.

And, of course, actual stopping distances varygreatly with the surface of the road, whether it ispavement or gravel; the condition of the road,whether it is wet, dry, or icy; tire tread; thecondition of the brakes; the weight of the vehicle;and the amount of brake force applied.

226

Avoid needless heavy braking. Some people drivein spurts — heavy acceleration followed byheavy braking — rather than keeping pace withtraffic. This is a mistake. The brakes may not havetime to cool between hard stops. The brakeswill wear out much faster if you do a lot of heavybraking. If you keep pace with the traffic andallow realistic following distances, you willeliminate a lot of unnecessary braking. That meansbetter braking and longer brake life.

If your vehicle’s engine ever stops while you aredriving, brake normally but do not pump thebrakes. If you do, the pedal may get harder topush down. If the engine stops, you will still havesome power brake assist. But you will use itwhen you brake. Once the power assist is usedup, it may take longer to stop and the brake pedalwill be harder to push.


Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS)Your vehicle may have the Anti-Lock BrakeSystem (ABS), an advanced electronic brakingsystem that will help prevent a braking skid.

If your vehicle has ABS, this warning light on theinstrument panel will come on briefly whenyou start your vehicle.

When you start your engine, or when you begin todrive away, ABS will check itself. You may hear amomentary motor or clicking noise while this test isgoing on, and you may even notice that your brakepedal moves or pulses a little. This is normal.

If there is a problem with ABS, the anti-lock brakesystem warning light will stay on. See Anti-LockBrake System Warning Light on page 167.


227

Let us say the road is wet and you are drivingsafely. Suddenly, an animal jumps out in front ofyou. You slam on the brakes and continue braking.Here is what happens with ABS:

A computer senses that wheels are slowing down.If one of the wheels is about to stop rolling, thecomputer will separately work the brakes at eachfront wheel and at both rear wheels.

ABS can change the brake pressure faster thanany driver could. The computer is programmed tomake the most of available tire and roadconditions. This can help you steer around theobstacle while braking hard.

As you brake, your computer keeps receivingupdates on wheel speed and controls brakingpressure accordingly.

228

If your vehicle has the vehicle stability controlsystem, it includes a brake assist system whichprovides more powerful braking during a sudden,hard brake application. See “Vehicle StabilityControl System” under Traction Control System(TCS) on page 230.

Remember: ABS does not change the time youneed to get your foot up to the brake pedalor always decrease stopping distance. If you gettoo close to the vehicle in front of you, you will nothave time to apply your brakes if that vehiclesuddenly slows or stops. Always leave enoughroom up ahead to stop, even though youhave ABS.

Using ABSDo not pump the brakes. Just hold the brakepedal down firmly and let anti-lock work for you.You may feel a slight brake pedal pulsationor notice some noise, but this is normal.

Braking in EmergenciesAt some time, nearly every driver gets into asituation that requires hard braking.

If you have ABS, you can steer and brake at thesame time. However, if you do not have ABS, yourfirst reaction — to hit the brake pedal hard and holdit down — may be the wrong thing to do. Yourwheels can stop rolling. Once they do, the vehiclecannot respond to your steering. Momentum willcarry it in whatever direction it was headed whenthe wheels stopped rolling. That could be off theroad, into the very thing you were trying to avoid, orinto traffic.

If you do not have ABS, use a “squeeze” brakingtechnique. This will give you maximum brakingwhile maintaining steering control. You can do thisby pushing on the brake pedal with steadilyincreasing pressure.

In an emergency, you will probably want tosqueeze the brakes hard without locking thewheels. If you hear or feel the wheels sliding, easeoff the brake pedal. This will help you retainsteering control. If you do have ABS, it is different.See Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) on page 227.

In many emergencies, steering can help youmore than even the very best braking.

229

Traction Control System (TCS)Your vehicle may have a traction control systemthat limits wheel spin. This is especially useful inslippery road conditions. The system operates onlyif it senses that one or both of the front wheels arespinning or beginning to lose traction. When thishappens, the system works the front brakes andreduces engine power to limit wheel spin.

You may feel or hear the system working, but thisis normal. Leave the system on during ordinarydriving so that it can operate when needed. Whenthe ignition is turned to ON, the systemautomatically turns on.

This light should comeon briefly when youstart the engine.

If it stays on or comes on while you are driving,there is a problem with your traction controlsystem.

The TRAC OFF buttonis located to the left ofthe steering wheelbelow the instrumentpanel cluster.

When getting the vehicle out of mud or newlyfallen snow, turn off the traction control system.The system that controls engine performanceinterferes with the process of freeing thefront wheels. To turn off traction control, press theTRAC OFF button. The traction control systemwarning light will come on. The vehicle stabilitycontrol system (StabiliTrak®) is always activated,even when the traction control system is turnedoff. To turn the traction control system backon, press the TRAC OFF button again. Thetraction control system warning light will go off.See Traction Control System (TCS) Warning Lighton page 168 for more information.

Adding non-GM accessories can affect yourvehicle’s performance. See Accessories andModifications on page 272 for more information.

230

StabiliTrak® SystemYour vehicle may have this feature. TheStabiliTrak® system helps provide integratedcontrol of the systems such as anti-lock brakesystem, traction control and engine control.This system automatically controls the brakes andengine to help prevent the vehicle from skiddingwhen cornering on a slippery road surface orturning the steering wheel abruptly.

This system will activate when your vehicle speedreaches or exceeds 9 mph (15 km/h), and willdeactivate when the vehicle speed reducesto below 9 mph (15 km/h).

You may hear a sound in the engine compartmentfor a few seconds when the engine is started orjust after the vehicle begins to move. Thismeans that the system is in the self-check mode,but does not indicate a malfunction.

If the vehicle is going to skid during driving, thetraction control system warning light will blink andan alarm will sound intermittently. Adjust yourdriving accordingly.

This light warns thatthere is a problemsomewhere inthe traction controlsystem or StabiliTrak®.

Panic Brake AssistYour vehicle has a panic brake assist system thatmonitors the intention of the driver while braking.If the system senses that the driver has appliedhard/fast pressure to the brake pedal, the systemwill generate additional pressure, making iteasier for the driver to maintain brake application.When this happens the brake pedal will feeleasier to push. Just hold the brake pedal downfirmly and let the system work for you. Youmay feel the brakes vibrate, or you may noticesome noise but this is normal. The brakeswill return to normal operation after the brakepedal has been released.The brake assist system becomes operationalafter the vehicle has accelerated to a speedin excess of approximately 6 mph (10 km/h). Itstops operating when the vehicle decelerates to aspeed below approximately 3 mph (5 km/h).

231

Steering

Power SteeringIf you lose power steering assist because theengine stops or the system is not functioning,you can steer but it will take much more effort.

Steering TipsIt is important to take curves at a reasonablespeed.

A lot of the “driver lost control” accidentsmentioned on the news happen on curves.

Here is why:

Experienced driver or beginner, each of us issubject to the same laws of physics when driving oncurves. The traction of the tires against the roadsurface makes it possible for the vehicle to changeits path when you turn the front wheels. If there isno traction, inertia will keep the vehicle going in thesame direction. If you have ever tried to steer avehicle on wet ice, you will understand this.

The traction you can get in a curve depends onthe condition of your tires and the road surface, theangle at which the curve is banked, and yourspeed. While you are in a curve, speed is theone factor you can control.

Suppose you are steering through a sharp curve.Then you suddenly apply the brakes. Bothcontrol systems — steering and braking — haveto do their work where the tires meet the road.Unless you have four-wheel anti-lock brakes,adding the hard braking can demand too much ofthose places. You can lose control.

The same thing can happen if you are steeringthrough a sharp curve and you suddenlyaccelerate. Those two control systems — steeringand acceleration — can overwhelm thoseplaces where the tires meet the road and makeyou lose control.

What should you do if this ever happens? Ease upon the brake or accelerator pedal, steer thevehicle the way you want it to go, and slow down.

232

Speed limit signs near curves warn that youshould adjust your speed. Of course, the postedspeeds are based on good weather and roadconditions. Under less favorable conditions you willwant to go slower.

If you need to reduce your speed as you approacha curve, do it before you enter the curve, whileyour front wheels are straight ahead.

Try to adjust your speed so you can “drive”through the curve. Maintain a reasonable, steadyspeed. Wait to accelerate until you are out ofthe curve, and then accelerate gently intothe straightaway.


Steering in EmergenciesThere are times when steering can be moreeffective than braking. For example, you come overa hill and find a truck stopped in your lane, or a carsuddenly pulls out from nowhere, or a child dartsout from between parked cars and stops right infront of you. You can avoid these problems bybraking — if you can stop in time. But sometimesyou cannot; there is not room. That is the time forevasive action — steering around the problem.

Your vehicle can perform very well in emergencieslike these. First apply your brakes — but, unlessyou have anti-lock brakes, not enough to lockyour wheels.

See Braking on page 226. It is better to remove asmuch speed as you can from a possible collision.Then steer around the problem, to the left orright depending on the space available.

233

An emergency like this requires close attentionand a quick decision. If you are holding thesteering wheel at the recommended 9 and3 o’clock positions, you can turn it a full180 degrees very quickly without removing eitherhand. But you have to act fast, steer quickly,and just as quickly straighten the wheel once youhave avoided the object.

The fact that such emergency situations are alwayspossible is a good reason to practice defensivedriving at all times and wear safety belts properly.

Off-Road RecoveryYou may find that your vehicle’s right wheels havedropped off the edge of a road onto the shoulderwhile you are driving.

If the level of the shoulder is only slightly belowthe pavement, recovery should be fairly easy.Ease off the accelerator and then, if thereis nothing in the way, steer so that your vehiclestraddles the edge of the pavement. You can turnthe steering wheel up to one-quarter turn untilthe right front tire contacts the pavement edge.Then turn your steering wheel to go straight downthe roadway.

234

PassingThe driver of a vehicle about to pass another on atwo-lane highway waits for just the right moment,accelerates, moves around the vehicle ahead, thengoes back into the right lane again. A simplemaneuver?

Not necessarily! Passing another vehicle on atwo-lane highway is a potentially dangerous move,since the passing vehicle occupies the samelane as oncoming traffic for several seconds. Amiscalculation, an error in judgment, or abrief surrender to frustration or anger can suddenlyput the passing driver face to face with theworst of all traffic accidents — the head-oncollision.

So here are some tips for passing:

• Drive ahead. Look down the road, to thesides, and to crossroads for situationsthat might affect your passing patterns. If youhave any doubt whatsoever about makinga successful pass, wait for a better time.

• Watch for traffic signs, pavement markings,and lines. If you can see a sign up aheadthat might indicate a turn or an intersection,delay your pass. A broken center lineusually indicates it is all right to pass, providingthe road ahead is clear. Never cross a solidline on your side of the lane or a double solidline, even if the road seems empty ofapproaching traffic.

• Do not get too close to the vehicle you wantto pass while you are awaiting an opportunity.For one thing, following too closely reducesyour area of vision, especially if you arefollowing a larger vehicle. Also, you will nothave adequate space if the vehicle aheadsuddenly slows or stops. Keep back areasonable distance.

235

• When it looks like a chance to pass is comingup, start to accelerate but stay in the rightlane and do not get too close. Time your moveso you will be increasing speed as the timecomes to move into the other lane. If the wayis clear to pass, you will have a runningstart that more than makes up for the distanceyou would lose by dropping back. And ifsomething happens to cause you to cancelyour pass, you need only slow down and dropback again and wait for another opportunity.

• If other vehicles are lined up to pass a slowvehicle, wait your turn. But take care thatsomeone is not trying to pass you as you pullout to pass the slow vehicle. Remember toglance over your shoulder and check theblind spot.

• Check your vehicle’s mirrors, glance over yourshoulder, and start your left lane changesignal before moving out of the right lane topass. When you are far enough ahead ofthe passed vehicle to see its front inyour vehicle’s inside mirror, activate the rightlane change signal and move back intothe right lane. Remember that your vehicle’spassenger side outside mirror is convex.The vehicle you just passed may seem to befarther away from you than it really is.

• Try not to pass more than one vehicle at atime on two-lane roads. Reconsider beforepassing the next vehicle.

• Do not overtake a slowly moving vehicle toorapidly. Even though the brake lamps arenot flashing, it may be slowing down or startingto turn.

• If you are being passed, make it easy for thefollowing driver to get ahead of you. Perhapsyou can ease a little to the right.

236

Loss of ControlLet us review what driving experts say about whathappens when the three control systems — brakes,steering, and acceleration — do not have enoughfriction where the tires meet the road to do what thedriver has asked.

In any emergency, do not give up. Keep trying tosteer and constantly seek an escape route orarea of less danger.

SkiddingIn a skid, a driver can lose control of the vehicle.Defensive drivers avoid most skids by takingreasonable care suited to existing conditions, andby not overdriving those conditions. But skidsare always possible.

The three types of skids correspond to yourvehicle’s three control systems. In the braking skid,your wheels are not rolling. In the steering orcornering skid, too much speed or steering in acurve causes tires to slip and lose cornering force.And in the acceleration skid, too much throttlecauses the driving wheels to spin.

A cornering skid and an acceleration skid are besthandled by easing your foot off the acceleratorpedal.

If your vehicle starts to slide, ease your foot offthe accelerator pedal and quickly steer theway you want the vehicle to go. If you startsteering quickly enough, your vehicle maystraighten out. Always be ready for a second skidif it occurs.

Of course, traction is reduced when water, snow,ice, gravel, or other material is on the road.For safety, you will want to slow down and adjustyour driving to these conditions. It is importantto slow down on slippery surfaces becausestopping distance will be longer and vehicle controlmore limited.

While driving on a surface with reduced traction, tryyour best to avoid sudden steering, acceleration, orbraking, including reducing vehicle speed byshifting to a lower gear. Any sudden changes couldcause the tires to slide. You may not realize thesurface is slippery until your vehicle is skidding.Learn to recognize warning clues — such asenough water, ice, or packed snow on the road tomake a mirrored surface — and slow down whenyou have any doubt.

237

If you have the Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS),remember: It helps avoid only the braking skid. Ifyou do not have ABS, then in a braking skid,where the wheels are no longer rolling, releaseenough pressure on the brakes to get the wheelsrolling again. This restores steering control.Push the brake pedal down steadily when youhave to stop suddenly. As long as the wheels arerolling, you will have steering control.

Driving at NightNight driving is more dangerous than day driving.One reason is that some drivers are likely tobe impaired — by alcohol or drugs, with nightvision problems, or by fatigue.

Here are some tips on night driving.

• Drive defensively.

• Do not drink and drive.

• Adjust the inside rearview mirror to reduce theglare from headlamps behind you.

• Since you cannot see as well, you may needto slow down and keep more space betweenyou and other vehicles.

• Slow down, especially on higher speed roads.Your vehicle’s headlamps can light up only somuch road ahead.

• In remote areas, watch for animals.

• If you are tired, pull off the road in a safeplace and rest.

No one can see as well at night as in the daytime.But as we get older these differences increase.A 50-year-old driver may require at least twice asmuch light to see the same thing at night as a20-year-old.

What you do in the daytime can also affect yournight vision. For example, if you spend theday in bright sunshine you are wise to wearsunglasses. Your eyes will have less troubleadjusting to night. But if you are driving, do notwear sunglasses at night. They may cut down onglare from headlamps, but they also make alot of things invisible.

238

You can be temporarily blinded by approachingheadlamps. It can take a second or two, oreven several seconds, for your eyes to re-adjustto the dark. When you are faced with severe glare,as from a driver who does not lower the highbeams, or a vehicle with misaimed headlamps,slow down a little. Avoid staring directly intothe approaching headlamps.

Keep the windshield and all the glass on yourvehicle clean — inside and out. Glare at night ismade much worse by dirt on the glass. Eventhe inside of the glass can build up a film causedby dust. Dirty glass makes lights dazzle andflash more than clean glass would, making thepupils of your eyes contract repeatedly.

Remember that the headlamps light up far less of aroadway when you are in a turn or curve. Keep youreyes moving; that way, it is easier to pick out dimlylighted objects. Just as the headlamps should bechecked regularly for proper aim, so should youreyes be examined regularly. Some drivers sufferfrom night blindness — the inability to see in dimlight — and are not even aware of it.

Driving in Rain and on Wet Roads

Rain and wet roads can mean driving trouble. On awet road, you cannot stop, accelerate, or turn aswell because your tire-to-road traction is not asgood as on dry roads. And, if your tires do not havemuch tread left, you will get even less traction. It isalways wise to go slower and be cautious if rainstarts to fall while you are driving. The surface mayget wet suddenly when your reflexes are tuned fordriving on dry pavement.

239

The heavier the rain, the harder it is to see. Evenif your windshield wiper blades are in goodshape, a heavy rain can make it harder to seeroad signs and traffic signals, pavement markings,the edge of the road, and even people walking.

It is wise to keep your windshield wiping equipmentin good shape and keep your windshield washerfluid reservoir filled with washer fluid. Replace yourwindshield wiper inserts when they show signsof streaking or missing areas on the windshield, orwhen strips of rubber start to separate from theinserts.

{CAUTION:

Wet brakes can cause accidents. Theymay not work as well in a quick stop andmay cause pulling to one side. You couldlose control of the vehicle.

After driving through a large puddle ofwater or a car wash, apply the brake pedallightly until the brakes work normally.

Driving too fast through large water puddles oreven going through some car washes can causeproblems, too. The water may affect yourbrakes. Try to avoid puddles. But if you cannot, tryto slow down before you hit them.

HydroplaningHydroplaning is dangerous. So much water canbuild up under your tires that they can actually rideon the water. This can happen if the road is wetenough and you are going fast enough. When yourvehicle is hydroplaning, it has little or no contactwith the road.

Hydroplaning does not happen often. But it can ifyour tires do not have much tread or if thepressure in one or more is low. It can happen if alot of water is standing on the road. If you cansee reflections from trees, telephone poles,or other vehicles, and raindrops dimple the water’ssurface, there could be hydroplaning.

Hydroplaning usually happens at higher speeds.There just is not a hard and fast rule abouthydroplaning. The best advice is to slow downwhen it is raining.

240

Driving Through Deep Standing Water

Notice: If you drive too quickly throughdeep puddles or standing water, water cancome in through the engine’s air intakeand badly damage the engine. Never drivethrough water that is slightly lower than theunderbody of your vehicle. If you cannot avoiddeep puddles or standing water, drivethrough them very slowly.

Driving Through Flowing Water

{CAUTION:

Flowing or rushing water creates strongforces. If you try to drive through flowingwater, as you might at a low watercrossing, your vehicle can be carried away.



As little as six inches of flowing water cancarry away a smaller vehicle. If thishappens, you and other vehicle occupantscould drown. Do not ignore policewarning signs, and otherwise be verycautious about trying to drive throughflowing water.

Some Other Rainy Weather Tips• Besides slowing down, allow some extra

following distance. And be especially carefulwhen you pass another vehicle. Allow yourselfmore clear room ahead, and be prepared tohave your view restricted by road spray.

• Have good tires with proper tread depth. SeeTires on page 322.

241

City Driving

One of the biggest problems with city streets isthe amount of traffic on them. You will wantto watch out for what the other drivers are doingand pay attention to traffic signals.

Here are ways to increase your safety in citydriving:

• Know the best way to get to where you aregoing. Get a city map and plan your tripinto an unknown part of the city just as youwould for a cross-country trip.

• Try to use the freeways that rim and crisscrossmost large cities. You will save time andenergy. See Freeway Driving on page 243.

• Treat a green light as a warning signal. Atraffic light is there because the corner isbusy enough to need it. When a light turnsgreen, and just before you start to move,check both ways for vehicles that have notcleared the intersection or may be running thered light.

242

Freeway Driving

Mile for mile, freeways — also called thruways,parkways, expressways, turnpikes, orsuperhighways — are the safest of all roads.But they have their own special rules.

The most important advice on freeway drivingis: Keep up with traffic and keep to the right. Driveat the same speed most of the other drivers are

driving. Too-fast or too-slow driving breaks asmooth traffic flow. Treat the left lane on a freewayas a passing lane.

At the entrance, there is usually a ramp that leadsto the freeway. If you have a clear view of thefreeway as you drive along the entrance ramp, youshould begin to check traffic. Try to determinewhere you expect to blend with the flow. Tryto merge into the gap at close to the prevailingspeed. Switch on your turn signal, check yourmirrors, and glance over your shoulder as oftenas necessary. Try to blend smoothly with thetraffic flow.

Once you are on the freeway, adjust your speedto the posted limit or to the prevailing rate if itis slower. Stay in the right lane unless you wantto pass.

Before changing lanes, check your mirrors. Thenuse your turn signal.

Just before you leave the lane, glance quicklyover your shoulder to make sure there is notanother vehicle in your blind spot.

Once you are moving on the freeway, makecertain you allow a reasonable following distance.

Expect to move slightly slower at night.

243

When you want to leave the freeway, move to theproper lane well in advance. If you miss yourexit, do not, under any circumstances, stop andback up. Drive on to the next exit.

The exit ramp can be curved, sometimes quitesharply. The exit speed is usually posted. Reduceyour speed according to your speedometer, notto your sense of motion. After driving for anydistance at higher speeds, you may tend to thinkyou are going slower than you actually are.

Before Leaving on a Long TripMake sure you are ready. Try to be well rested. Ifyou must start when you are not fresh — suchas after a day’s work — do not plan to make toomany miles that first part of the journey. Wearcomfortable clothing and shoes you can easilydrive in.

Is your vehicle ready for a long trip? If you keep itserviced and maintained, it is ready to go. If itneeds service, have it done before starting out.

Of course, you will find experienced and ableservice experts in GM dealerships all across NorthAmerica. They will be ready and willing to helpif you need it.

Here are some things you can check before a trip:

• Windshield Washer Fluid: Is the reservoirfull? Are all windows clean inside and outside?

• Wiper Blades: Are they in good shape?

• Fuel, Engine Oil, Other Fluids: Have youchecked all levels?

• Lamps: Are they all working? Are the lensesclean?

• Tires: They are vitally important to a safe,trouble-free trip. Is the tread good enoughfor long-distance driving? Are the tiresall inflated to the recommended pressure?

• Weather Forecasts: What is the weatheroutlook along your route? Should youdelay your trip a short time to avoid a majorstorm system?

• Maps: Do you have up-to-date maps?

244

Highway HypnosisIs there actually such a condition as highwayhypnosis? Or is it just plain falling asleep at thewheel? Call it highway hypnosis, lack ofawareness, or whatever.

There is something about an easy stretch of roadwith the same scenery, along with the hum ofthe tires on the road, the drone of the engine, andthe rush of the wind against the vehicle thatcan make you sleepy. Do not let it happen to you!If it does, your vehicle can leave the road inless than a second, and you could crash andbe injured.

What can you do about highway hypnosis? First,be aware that it can happen.

Then here are some tips:

• Make sure your vehicle is well ventilated, witha comfortably cool interior.

• Keep your eyes moving. Scan the road aheadand to the sides. Check your rearview mirrorsand your instruments frequently.

• If you get sleepy, pull off the road into a rest,service, or parking area and take a nap, getsome exercise, or both. For safety, treatdrowsiness on the highway as an emergency.

245

Hill and Mountain Roads

Driving on steep hills or mountains is differentfrom driving in flat or rolling terrain.

If you drive regularly in steep country, or if you areplanning to visit there, here are some tips thatcan make your trips safer and more enjoyable.

• Keep your vehicle in good shape. Checkall fluid levels and also the brakes, tires,cooling system, and transaxle. These partscan work hard on mountain roads.

{CAUTION:

If you do not shift down, the brakes couldget so hot that they would not work well.You would then have poor braking oreven none going down a hill. You couldcrash. Shift down to let the engine assistthe brakes on a steep downhill slope.

246

{CAUTION:

Coasting downhill in NEUTRAL (N) or withthe ignition off is dangerous. The brakeswill have to do all the work of slowingdown. They could get so hot that theywould not work well. You would then havepoor braking or even none going down ahill. You could crash. Always have theengine running and your vehicle in gearwhen you go downhill.

• Know how to go down hills. The most importantthing to know is this: let your engine do some ofthe slowing down. Shift to a lower gear whenyou go down a steep or long hill.

• Know how to go uphill. You may want to shiftdown to a lower gear. The lower gears helpcool your engine and transaxle, and you canclimb the hill better.

• Stay in your own lane when driving on two-laneroads in hills or mountains. Do not swing wideor cut across the center of the road. Drive atspeeds that let you stay in your own lane.

• As you go over the top of a hill, be alert. Therecould be something in your lane, like a stalledcar or an accident.

• You may see highway signs on mountains thatwarn of special problems. Examples are longgrades, passing or no-passing zones, a fallingrocks area, or winding roads. Be alert to theseand take appropriate action.

247

Winter Driving

Here are some tips for winter driving:

• Have your vehicle in good shape for winter.

• You may want to put winter emergencysupplies in your vehicle.

Also see Tires on page 322.

Include an ice scraper, a small brush or broom, asupply of windshield washer fluid, a rag, somewinter outer clothing, a small shovel, a flashlight, ared cloth, and a couple of reflective warningtriangles. And, if you will be driving under severeconditions, include a small bag of sand, apiece of old carpet, or a couple of burlap bags tohelp provide traction. Be sure you properlysecure these items in your vehicle.

Driving on Snow or IceMost of the time, those places where the tiresmeet the road probably have good traction.

However, if there is snow or ice between the tiresand the road, you can have a very slipperysituation. You will have a lot less traction, or grip,and will need to be very careful.

248

What is the worst time for this? Wet ice. Very coldsnow or ice can be slick and hard to drive on.But wet ice can be even more trouble because itmay offer the least traction of all. You can getwet ice when it is about freezing, 32°F (0°C), andfreezing rain begins to fall. Try to avoid drivingon wet ice until salt and sand crews can get there.

Whatever the condition — smooth ice, packed,blowing, or loose snow — drive with caution.

Accelerate gently. Try not to break the fragiletraction. If you accelerate too fast, the drive wheelswill spin and polish the surface under the tireseven more.

Unless you have the Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS), you will want to brake very gently, too. Ifyou do have ABS, see Anti-Lock Brake System(ABS) on page 227. This system improvesyour vehicle’s stability when you make a hard stopon a slippery road. Whether you have ABS ornot, you will want to begin stopping sooner thanyou would on dry pavement. Without ABS, ifyou feel your vehicle begin to slide, let up on thebrakes a little. Push the brake pedal downsteadily to get the most traction you can.

249

Remember, unless you have ABS, if you brake sohard that your wheels stop rolling, you will justslide. Brake so your wheels always keep rollingand you can still steer.

• Whatever your braking system, allow greaterdistance on any slippery road.

• Watch for slippery spots. The road might befine until you hit a spot that is covered withice. On an otherwise clear road, ice patchesmay appear in shaded areas where thesun cannot reach, such as around clumps oftrees, behind buildings, or under bridges.Sometimes the surface of a curve or anoverpass may remain icy when thesurrounding roads are clear. If you see apatch of ice ahead of you, brake before youare on it. Try not to brake while you areactually on the ice, and avoid sudden steeringmaneuvers.

If You Are Caught in a BlizzardIf you are stopped by heavy snow, you could be ina serious situation. You should probably staywith your vehicle unless you know for sure that youare near help and you can hike through thesnow. Here are some things to do to summonhelp and keep yourself and your passengers safe:

• Turn on your hazard flashers.

• Tie a red cloth to your vehicle to alert policethat you have been stopped by the snow.

• Put on extra clothing or wrap a blanket aroundyou. If you do not have blankets or extraclothing, make body insulators fromnewspapers, burlap bags, rags, floormats — anything you can wrap around yourselfor tuck under your clothing to keep warm.

250

You can run the engine to keep warm, but becareful.

{CAUTION:

Snow can trap exhaust gases under yourvehicle. This can cause deadly CO(carbon monoxide) gas to get inside. COcould overcome you and kill you. Youcannot see it or smell it, so you might notknow it is in your vehicle. Clear awaysnow from around the base of yourvehicle, especially any that is blocking theexhaust pipe. And check around againfrom time to time to be sure snow doesnot collect there.

Open a window just a little on the side ofthe vehicle that is away from the wind.This will help keep CO out.

Run your engine only as long as you must. Thissaves fuel. When you run the engine, make it go alittle faster than just idle. That is, push theaccelerator slightly. This uses less fuel for theheat that you get and it keeps the battery charged.

251

You will need a well-charged battery to restart thevehicle, and possibly for signaling later on withyour headlamps. Let the heater run for a while.

Then, shut the engine off and close the windowalmost all the way to preserve the heat. Startthe engine again and repeat this only when youfeel really uncomfortable from the cold. But do it aslittle as possible. Preserve the fuel as long asyou can. To help keep warm, you can get out ofthe vehicle and do some fairly vigorous exercisesevery half hour or so until help comes.

If Your Vehicle is Stuck in Sand,Mud, Ice, or SnowIn order to free your vehicle when it is stuck, youwill need to spin the wheels, but you do notwant to spin your wheels too fast. The methodknown as rocking can help you get out when youare stuck, but you must use caution.

{CAUTION:

If you let your vehicle’s tires spin at highspeed, they can explode, and you orothers could be injured. And, thetransaxle or other parts of the vehicle canoverheat. That could cause an enginecompartment fire or other damage. Whenyou are stuck, spin the wheels as little aspossible. Do not spin the wheels above35 mph (55 km/h) as shown on thespeedometer.

Notice: Spinning the wheels can destroy partsof your vehicle as well as the tires. If youspin the wheels too fast while shiftingthe transaxle back and forth, you can destroythe transaxle. See Rocking Your Vehicle toGet It Out on page 253.

For information about using tire chains on yourvehicle, see Tire Chains on page 341.

252

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get It OutFirst, turn the steering wheel left and right.That will clear the area around the front wheels.Then shift back and forth between REVERSE (R)and a forward gear, or with a manual transaxle,between FIRST (1) or SECOND (2) andREVERSE (R), spinning the wheels as little aspossible. Release the accelerator pedal while youshift, and press lightly on the accelerator pedalwhen the transaxle is in gear. By slowly spinningthe wheels in the forward and reverse directions,you will cause a rocking motion that may free yourvehicle. If that does not get your vehicle outafter a few tries, it may need to be towed out. Or,you can use the recovery hook. If your vehicledoes need to be towed out, see Towing YourVehicle on page 259.

Loading Your VehicleIt is very important to know how much weight yourvehicle can carry. Two labels on your vehicleshow how much weight it may properly carry, theTire and Loading Information label and theCertification label.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

253

Tire and Loading Information Label

A vehicle specific Tire and Loading Informationlabel is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). With the driver’s door open you will findthe label attached below the door lock post (striker).The Tire and Loading Information label shows thenumber of occupant seating positions (A), and themaximum vehicle capacity weight (B) in kilogramsand pounds.

This weight includes the weight of all occupants,cargo, and all nonfactory-installed options.

The Tire and Loading Information label also showsthe tire size of the original equipment tires (C), andthe recommended cold tire inflation pressures (D).For more information on tires and inflation see Tireson page 322 and Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 329.

There is also important loading information on theCertification label. It tells you the Gross VehicleWeight Rating (GVWR) and the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for the front and rear axle. See“Certification Label” later in this section.

Steps for Determining Correct Load Limit1. Locate the statement “The combined

weight of occupants and cargo should neverexceed XXX kg or XXX lbs” on yourvehicle’s placard.

2. Determine the combined weight of the driverand passengers that will be riding in yourvehicle.

3. Subtract the combined weight of the driverand passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs.

Label Example

254

4. The resulting figure equals the availableamount of cargo and luggage load capacity.For example, if the “XXX” amount equals1400 lbs and there will be five 150 lbpassengers in your vehicle, the amount ofavailable cargo and luggage load capacity is650 lbs (1400 − 750 (5 x 150) = 650 lbs).

5. Determine the combined weight of luggageand cargo being loaded on the vehicle. Thatweight may not safely exceed the availablecargo and luggage load capacity calculatedin Step 4.

6. If your vehicle will be towing a trailer, the loadfrom your trailer will be transferred to yourvehicle. Consult this manual to determine howthis reduces the available cargo and luggageload capacity of your vehicle.

If your vehicle can tow a trailer, see Towing aTrailer on page 261 for important information ontowing a trailer, towing safety rules andtrailering tips.

Item Description Total

A Vehicle Capacity Weightfor Example 1 = 1,000 lbs (453 kg)

BSubtract OccupantWeight 150 lbs(68 kg) x 2 =

300 lbs (136 kg)

C Available Occupant andCargo Weight = 700 lbs (317 kg)

Example 1

255




750 lbs (340 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 250 lbs (113 kg)




1,000 lbs (453 kg)

C Available CargoWeight = 0 lbs (0 kg)

Example 2 Example 3

256

Refer to your vehicle’s Tire and LoadingInformation label for specific information aboutyour vehicle’s capacity weight and seatingpositions. The combined weight of the driver,passengers, and cargo should never exceed yourvehicle’s maximum vehicle capacity weight.

Certification Label

A vehicle specific Certification label is attached tothe center pillar, near the driver’s door latch. It tellsyou the gross weight capacity of your vehicle, calledthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR).

The GVWR includes the weight of the vehicle, alloccupants, fuel, and cargo. Never exceed theGVWR for your vehicle, or the Gross Axle WeightRating (GAWR) for either the front or rear axle.

And, if you do have a heavy load, you shouldspread it out. See “Steps for Determining CorrectLoad Limit” earlier in this section.

{CAUTION:

Do not load your vehicle any heavier thanthe Gross Vehicle Weight Rating (GVWR),or either the maximum front or rear GrossAxle Weight Rating (GAWR). If you do,parts on your vehicle can break, and itcan change the way your vehicle handles.These could cause you to lose controland crash. Also, overloading can shortenthe life of your vehicle.

Notice: Overloading your vehicle may causedamage. Repairs would not be covered by yourwarranty. Do not overload your vehicle.

Label Example

257

If you put things inside your vehicle — likesuitcases, tools, packages, or anything else — theywill go as fast as the vehicle goes. If you have tostop or turn quickly, or if there is a crash, they willkeep going.

{CAUTION:

Things you put inside your vehicle canstrike and injure people in a sudden stopor turn, or in a crash.

• Put things in the rear area of yourvehicle. Try to spread the weightevenly. If you have fold-down rearseats, you will find four anchors onthe back wall of your trunk. You canuse these anchors to tie down lighterloads. They are not strong enough forheavy things, however, so put them asfar forward as you can in the trunk orrear area.



• Never stack heavier things, likesuitcases, inside the vehicle so thatsome of them are above the tops ofthe seats.

• Do not leave an unsecured childrestraint in your vehicle.

• When you carry something inside thevehicle, secure it whenever you can.

• Do not leave a seat folded downunless you need to.

258

Towing

Towing Your VehicleConsult your dealer or a professional towingservice if you need to have your disabled vehicletowed. See Roadside Assistance Program onpage 406.

If you want to tow your vehicle behind anothervehicle for recreational purposes (such as behinda motorhome), see “Recreational VehicleTowing” following.

Recreational Vehicle TowingRecreational vehicle towing means towing yourvehicle behind another vehicle – such as behind amotorhome. The two most common types ofrecreational vehicle towing are known as “dinghytowing” (towing your vehicle with all four wheelson the ground) and “dolly towing” (towingyour vehicle with two wheels on the ground andtwo wheels up on a device known as a “dolly”).

With the proper preparation and equipment, manyvehicles can be towed in these ways. See“Dinghy Towing” and “Dolly Towing,” following.

Here are some important things to consider beforeyou do recreational vehicle towing:

• What’s the towing capacity of the towingvehicle? Be sure you read the tow vehiclemanufacturer’s recommendations.

• How far will you tow? Some vehicles haverestrictions on how far and how long theycan tow.

• Do you have the proper towing equipment?See your dealer or trailering professionalfor additional advice and equipmentrecommendations.

• Is your vehicle ready to be towed? Just asyou would prepare your vehicle for a longtrip, you’ll want to make sure your vehicle isprepared to be towed. See Before Leaving ona Long Trip on page 244.

259

Dinghy TowingIf your vehicle has an automatic transaxle, itcannot be dinghy towed. See “Dolly Towing” formore information regarding towing your vehicle.

If your vehicle has a manual transaxle, it canbe dinghy towed.

When dinghy towing, be sure to follow the postedlegal speed limit.

1. Put the shift lever in NEUTRAL.

2. Turn the ignition to ACC to avoid locking thesteering wheel. Make sure the audio systemis turned off and that nothing is pluggedinto the power outlets.

3. Release the parking brake.

After dinghy towing, let the engine idle for morethan three minutes before driving the vehicle.

Do not tow your vehicle from the rear. Yourvehicle could be badly damaged and the repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

260

Dolly Towing

To tow your vehicle using a dolly, followthese steps:

1. Put the front wheels on a dolly.

2. Put the vehicle in PARK (P) for an automatictransaxle and in NEUTRAL for a manualtransaxle.

3. Clamp the steering wheel in a straight-aheadposition with a clamping device designed fortowing.

4. Release the parking brake.

Towing a Trailer

{CAUTION:

If you do not use the correct equipmentand drive properly, you can lose controlwhen you pull a trailer. For example, if thetrailer is too heavy, the brakes may notwork well — or even at all. You and yourpassengers could be seriously injured.You may also damage your vehicle; theresulting repairs would not be covered byyour warranty. Pull a trailer only if youhave followed all the steps in this section.Ask your dealer for advice andinformation about towing a trailer withyour vehicle.

Your vehicle can tow a trailer if it is equipped withthe proper trailer towing equipment. To identifythe vehicle trailering capacity of your vehicle, youshould read the information in “Weight of theTrailer” that appears later in this section.

261

Trailering is different than just driving your vehicleby itself. Trailering means changes in handling,acceleration, braking, durability and fuel economy.Successful, safe trailering takes correctequipment, and it has to be used properly.

That’s the reason for this part. In it are manytime-tested, important trailering tips and safetyrules. Many of these are important for your safetyand that of your passengers. So please readthis section carefully before you pull a trailer.

Load-pulling components such as the engine,transaxle, wheel assemblies and tires are forcedto work harder against the drag of the addedweight. The engine is required to operateat relatively higher speeds and under greaterloads, generating extra heat. What’s more,the trailer adds considerably to wind resistance,increasing the pulling requirements.

If You Do Decide To Pull A TrailerIf you do, here are some important points:

• There are many different laws, including speedlimit restrictions, having to do with trailering.Make sure your rig will be legal, not only whereyou live but also where you’ll be driving. Agood source for this information can be stateor provincial police.

• Consider using a sway control. You can ask ahitch dealer about sway controls.

• Don’t tow a trailer at all during the first1,000 miles (1 600 km) your new vehicle isdriven. Your engine, axle or other parts couldbe damaged.

• Then, during the first 500 miles (800 km) thatyou tow a trailer, don’t drive over 50 mph(80 km/h) and don’t make starts at full throttle.This helps your engine and other parts ofyour vehicle wear in at the heavier loads.

• Obey speed limit restrictions when towing atrailer. Don’t drive faster than the maximumposted speed for trailers, or no more than55 mph (90 km/h), to save wear on yourvehicle’s parts.

262

Three important considerations have to do withweight:

• the weight of the trailer

• the weight of the trailer tongue

• and the total weight on your vehicle’s tires

Weight of the TrailerHow heavy can a trailer safely be?

It should never weigh more than 1,500 lbs(680 kg). But even that can be too heavy.

It depends on how you plan to use your rig. Forexample, speed, altitude, road grades, outsidetemperature and how much your vehicle is used topull a trailer are all important. It can also dependon any special equipment that you have onyour vehicle, and the amount of tongue weight thevehicle can carry. See “Weight of the TrailerTongue” later in this section for more information.

Maximum trailer weight is calculated assumingonly the driver is in the tow vehicle and it has allthe required trailering equipment. The weightof additional optional equipment, passengers andcargo in the tow vehicle must be subtractedfrom the maximum trailer weight.

You can ask your dealer for our traileringinformation or advice, or you can write us at ourCustomer Assistance Offices. See CustomerAssistance Offices on page 404 for moreinformation.

Weight of the Trailer TongueThe tongue load (A) of any trailer is an importantweight to measure because it affects the totalor gross weight of your vehicle. The Gross VehicleWeight (GVW) includes the curb weight of thevehicle, any cargo you may carry in it, andthe people who will be riding in the vehicle. And ifyou tow a trailer, you must add the tongue loadto the GVW because your vehicle will be carryingthat weight, too. See Loading Your Vehicle onpage 253 for more information about your vehicle’smaximum load capacity.

263

If you’re using a weight-carrying hitch or aweight-distributing hitch, the trailer tongue (A)should weigh 10 to 15 percent of the total loadedtrailer weight (B).

After you have loaded your trailer, weigh the trailerand then the tongue, separately, to see if theweights are proper. If they are not, you may beable to get them right simply by moving someitems around in the trailer.

Total Weight on Your Vehicle’s TiresBe sure your vehicle’s tires are inflated to theupper limit for cold tires. You’ll find these numberson the Tire and Loading Information labellocated on the vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar).

See Loading Your Vehicle on page 253. Then besure you do not go over the GVW limit foryour vehicle, including the weight of the trailertongue.

HitchesIt’s important to have the correct hitch equipment.Crosswinds, large trucks going by and roughroads are a few reasons why you’ll need the righthitch. Here are some rules to follow:

• Don’t let the steel in a hitch contact thealuminum on your bumper. If you do, thetwo will corrode. You can use something likepaint or plastic tape to separate the steeland aluminum. The same steel to aluminumproblem can happen with fasteners too.

• Will you have to make any holes in the bodyof your vehicle when you install a trailerhitch? If you do, then be sure to seal the holeslater when you remove the hitch. If youdon’t seal them, deadly carbon monoxide (CO)from your exhaust can get into your vehicle.See Engine Exhaust on page 119. Dirtand water can too.

264

Safety ChainsYou should always attach chains between yourvehicle and your trailer. Cross the safetychains under the tongue of the trailer so that thetongue will not drop to the road if it becomesseparated from the hitch. Instructions about safetychains may be provided by the hitch manufactureror by the trailer manufacturer. Follow themanufacturer’s recommendation for attachingsafety chains and do not attach them to thebumper. Always leave just enough slack so youcan turn with your rig. And, never allow safetychains to drag on the ground.

Trailer BrakesDoes your trailer have its own brakes?

Be sure to read and follow the instructions for thetrailer brakes so you’ll be able to install, adjustand maintain them properly. And, if you haveanti-lock brakes, do not try to tap into yourvehicle’s brake system. If you do, both systemswon’t work well, or at all.

Driving with a TrailerTowing a trailer requires a certain amount ofexperience. Before setting out for the open road,you’ll want to get to know your rig. Acquaintyourself with the feel of handling and braking withthe added weight of the trailer. And alwayskeep in mind that the vehicle you are driving isnow a good deal longer and not nearly asresponsive as your vehicle is by itself.

Before you start, check the trailer hitch, platformand attachments, safety chains, electricalconnector, lamps, tires and mirror adjustment. Ifthe trailer has electric brakes, start your vehicleand trailer moving and then apply the trailer brakecontroller by hand to be sure the brakes areworking. This lets you check your electricalconnection at the same time.

During your trip, check occasionally to be surethat the load is secure, and that the lamps and anytrailer brakes are still working.

265

Following DistanceStay at least twice as far behind the vehicle aheadas you would when driving your vehicle withouta trailer. This can help you avoid situationsthat require heavy braking and sudden turns.

PassingYou’ll need more passing distance up ahead whenyou’re towing a trailer. And, because you’re agood deal longer, you’ll need to go much fartherbeyond the passed vehicle before you canreturn to your lane.

Backing UpHold the bottom of the steering wheel withone hand. Then, to move the trailer to the left, justmove that hand to the left. To move the trailerto the right, move your hand to the right. Alwaysback up slowly and, if possible, have someoneguide you.

Making Turns

Notice: Making very sharp turns whiletrailering could cause the trailer to come incontact with the vehicle. Your vehicle could bedamaged. Avoid making very sharp turnswhile trailering.When you’re turning with a trailer, make widerturns than normal. Do this so your trailerwon’t strike soft shoulders, curbs, road signs,trees or other objects. Avoid jerky or suddenmaneuvers. Signal well in advance.

Turn Signals When Towing a TrailerWhen you tow a trailer, your vehicle may need adifferent turn signal flasher and/or extra wiring.Check with your dealer. The arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash whenever you signal aturn or lane change. Properly hooked up, the trailerlamps will also flash, telling other drivers you’reabout to turn, change lanes or stop.When towing a trailer, the arrows on yourinstrument panel will flash for turns even if the bulbson the trailer are burned out. Thus, you may thinkdrivers behind you are seeing your signal whenthey are not. It’s important to check occasionally tobe sure the trailer bulbs are still working.

266

Driving On GradesReduce speed and shift to a lower gear beforeyou start down a long or steep downgrade. If youdon’t shift down, you might have to use yourbrakes so much that they would get hot and nolonger work well.

On a long uphill grade, shift down and reduceyour speed to around 45 mph (70 km/h) to reducethe possibility of the engine and the transaxleoverheating.

Parking on Hills

{CAUTION:

You really should not park your vehicle,with a trailer attached, on a hill. Ifsomething goes wrong, your rig couldstart to move. People can be injured, andboth your vehicle and the trailer can bedamaged.

But if you ever have to park your rig on a hill,here’s how to do it:

1. Apply your regular brakes, but don’t shift intoPARK (P) for an automatic transaxle or intogear for a manual transaxle, yet. Whenparking uphill, turn your wheels away from thecurb. When parking downhill, turn yourwheels into the curb.

2. Have someone place chocks under the trailerwheels.

3. When the chocks are in place, release theregular brakes until the chocks absorb the load.

4. Reapply the regular brakes. Then apply yourparking brake and shift into PARK (P) for anautomatic transaxle or REVERSE (R) fora manual transaxle.

5. Release the regular brakes.

267

When You Are Ready to Leave AfterParking on a Hill1. Apply your regular brakes and hold the pedal

down while you:

• start your engine

• shift into a gear, and

• release the parking brake

2. Let up on the brake pedal.

3. Drive slowly until the trailer is clear of thechocks.

4. Stop and have someone pick up and store thechocks.

Maintenance When Trailer TowingYour vehicle will need service more often whenyou’re pulling a trailer. See the MaintenanceSchedule for more on this. Things that areespecially important in trailer operation areautomatic transaxle fluid (don’t overfill), engine oil,drive belt, cooling system and brake system.Each of these is covered in this manual, and theIndex will help you find them quickly. If you’retrailering, it’s a good idea to review this informationbefore you start your trip.

Check periodically to see that all hitch nuts andbolts are tight.

Engine Cooling When Trailer TowingYour cooling system may temporarily overheatduring severe operating conditions. See EngineOverheating on page 297.

268

Service ........................................................ 272Accessories and Modifications ................... 272California Proposition 65 Warning .............. 273Doing Your Own Service Work .................. 273Adding Equipment to the Outside of

Your Vehicle .......................................... 274Fuel ............................................................. 274

Gasoline Octane ........................................ 274Gasoline Specifications .............................. 274California Fuel ........................................... 275Additives ................................................... 275Fuels in Foreign Countries ........................ 276Filling the Tank ......................................... 277Filling a Portable Fuel Container ............... 279

Checking Things Under the Hood .............. 280Hood Release ........................................... 280Engine Compartment Overview .................. 282Engine Oil ................................................. 284Engine Air Cleaner/Filter ............................ 288Automatic Transaxle Fluid ......................... 290

Manual Transaxle Fluid ............................. 292Hydraulic Clutch ........................................ 293Engine Coolant .......................................... 294Radiator Pressure Cap .............................. 297Engine Overheating ................................... 297Cooling System ......................................... 299Power Steering Fluid ................................. 304Windshield Washer Fluid ........................... 305Brakes ...................................................... 306Battery ...................................................... 309Jump Starting ............................................ 310

Bulb Replacement ....................................... 315Halogen Bulbs ........................................... 315Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and

Parking Lamps ....................................... 316Center High-Mounted

Stoplamp (CHMSL) ................................ 317Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ...... 318Back-Up Lamps ......................................... 320Replacement Bulbs ................................... 320

Section 5 Service and Appearance Care

269

Windshield Wiper Blade Replacement ....... 321Tires ............................................................ 322

Tire Sidewall Labeling ............................... 323Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 326Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................. 329Tire Pressure Monitor System ................... 330Tire Inspection and Rotation ...................... 333When It Is Time for New Tires .................. 335Buying New Tires ...................................... 336Different Size Tires and Wheels ................ 337Uniform Tire Quality Grading ..................... 338Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ............ 339Wheel Replacement .................................. 340Tire Chains ............................................... 341If a Tire Goes Flat .................................... 342Changing a Flat Tire ................................. 343Removing the Spare Tire and Tools .......... 344Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ............................................. 346Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ...... 351Compact Spare Tire .................................. 354

Appearance Care ........................................ 354Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 354Fabric/Carpet ............................................. 356Leather ...................................................... 356Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces ..................................... 357Care of Safety Belts .................................. 357Weatherstrips ............................................ 358Washing Your Vehicle ............................... 358Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses ................ 358Finish Care ............................................... 358Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ......................................... 359Aluminum Wheels ...................................... 359Tires ......................................................... 360Sheet Metal Damage ................................. 360Finish Damage .......................................... 361Underbody Maintenance ............................ 361Chemical Paint Spotting ............................ 361Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials ............ 362


270

Vehicle Identification .................................. 363Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) ........... 363Service Parts Identification Label ............... 363

Electrical System ........................................ 364Add-On Electrical Equipment ..................... 364Headlamp Wiring ....................................... 364Windshield Wiper Fuses ............................ 364Power Windows and Other Power

Options .................................................. 364

Fuses and Circuit Breakers ....................... 365Instrument Panel Fuse Block ..................... 365Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............... 367

Capacities and Specifications .................... 369Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ... 370

Engine Drive Belt Routing ......................... 371


271

ServiceYour dealer knows your vehicle best and wantsyou to be happy with it. We hope you will goto your dealer for all your service needs. You willget genuine GM parts and GM-trained andsupported service people.

We hope you will want to keep your GM vehicle allGM. Genuine GM parts have one of these marks:

Accessories and ModificationsWhen you add non-GM accessories to your vehiclethey can affect your vehicle’s performance andsafety, including such things as, airbags, braking,stability, ride and handling, emissions systems,aerodynamics, durability, and electronic systemslike anti-lock brakes, traction control andstability control. Some of these accessories mayeven cause malfunction or damage not covered bywarranty.

GM Accessories are designed to complement andfunction with other systems on your vehicle.Your GM dealer can accessorize your vehicleusing genuine GM Accessories. When you go toyour GM dealer and ask for GM Accessories,you will know that GM-trained and supportedservice technicians will perform the work usinggenuine GM Accessories.

272

California Proposition 65 WarningMost motor vehicles, including this one, containand/or emit chemicals known to the State ofCalifornia to cause cancer and birth defects or otherreproductive harm. Engine exhaust, many parts andsystems (including some inside the vehicle), manyfluids, and some component wear by-productscontain and/or emit these chemicals.

Doing Your Own Service Work

{CAUTION:

You can be injured and your vehicle couldbe damaged if you try to do service workon a vehicle without knowing enoughabout it.

• Be sure you have sufficient knowledge,experience, the proper replacementparts, and tools before you attempt anyvehicle maintenance task.



• Be sure to use the proper nuts, bolts,and other fasteners. English andmetric fasteners can be easilyconfused. If you use the wrongfasteners, parts can later break or falloff. You could be hurt.

If you want to do some of your own service work,you will want to use the proper service manual.It tells you much more about how to service yourvehicle than this manual can. To order theproper service manual, see Service PublicationsOrdering Information on page 417.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to do your own service work, seeServicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle onpage 80.

You should keep a record with all parts receiptsand list the mileage and the date of any servicework you perform. See Part E: MaintenanceRecord on page 396.

273

Adding Equipment to the Outside ofYour VehicleThings you might add to the outside of yourvehicle can affect the airflow around it. This maycause wind noise and affect windshield washerperformance. Check with your dealer beforeadding equipment to the outside of your vehicle.

FuelUse of the recommended fuel is an important partof the proper maintenance of your vehicle. Tohelp keep the engine clean and maintain optimumvehicle performance, GM recommends the useof gasoline advertised as TOP TIER DetergentGasoline.

Gasoline OctaneUse regular unleaded gasoline with a postedoctane rating of 87 or higher. If the octane ratingis less than 87, you may notice an audibleknocking noise when you drive, commonly referredto as spark knock. If this occurs, use a gasolinerated at 87 octane or higher as soon as possible. Ifyou are using gasoline rated at 87 octane orhigher and you hear heavy knocking, your engineneeds service.

Gasoline SpecificationsAt a minimum, gasoline should meet ASTMspecification D 4814 in the United States orCAN/CGSB-3.5 in Canada. Some gasolines maycontain an octane-enhancing additive calledmethylcyclopentadienyl manganese tricarbonyl(MMT). General Motors recommends against theuse of gasolines containing MMT. See Additiveson page 275 for additional information.

274

California FuelIf your vehicle is certified to meet CaliforniaEmissions Standards, it is designed to operate onfuels that meet California specifications. Seethe underhood emission control label. If this fuel isnot available in states adopting Californiaemissions standards, your vehicle will operatesatisfactorily on fuels meeting federalspecifications, but emission control systemperformance may be affected. The malfunctionindicator lamp may turn on and your vehicle mayfail a smog-check test. See Malfunction IndicatorLamp on page 170. If this occurs, return toyour authorized GM dealer for diagnosis. If it isdetermined that the condition is caused by the typeof fuel used, repairs may not be covered byyour warranty.

AdditivesTo provide cleaner air, all gasolines in the UnitedStates are now required to contain additivesthat will help prevent engine and fuel systemdeposits from forming, allowing your emissioncontrol system to work properly. In most cases,you should not have to add anything to your fuel.However, some gasolines contain only theminimum amount of additive required to meet U.S.Environmental Protection Agency regulations.To help keep fuel injectors and intake valves clean,or if your vehicle experiences problems due todirty injectors or valves, look for gasoline that isadvertised as TOP TIER Detergent Gasoline. Also,your dealer has additives that will help correctand prevent most deposit-related problems.

Gasolines containing oxygenates, such as ethersand ethanol, and reformulated gasolines may beavailable in your area. General Motorsrecommends that you use these gasolines if theycomply with the specifications described earlier.

275

However, E85 (85% ethanol) and other fuelscontaining more than 10% ethanol must not beused in vehicles that were not designed forthose fuels.

Notice: Your vehicle was not designed forfuel that contains methanol. Do not usefuel containing methanol. It can corrode metalparts in the fuel system and also damageplastic and rubber parts. That damage wouldnot be covered under your warranty.

Some gasolines that are not reformulated for lowemissions may contain an octane-enhancingadditive called methylcyclopentadienyl manganesetricarbonyl (MMT); ask the attendant where youbuy gasoline whether the fuel contains MMT.General Motors recommends against the use ofsuch gasolines. Fuels containing MMT can reducethe life of spark plugs and the performance ofthe emission control system may be affected. Themalfunction indicator lamp may turn on. If thisoccurs, return to your dealer for service.

Fuels in Foreign CountriesIf you plan on driving in another country outsidethe United States or Canada, the proper fuel mightbe hard to find. Never use leaded gasoline orany other fuel not recommended in the previoustext on fuel. Costly repairs caused by use ofimproper fuel would not be covered by yourwarranty.

To check the fuel availability, ask an auto club, orcontact a major oil company that does businessin the country where you will be driving.

276

Filling the Tank

{CAUTION:

Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel firecan cause bad injuries. To help avoidinjuries to you and others, read and followall the instructions on the pump island.Turn off your engine when you arerefueling. Do not smoke if you are nearfuel or refueling your vehicle. Do not usecellular phones. Keep sparks, flames, andsmoking materials away from fuel. Do notleave the fuel pump unattended whenrefueling your vehicle. This is against thelaw in some places. Do not re-entervehicle while pumping fuel. Keep childrenaway from the fuel pump; never letchildren pump fuel.

The tethered fuel cap is located behind a hingedfuel door on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

277

The fuel door releaselever is located nearthe floor under thedriver’s seat on theoutboard side.

To remove the fuel cap, turn it slowlycounterclockwise. On some vehicles you mayhave to push in while turning the cap.

While refueling, hang the fuel cap inside of thefuel door.

{CAUTION:

If you spill fuel and then somethingignites it, you could be badly burned. Fuelcan spray out on you if you open the fuelcap too quickly. This spray can happen ifyour tank is nearly full, and is more likelyin hot weather. Open the fuel cap slowlyand wait for any hiss noise to stop. Thenunscrew the cap all the way.

Be careful not to spill fuel. Do not top off or overfillthe tank, and wait a few seconds after you havefinished pumping before removing the nozzle.Clean fuel from painted surfaces as soonas possible. See Washing Your Vehicle onpage 358.

When replacing the fuel cap, turn it clockwise untilit clicks. Make sure the cap is fully installed.The diagnostic system can determine if the fuelcap has been left off or improperly installed.

278

This would allow fuel to evaporate into theatmosphere. See Malfunction Indicator Lamp onpage 170.

{CAUTION:

If a fire starts while you are refueling, donot remove the nozzle. Shut off the flow offuel by shutting off the pump or bynotifying the station attendant. Leave thearea immediately.

Notice: If you need a new fuel cap, be sure toget the right type. Your dealer can get onefor you. If you get the wrong type, it may notfit properly. This may cause your malfunctionindicator lamp to light and may damageyour fuel tank and emissions system. SeeMalfunction Indicator Lamp on page 170.

Filling a Portable Fuel Container

{CAUTION:

Never fill a portable fuel container while itis in your vehicle. Static electricitydischarge from the container can ignite thegasoline vapor. You can be badly burnedand your vehicle damaged if this occurs.To help avoid injury to you and others:

• Dispense gasoline only into approvedcontainers.

• Do not fill a container while it is inside avehicle, in a vehicle’s trunk, pickupbed, or on any surface other than theground.

• Bring the fill nozzle in contact with theinside of the fill opening beforeoperating the nozzle. Contact shouldbe maintained until the filling iscomplete.

• Do not smoke while pumping gasoline.• Do not use a cellular phone while

pumping gasoline.

279

Checking Things Underthe Hood

{CAUTION:

An electric fan under the hood can start upand injure you even when the engine is notrunning. Keep hands, clothing, and toolsaway from any underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Things that burn can get on hot engineparts and start a fire. These includeliquids like fuel, oil, coolant, brake fluid,windshield washer and other fluids, andplastic or rubber. You or others could beburned. Be careful not to drop or spillthings that will burn onto a hot engine.

Hood ReleaseTo open the hood, do the following:

1. Pull the releasehandle with thissymbol on it.It is located belowthe instrument panelto the left of thesteering wheel.

280

2. Then go to the front of the vehicle and pull upon the secondary hood release. The lever islocated near the middle of the hood.

3. Lift the hood.

4. Release the hood prop rod from its retainerand put it into the slot in the hood. To insertthe hood prop rod into the slot, move it straightup. If it is moved to the side or toward theinside of the vehicle, it may become detached.

Before closing the hood, be sure all the filler capsare on properly. Make sure to return the hoodprop rod carefully back to its retainer to avoiddamaging the vehicle.

281

Engine Compartment OverviewWhen you open the hood, here is what you will see:

282

A. Windshield Washer Fluid Reservoir. See“Adding Washer Fluid” under WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 305.

B. Power Steering Fluid Reservoir. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 304.

C. Radiator Pressure Cap. See Radiator PressureCap on page 297.

D. Engine Oil Dipstick. See “Checking Engine Oil”under Engine Oil on page 284.

E. Coolant Recovery Tank. See Cooling Systemon page 299.

F. Engine Oil Fill Cap. See “When to Add EngineOil” under Engine Oil on page 284.

G. Automatic Transaxle Fluid Dipstick (IfEquipped). See “Checking the Fluid Level”under Automatic Transaxle Fluid on page 290.

H. Brake Master Cylinder Reservoir andHydraulic Clutch (If Equipped). See “BrakeFluid” under Brakes on page 306 and HydraulicClutch on page 293.

I. Engine Air Cleaner/Filter. See Engine AirCleaner/Filter on page 288.

J. Battery. See Battery on page 309.K. Engine Compartment Fuse Block. See Engine

Compartment Fuse Block on page 367.

283

Engine Oil

If the engine oilpressure light appearson the instrumentcluster, check theengine oil levelright away.

For more information, see Oil Pressure Light onpage 173. You should check the engine oillevel regularly; this is an added reminder.

Checking Engine OilIt is a good idea to check the engine oil every timeyou get fuel. In order to get an accurate reading,the oil must be warm and the vehicle must beon level ground.

The engine oil dipstick handle is a yellow loop.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 282for the location of the engine oil dipstick.

1. Turn off the engine and give the oil severalminutes to drain back into the oil pan. If youdo not do this, the oil dipstick might notshow the actual level.

2. Pull out the dipstick and clean it with a papertowel or cloth, then push it back in all theway. Remove it again, keeping the tip down,and check the level.

284

When to Add Engine Oil

If the oil is below the indent at the tip of thedipstick, you need to add at least one quart/liter ofoil. But you must use the right kind. This sectionexplains what kind of oil to use. For engineoil crankcase capacity, see Capacities andSpecifications on page 369.

Notice: Do not add too much oil. If the enginehas so much oil that the oil level gets abovethe upper hole, the engine could be damaged.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 282for the location of the engine oil fill cap.

Be sure to add enough oil to put the levelsomewhere in the proper operating range. Pushthe dipstick all the way back in when you arethrough.

285

What Kind of Engine Oil to Use

Look for two things:

• GM6094M

Your vehicle’s engine requires oil meeting GMStandard GM6094M. Look for and use onlyan oil that meets GM Standard GM6094M.

• SAE 5W-30

As shown in the viscosity chart, SAE 5W-30 isbest for your vehicle.

These numbers on an oil container show itsviscosity, or thickness. Do not use otherviscosity oils such as SAE 20W-50.

Oils meeting theserequirements shouldalso have the starburstsymbol on thecontainer. This symbolindicates that the oilhas been certified by theAmerican PetroleumInstitute (API).

Look for this information on the oil container, anduse only those oils that are identified as meetingGM Standard GM6094M and have the starburstsymbol on the front of the oil container.

Notice: Use only engine oil identified asmeeting GM Standard GM6094M and showingthe American Petroleum Institute CertifiedFor Gasoline Engines starburst symbol. Failureto use the recommended oil can result inengine damage not covered by your warranty.

GM Goodwrench® oil meets all the requirementsfor your vehicle.

286

If you are in an area of extreme cold, where thetemperature falls below −20°F (−29°C), it isrecommend that you use either an SAE 5W-30synthetic oil or an SAE 0W-30 oil. Both provideeasier cold starting and better protection forthe engine at extremely low temperatures.

Engine Oil AdditivesDo not add anything to the oil. The recommendedoils with the starburst symbol that meet GMStandard GM6094M are all you need for goodperformance and engine protection.

When to Change Engine OilChange the oil and filter every 5,000 miles(8 000 km) or 3 months, whichever occurs first.See Scheduled Maintenance on page 377.

What to Do with Used OilUsed engine oil contains certain elements that maybe unhealthy for your skin and could even causecancer. Do not let used oil stay on your skin for verylong. Clean your skin and nails with soap andwater, or a good hand cleaner. Wash or properlydispose of clothing or rags containing used engineoil. See the manufacturer’s warnings about the useand disposal of oil products.

Used oil can be a threat to the environment. If youchange your own oil, be sure to drain all the oil fromthe filter before disposal. Never dispose of oil byputting it in the trash, pouring it on the ground, intosewers, or into streams or bodies of water. Instead,recycle it by taking it to a place that collects usedoil. If you have a problem properly disposing ofused oil, ask your dealer, a service station, or alocal recycling center for help.

287

Engine Air Cleaner/Filter

The engine air cleaner/filter is in the enginecompartment on the driver’s side of the vehicle.See Engine Compartment Overview on page 282for more information on location.

When to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterIf you are driving in dusty/dirty conditions, inspectthe air cleaner/filter at each engine oil change.Replace the filter every 30,000 miles (48 000 km)or 24 months, whichever occurs first. SeePart A: Scheduled Maintenance Services onpage 376 for more information.

How to Inspect the Engine AirCleaner/FilterTo inspect the air cleaner/filter remove the filterfrom the vehicle and lightly shake the filter torelease loose dust and dirt. If the filter remainscaked with dirt, a new filter is required.

288

To inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter,do the following:

1. Release the two clips that hold the cover down.

2. Lift the cover off.

3. Inspect or replace the engine air cleaner/filter.

4. Reinstall the cover.

{CAUTION:

Operating the engine with the aircleaner/filter off can cause you or othersto be burned. The air cleaner not onlycleans the air; it helps to stop flames ifthe engine backfires. If it is not there andthe engine backfires, you could beburned. Do not drive with it off, and becareful working on the engine with the aircleaner/filter off.

Notice: If the air cleaner/filter is off, a backfirecan cause a damaging engine fire. And, dirtcan easily get into your engine, which willdamage it. Always have the air cleaner/filter inplace when you are driving.

289

Automatic Transaxle Fluid

When to Check and Change AutomaticTransaxle FluidA good time to check your automatic transaxlefluid level is when the engine oil is changed.

Check the fluid in the transaxle and differentialat the intervals listed in Part A: ScheduledMaintenance Services on page 376, andbe sure to use the transaxle fluid listed inPart D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 394.

How to Check Automatic TransaxleFluidBecause this operation can be a little difficult, youmay choose to have this done at the dealershipservice department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false readingon the dipstick.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damagethe transaxle. Too much can mean that some ofthe fluid could come out and fall on hot engineor exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.Be sure to get an accurate reading if you checkthe transaxle fluid.

Wait at least 30 minutes before checking thetransaxle fluid level if you have been driving:

• When outside temperatures are above 90°F(32°C).

• At high speed for quite a while.

• In heavy traffic — especially in hot weather.

• While pulling a trailer.

To get the right reading, the fluid should be atnormal operating temperature, which is 158°F to176°F (70°C to 80°C).

Get the vehicle warmed up by driving about15 miles (24 km) when outside temperatures areabove 50°F (10°C). If it is colder than 50°F (10°C),you may have to drive longer.

290

Checking the Fluid LevelPrepare your vehicle as follows:

1. Park your vehicle on a level place. Keep theengine running.

2. With the parking brake applied, place the shiftlever in PARK (P).

3. With your foot on the brake pedal, move theshift lever through each gear range, pausingfor about three seconds in each range.Then, position the shift lever in PARK (P).

4. Let the engine run at idle for three tofive minutes.

Then, without shutting off the engine, followthese steps:

The automatic transaxle dipstick has an orangehandle and is located near the front of the enginecompartment. See Engine Compartment Overviewon page 282 for more information on location.

1. Release the tab and pull out the dipstick andwipe it with a clean rag or paper towel.

2. Push it back in all the way, wait three secondsand then pull it back out again.

3. Check both sides of the dipstick, and read thelower level. The fluid level must be betweenthe two dimples in the hot range.

4. If the fluid level is in the acceptable range,push the dipstick back in all the way; thenpress the tab down to lock the dipstick in place.

291

How to Add Automatic Transaxle FluidRefer to the Maintenance Schedule todetermine what kind of transaxle fluid to use.See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 394.

If the fluid level is low, add only enough of theproper fluid to bring the level into the area betweendimples on the dipstick.

1. Pull out the dipstick.

2. Using a long-neck funnel, add enough fluid atthe dipstick hole to bring it to the proper level.It does not take much fluid, generally lessthan one pint (0.5 L). Do not overfill.

Notice: Use of the incorrect automatictransaxle fluid may damage your vehicle, andthe damages may not be covered by yourwarranty. Always use the automatic transaxlefluid listed in Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 394.

3. After adding fluid, recheck the fluid level asdescribed under “How to Check AutomaticTransaxle Fluid,” earlier in this section.

4. When the correct fluid level is obtained, pushthe dipstick back in all the way; then press thetab down to lock the dipstick in place.

Manual Transaxle Fluid

When to CheckA good time to have your manual transaxle fluidlevel checked is when the engine oil is changed.However, the fluid in your manual transaxledoes not require changing.

How to CheckBecause this operation can be difficult, you maychoose to have this done at your Pontiacdealership service department.

If you do it yourself, be sure to follow all theinstructions here, or you could get a false reading.

Notice: Too much or too little fluid can damagethe transaxle. Too much can mean that some ofthe fluid could come out and fall on hot engineor exhaust system parts, starting a fire. Toolittle fluid could cause the transaxle to overheat.Be sure to get an accurate reading if you checkthe transaxle fluid.

292

Check the fluid level only when your engine is off,the vehicle is parked on a level place and thetransaxle is cool enough for you to rest yourfingers on the transaxle case.

Then, follow these steps:

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Check that the lubricant level is up to thebottom of the filler plug hole.

3. If the fluid level is good, install the plug and besure it is fully seated. If the fluid level is low,add more fluid as described in the next steps.

How to Add FluidHere is how to add fluid. Refer to the MaintenanceSchedule to determine what kind of fluid to use.See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 394.

1. Remove the filler plug.

2. Add fluid at the filler plug hole. Add onlyenough fluid to bring the fluid level up tothe bottom of the filler plug hole.

3. Install the filler plug. Be sure the plug is fullyseated.

Hydraulic ClutchThe hydraulic clutch linkage in your vehicle isself-adjusting. The master cylinder reservoiris filled with DOT-3 brake fluid.

It is not necessary to regularly check the fluidunless you suspect there is a leak in the system.Adding fluid will not correct a leak.

The hydraulic clutch and brake master cylinderuse the same reservoir.

A fluid loss in this system could indicate aproblem. Have the system inspected and repaired.

293

When to Check and What to Use

The reservoir is locatedat the back of theengine compartment, onthe driver’s side ofthe vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overviewon page 282 formore information onlocation.

Refer to the Maintenance Schedule to determinehow often you should check the fluid level inyour master cylinder reservoir and for the properfluid. See Part B: Owner Checks and Serviceson page 386 and Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 394.

How to Check and Add FluidCheck to make sure that the fluid level is at orabove the MIN mark. If the level is below the MINmark, see the instructions on the reservoir cap.

Engine CoolantYour vehicle was factory-filled with a coolantdeveloped to last for five years or 150,000 miles(240 000 km), whichever occurs first. Whencoolant is added or changed, use DEX-COOL®

coolant.

The following explains your cooling system andhow to add coolant when it is low. If you havea problem with engine overheating, see EngineOverheating on page 297.

294

A 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant will:

• Give freezing protection down to −34°F(− 37°C).

• Give boiling protection up to 265°F (129°C).

• Protect against rust and corrosion.

• Help keep the proper engine temperature.

• Let the warning lights and gages work as theyshould.

Notice: Using coolant other thanDEX-COOL® may cause premature engine,heater core or radiator corrosion. In addition,the engine coolant may require changingsooner, at 30,000 miles (50 000 km) or24 months, whichever occurs first. Any repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always use DEX-COOL® (silicate-free) coolantin your vehicle.

What to UseUse a mixture of one-half clean, drinkable waterand one-half DEX-COOL® coolant which willnot damage aluminum parts. If you use this coolantmixture, you do not need to add anything else.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and DEX-COOL® coolant.

Notice: If you use an improper coolantmixture, your engine could overheat and bebadly damaged. The repair cost would not becovered by your warranty. Too much waterin the mixture can freeze and crack the engine,radiator, heater core, and other parts.

295

If you have to add coolant more than four timesa year, have your dealer check your coolingsystem.

Notice: If you use extra inhibitors and/oradditives in your vehicle’s cooling system, youcould damage your vehicle. Use only theproper mixture of the engine coolant listed inthis manual for the cooling system. SeePart D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 394 for more information.

Checking CoolantThe vehicle must be on a level surface. When yourengine is cold, the coolant level should be at LOW,or a little higher. When your engine is warm, thelevel should be up to FULL, or a little higher.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 282for the location of the coolant recovery tank.

Adding CoolantIf you need more coolant, add the properDEX-COOL® coolant mixture at the coolantrecovery tank, but be careful not to spill it.

{CAUTION:

Turning the radiator pressure cap whenthe engine and radiator are hot can allowsteam and scalding liquids to blow outand burn you badly. With the coolantrecovery tank, you will almost never haveto add coolant at the radiator. Never turnthe radiator pressure cap — even alittle — when the engine and radiatorare hot.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol, and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

296

Occasionally check the coolant level in theradiator. For information on how to add coolant tothe radiator, see Cooling System on page 299.

Radiator Pressure Cap

Notice: If the pressure cap is not tightlyinstalled, coolant loss and possible enginedamage may occur. Be sure the cap is properlyand tightly secured.

See Engine Compartment Overview on page 282for more information on location.

Engine OverheatingYou will find a coolant temperature gage on yourvehicle’s instrument panel. See Engine CoolantTemperature Gage on page 169.

If Steam Is Coming From Your Engine

{CAUTION:

Steam from an overheated engine canburn you badly, even if you just open thehood. Stay away from the engine if yousee or hear steam coming from it. Justturn it off and get everyone away from thevehicle until it cools down. Wait untilthere is no sign of steam or coolantbefore you open the hood.

If you keep driving when your engine isoverheated, the liquids in it can catch fire.You or others could be badly burned.Stop your engine if it overheats, and getout of the vehicle until the engine is cool.

Notice: If your engine catches fire becauseyou keep driving with no coolant, your vehiclecan be badly damaged. The costly repairswould not be covered by your warranty.

297

If No Steam Is Coming FromYour EngineIf you get an engine overheat warning but see orhear no steam, the problem may not be tooserious. Sometimes the engine can get a little toohot when you:

• Climb a long hill on a hot day.

• Stop after high-speed driving.

• Idle for long periods in traffic.

• Tow a trailer.

If you get the overheat warning with no sign ofsteam, try this for a minute or so:

1. In heavy traffic, let the engine idle inNEUTRAL (N) while stopped. If it is safe to doso, pull off the road, shift to PARK (P) orNEUTRAL (N) and let the engine idle.

2. Turn on your heater to full hot at the highestfan speed and open the windows asnecessary.

If you no longer have the overheat warning, youcan drive. Just to be safe, drive slower forabout 10 minutes. If the warning does not comeback on, you can drive normally.

If the warning continues and you have notstopped, pull over, stop, and park your vehicleright away.

If there is still no sign of steam, you can idle theengine for three minutes while you are parked.If you still have the warning, turn off the engineand get everyone out of the vehicle until itcools down.

You may decide not to lift the hood but to getservice help right away.

298

Cooling SystemWhen you decide it is safe to lift the hood, here iswhat you will see:

A. Electric Engine Cooling FanB. Engine Coolant Recovery TankC. Radiator Pressure Cap

{CAUTION:

An electric engine cooling fan under thehood can start up even when the engineis not running and can injure you. Keephands, clothing, and tools away from anyunderhood electric fan.

If the coolant inside the coolant recovery tank isboiling, do not do anything else until it cools down.The vehicle should be parked on a level surface.

The coolant level should be at or above theFULL mark. If it is not, you may have a leak at thepressure cap or in the radiator hoses, heaterhoses, radiator, water pump, or somewhere elsein the cooling system.

299

{CAUTION:

Heater and radiator hoses, and otherengine parts, can be very hot. Do nottouch them. If you do, you can be burned.

Do not run the engine if there is a leak. Ifyou run the engine, it could lose allcoolant. That could cause an engine fire,and you could be burned. Get any leakfixed before you drive the vehicle.

If there seems to be no leak, with the engine on,check to see if the electric engine cooling fanis running. If the engine is overheating, thefan should be running. If it is not, your vehicleneeds service.

Notice: Engine damage from running yourengine without coolant is not covered by yourwarranty.

How to Add Coolant to the CoolantRecovery TankIf you have not found a problem yet, but thecoolant level is not at or above the FULL mark,add a 50/50 mixture of clean, drinkable water andDEX-COOL® coolant at the coolant recoverytank. See Engine Coolant on page 294 for moreinformation about the proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

Adding only plain water to your coolingsystem can be dangerous. Plain water, orsome other liquid such as alcohol, canboil before the proper coolant mixture will.Your vehicle’s coolant warning system isset for the proper coolant mixture. Withplain water or the wrong mixture, yourengine could get too hot but you wouldnot get the overheat warning. Your enginecould catch fire and you or others couldbe burned. Use a 50/50 mixture of clean,drinkable water and a proper coolant.

300

Notice: In cold weather, water can freeze andcrack the engine, radiator, heater core andother parts. Use the recommended coolant andthe proper coolant mixture.

{CAUTION:

You can be burned if you spill coolant onhot engine parts. Coolant containsethylene glycol and it will burn if theengine parts are hot enough. Do not spillcoolant on a hot engine.

When the coolant in the coolant recovery tank isat the FULL mark, start your vehicle.

If the overheat warning continues, there is onemore thing you can try. You can add the propercoolant mixture directly to the radiator but be surethe cooling system is cool before you do it.

{CAUTION:

Steam and scalding liquids from a hotcooling system can blow out and burnyou badly. They are under pressure, and ifyou turn the radiator pressure cap — evena little — they can come out at highspeed. Never turn the cap when thecooling system, including the radiatorpressure cap, is hot. Wait for the coolingsystem and radiator pressure cap to coolif you ever have to turn the pressure cap.

301

How to Add Coolant to the Radiator

1. You can remove the radiator pressure capwhen the cooling system, including the radiatorpressure cap and upper radiator hose, is nolonger hot. Turn the pressure cap slowlycounterclockwise until it first stops. Do notpress down while turning the pressure cap.If you hear a hiss, wait for that to stop. A hissmeans there is still some pressure left.

2. Then keep turning the pressure cap, but nowpush down as you turn it. Remove thepressure cap.

3. Fill the radiator with the proper coolantmixture, up to the base of the filler neck.See Engine Coolant on page 294 for moreinformation about the proper coolant mixture.

302

4. Then fill the coolant recovery tank to theFULL mark.

5. Put the cap back on the coolant recovery tank,but leave the radiator pressure cap off.

6. Start the engine and let it run until you canfeel the upper radiator hose getting hot.Watch out for the engine cooling fan.

7. By this time, the coolant level inside theradiator filler neck may be lower. If the level islower, add more of the proper coolantmixture through the filler neck until the levelreaches the base of the filler neck.

8. Then replace the pressure cap. At any timeduring this procedure if coolant begins to flowout of the filler neck, reinstall the pressurecap. Be sure the ears on the pressure cap arein line with the vent tube.

303

Power Steering Fluid

The power steering fluidreservoir is located inthe engine compartmenton the passenger’sside of the vehicle. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 282for reservoir location.

When to Check Power Steering FluidIt is not necessary to regularly check powersteering fluid unless you suspect there is a leak inthe system or you hear an unusual noise. Afluid loss in this system could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired.

How to Check Power Steering FluidYou can check your fluid without taking the cap off.Just look at the reservoir.

• When the engine compartment is hot, thelevel should be between the HOT marks.

• When the engine compartment is cool, thelevel should be between the COLD marks.

What to UseTo determine what kind of fluid to use, seePart D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 394.

Notice: When adding power steering fluid ormaking a complete fluid change, alwaysuse the proper fluid. Failure to use the properfluid can cause leaks and damage hosesand seals.

304

Windshield Washer Fluid

What to UseWhen you need windshield washer fluid, be sureto read the manufacturer’s instructions beforeuse. If you will be operating your vehicle in an areawhere the temperature may fall below freezing,use a fluid that has sufficient protection againstfreezing.

Adding Washer FluidIf your vehicle has the low windshield washer fluidlevel warning light, it will come on when thefluid level is too low. See Low Washer FluidWarning Light on page 175.

Open the cap with thewasher symbol on it.Add washer fluiduntil the tank is full. SeeEngine CompartmentOverview on page 282for reservoir location.

Notice:• When using concentrated washer fluid,

follow the manufacturer’s instructionsfor adding water.

• Do not mix water with ready-to-use washerfluid. Water can cause the solution tofreeze and damage your washer fluid tankand other parts of the washer system.Also, water does not clean as wellas washer fluid.

• Fill your washer fluid tank onlythree-quarters full when it is very cold.This allows for expansion if freezingoccurs, which could damage the tank if itis completely full.

• Do not use engine coolant (antifreeze) inyour windshield washer. It can damageyour washer system and paint.

305

Brakes

Brake Fluid

The hydraulic clutch andbrake master cylinderuse the same reservoir.It is filled with DOT-3brake fluid. See EngineCompartmentOverview on page 282for the location ofthe reservoir.

There are only two reasons why the brake fluidlevel in the reservoir might go down. The firstis that the brake fluid goes down to an acceptablelevel during normal brake lining wear. Whennew linings are put in, the fluid level goes backup. The other reason is that fluid is leaking out ofthe brake system or the hydraulic clutch system.If it is, have that system fixed immediately, since aleak means that the brakes will not work well, orwill not work at all.

So, it is not a good idea to top off the brake fluid.Adding brake fluid will not correct a leak. Ifyou add fluid when the linings are worn, then youwill have too much fluid when you get newbrake linings. You should add or remove brakefluid, as necessary, only when work is done on thebrake hydraulic system.

{CAUTION:

If your vehicle has too much brake fluid, itcan spill on the engine. The fluid will burnif the engine is hot enough. You or otherscould be burned, and your vehicle couldbe damaged. Add brake fluid only whenwork is done on the brake and/or clutchhydraulic system.

When the brake fluid falls to a low level, the brakewarning light will come on. See Brake SystemWarning Light on page 166.

306

What to AddWhen you do need brake fluid, use only DOT-3brake fluid. Use new brake fluid from a sealedcontainer only. See Part D: Recommended Fluidsand Lubricants on page 394.

Always clean the brake fluid reservoir cap and thearea around the cap before removing it. Thishelps keep dirt from entering the reservoir.

{CAUTION:

With the wrong kind of fluid in the brakesystem, the brakes may not work well, orthey may not even work at all. This couldcause a crash. Always use the properbrake fluid.

Notice:• Using the wrong fluid can badly damage

brake system parts. For example, just afew drops of mineral-based oil, suchas engine oil, in the brake system candamage brake system parts so badly thatthey will have to be replaced. Do notlet someone put in the wrong kind of fluid.

• If you spill brake fluid on your vehicle’spainted surfaces, the paint finish canbe damaged. Be careful not to spill brakefluid on your vehicle. If you do, wash itoff immediately. See Washing Your Vehicleon page 358.

307

Brake WearYour vehicle has front disc brakes and rear drumbrakes.

Disc brake pads have built-in wear indicators thatmake a high-pitched warning sound when thebrake pads are worn and new pads are needed.The sound can come and go or be heard allthe time your vehicle is moving, except when youare pushing on the brake pedal firmly.

{CAUTION:

The brake wear warning sound means thatsoon the brakes will not work well. Thatcould lead to an accident. When you hearthe brake wear warning sound, have yourvehicle serviced.

Notice: Continuing to drive with worn-outbrake pads could result in costly brake repair.

Some driving conditions or climates can cause abrake squeal when the brakes are first appliedor lightly applied. This does not mean somethingis wrong with the brakes.

Properly torqued wheel nuts are necessary to helpprevent brake pulsation. When tires are rotated,inspect brake pads for wear and evenly tightenwheel nuts in the proper sequence to GM torquespecifications.

Rear drum brakes do not have wear indicators,but if you ever hear a rear brake rubbingnoise, have the rear brake linings inspectedimmediately. Also, the rear brake drums should beremoved and inspected each time the tires areremoved for rotation or changing. When you havethe front brake pads replaced, have the rearbrakes inspected, too.

Brake linings should always be replaced ascomplete axle sets.

See Brake System Inspection on page 393.

308

Brake Pedal TravelSee your dealer if the brake pedal does not returnto normal height, or if there is a rapid increase inpedal travel. This could be a sign of brake trouble.

Brake AdjustmentEvery time you make a moderate brake stop,the disc brakes adjust for wear. If you rarelymake a moderate or heavier stop, the brakesmight not adjust correctly. If you drive in that way,then — very carefully — make a few moderatebrake stops about every 1,000 miles (1 600 km),so the brakes will adjust properly.

Replacing Brake System PartsThe braking system on a vehicle is complex. Itsmany parts have to be of top quality and work welltogether if the vehicle is to have really goodbraking. Your vehicle was designed and testedwith top-quality GM brake parts. When you replaceparts of the braking system — for example,when the brake linings wear down and you neednew ones put in — be sure you get new

approved GM replacement parts. If you do not, thebrakes might not work properly. For example, ifsomeone puts in brake linings that are wrongfor your vehicle, the balance between the front andrear brakes can change — for the worse. Thebraking performance you have come to expect canchange in many other ways if someone puts inthe wrong replacement brake parts.

BatteryYour vehicle has a maintenance free battery.When it is time for a new battery, get one that hasthe replacement number shown on the originalbattery’s label. We recommend an ACDelco®

replacement battery. See Engine CompartmentOverview on page 282 for battery location.Warning: Battery posts, terminals, and relatedaccessories contain lead and lead compounds,chemicals known to the State of Californiato cause cancer and reproductive harm. Washhands after handling.

309

Vehicle StorageIf you are not going to drive your vehicle for25 days or more, remove the black, negative (−)cable from the battery. This will help keep thebattery from running down.

{CAUTION:

Batteries have acid that can burn you andgas that can explode. You can be badlyhurt if you are not careful. See JumpStarting on page 310 for tips on workingaround a battery without getting hurt.

Jump StartingIf your vehicle’s battery has run down, you maywant to use another vehicle and some jumpercables to start your vehicle. Be sure to usethe following steps to do it safely.

{CAUTION:

Batteries can hurt you. They can bedangerous because:

• They contain acid that can burn you.• They contain gas that can explode or

ignite.• They contain enough electricity to

burn you.

If you do not follow these steps exactly,some or all of these things can hurt you.

Notice: Ignoring these steps could result incostly damage to your vehicle that wouldnot be covered by your warranty.

Trying to start your vehicle by pushing orpulling it will not work, and it could damageyour vehicle.

310

1. Check the other vehicle. It must have a12-volt battery with a negative ground system.

Notice: If the other vehicle’s system is not a12-volt system with a negative ground,both vehicles can be damaged. Only usevehicles with 12-volt systems with negativegrounds to jump start your vehicle.

2. Get the vehicles close enough so the jumpercables can reach, but be sure the vehicles arenot touching each other. If they are, it couldcause a ground connection you do notwant. You would not be able to start yourvehicle, and the bad grounding could damagethe electrical systems.To avoid the possibility of the vehicles rolling,set the parking brake firmly on both vehiclesinvolved in the jump start procedure. Putan automatic transaxle in PARK (P) ora manual transaxle in NEUTRAL beforesetting the parking brake.

Notice: If you leave your radio or otheraccessories on during the jump startingprocedure, they could be damaged. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Always turn off your radio and otheraccessories when jump starting your vehicle.

3. Turn off the ignition on both vehicles.Unplug unnecessary accessories plugged intothe cigarette lighter. Turn off the radio andall lamps that are not needed. This will avoidsparks and help save both batteries. Andit could save the radio!

311

4. Open the hoods and locate the batteries. Findthe positive (+) and negative (−) terminallocations on each vehicle. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 282 for moreinformation on location.

{CAUTION:

An electric fan can start up even when theengine is not running and can injure you.Keep hands, clothing and tools away fromany underhood electric fan.

{CAUTION:

Using a match near a battery can causebattery gas to explode. People have beenhurt doing this, and some have beenblinded. Use a flashlight if you needmore light.

Be sure the battery has enough water.You do not need to add water to thebattery installed in your new vehicle. Butif a battery has filler caps, be sure theright amount of fluid is there. If it is low,add water to take care of that first. If youdon’t, explosive gas could be present.

Battery fluid contains acid that can burnyou. Do not get it on you. If youaccidentally get it in your eyes or on yourskin, flush the place with water and getmedical help immediately.

312

{CAUTION:

Fans or other moving engine parts caninjure you badly. Keep your hands awayfrom moving parts once the engine isrunning.

5. Check that the jumper cables do not haveloose or missing insulation. If they do, youcould get a shock. The vehicles couldbe damaged too.Before you connect the cables, here are somebasic things you should know. Positive (+)will go to positive (+) or to a remotepositive (+) terminal if the vehicle has one.Negative (−) will go to a heavy, unpaintedmetal engine part or to a remote negative (−)terminal if the vehicle has one.Do not connect positive (+) to negative (−) oryou will get a short that would damagethe battery and maybe other parts too. And donot connect the negative (−) cable to thenegative (−) terminal on the dead batterybecause this can cause sparks.

6. Connect the red positive (+) cable to thepositive (+) terminal of the dead battery.Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

7. Do not let the other end touch metal. Connectit to the positive (+) terminal of the goodbattery. Use a remote positive (+) terminal ifthe vehicle has one.

313

8. Now connect the black negative (−) cable tothe negative terminal of the good battery. Usea remote negative (−) terminal if the vehiclehas one.Do not let the other end touch anything until thenext step. The other end of the negative (−)cable does not go to the dead battery. It goes toa heavy, unpainted metal engine part or to aremote negative (−) terminal on the vehicle withthe dead battery.

9. Connect the other end of the negative (−) cableat least 18 inches (45 cm) away from the deadbattery, but not near engine parts that move.The electrical connection is just as good there,and the chance of sparks getting back to thebattery is much less.

10. Now start the vehicle with the good batteryand run the engine for a while.

11. Try to start the vehicle that had the deadbattery. If it will not start after a few tries, itprobably needs service.

Notice: If the jumper cables are connected orremoved in the wrong order, electrical shortingmay occur and damage the vehicle. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty. Alwaysconnect and remove the jumper cables in thecorrect order, making sure that the cables donot touch each other or other metal.

A. Heavy, Unpainted Metal Engine PartB. Good BatteryC. Dead Battery

Jumper Cable Removal

314

To disconnect the jumper cables from bothvehicles, do the following:

1. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle that had the dead battery.

2. Disconnect the black negative (−) cable fromthe vehicle with the good battery.

3. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from thevehicle with the good battery.

4. Disconnect the red positive (+) cable from theother vehicle.

Bulb ReplacementFor the proper type of replacement bulbs, seeReplacement Bulbs on page 320.

For any bulb changing procedure not listed in thissection, contact your dealer.

Halogen Bulbs

{CAUTION:

Halogen bulbs have pressurized gasinside and can burst if you drop orscratch the bulb. You or others could beinjured. Be sure to read and follow theinstructions on the bulb package.

315

Headlamps, Front Turn Signal,and Parking Lamps

A. HeadlampB. Turn Signal/Parking Lamp

To replace the headlamp, turn signal, or parkinglamp bulb, do the following:

1. Open the hood and locate the lamp assembly.

2. Remove the rubber cover and socket fromthe headlamp or turn signal/parking lamp.

316

3. Release the retainer clip holding the bulb onthe headlamp by pressing down and movingthe metal retainer away from you.Turn the turn signal/parking lamp bulb socketcounterclockwise to remove.

4. Pull the bulb out of the fixture.

5. Reverse the steps to install a new bulb.

Center High-Mounted Stoplamp(CHMSL)To replace the center high-mounted stoplampbulb, do the following:

1. Locate the bulb which is on the inside of theliftgate/liftglass near the top.

2. Remove the two clips on both sides of thecover and remove it.

3. Remove the two screws from the CHMSLhousing. Then remove the housing toexpose the bulb.

317

4. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull it out of the lamp housing.

5. Pull the bulb straight out of the socket.

6. Reverse the previous steps to install anew bulb.

Taillamps, Turn Signal, andStoplamps

A. Stoplamp/TaillampB. Turn Signal Lamp

318

To replace the turn signal and/or stop/taillampbulbs, do the following:

1. Remove the storage compartment cover inthe rear cargo area of the vehicle to accessthe bulbs.

2. Turn the bulb socketcounterclockwiseand pull it out of thelamp housing.



5. Reinstall the cover.

319

Back-Up Lamps

The back-up lampbulb is located inthe bumper.

To replace the back-up lamp bulb, do the following:

1. Reach up under the rear fascia to locatethe back-up lamp housing.

2. Turn the bulb socket counterclockwise andpull it out of the lamp housing.



Replacement Bulbs

Exterior Lamp Bulb NumberBack-Up Lamp 7440CHMSL 921Front Turn Signaland Parking Lamp

1157NA

Headlamp High/Low-Beam 9003Rear Turn Signal 7440Stoplamp/Taillamp 7443

For replacement bulbs not listed here, contactyour dealer.

320

Windshield Wiper BladeReplacementWindshield wiper blades should be inspected atleast twice a year for wear or cracking. See “WiperBlade Check” under At Least Twice a Year onpage 387 for more information.

Replacement blades come in different types andare removed in different ways. Here’s how toremove the wiper blade:

1. Pull the windshield wiper arm away from thewindshield.

2. Push the release lever and slide the wiperassembly toward the driver’s side of thevehicle.

3. Install a new blade by reversing Steps 1 and 2.

321

TiresYour new vehicle comes with high-quality tiresmade by a leading tire manufacturer. If you everhave questions about your tire warranty and whereto obtain service, see your GM Warranty bookletfor details. For additional information refer tothe tire manufacturer’s booklet included with yourvehicle.

{CAUTION:

Poorly maintained and improperly usedtires are dangerous.

• Overloading your vehicle’s tires cancause overheating as a result of toomuch friction. You could have anair-out and a serious accident. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 253.



• Underinflated tires pose the samedanger as overloaded tires. Theresulting accident could cause seriousinjury. Check all tires frequently tomaintain the recommended pressure.Tire pressure should be checked whenyour vehicle’s tires are cold. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 329.

• Overinflated tires are more likely to becut, punctured, or broken by a suddenimpact — such as when you hit apothole. Keep tires at therecommended pressure.

• Worn, old tires can cause accidents. Ifthe tire’s tread is badly worn, or ifyour vehicle’s tires have beendamaged, replace them.

322

Tire Sidewall LabelingUseful information about a tire is molded into itssidewall. The examples below show a typicalpassenger car tire and a compact spare tiresidewall.

(A) Tire Size: The tire size is a combination ofletters and numbers used to define a particulartire’s width, height, aspect ratio, construction typeand service description. See the “Tire Size”illustration later in this section for more detail.

(B) DOT (Department of Transportation): TheDepartment of Transportation (DOT) codeindicates that the tire is in compliance with theU.S. Department of Transportation Motor VehicleSafety Standards.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The lettersand numbers following DOT code are the TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

(D) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

Passenger Car Tire Example

323

(E) Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG): Tiremanufacturers are required to grade tiresbased on three performance factors: treadwear,traction and temperature resistance. For moreinformation see Uniform Tire Quality Grading onpage 338.

(F) Maximum Cold Inflation LoadLimit: Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support thatload. For information on recommended tirepressure see Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 329and Loading Your Vehicle on page 253.

(A) Temporary Use Only: The compact sparetire or temporary use tire has a tread life ofapproximately 3,000 miles (5 000 km) and shouldnot be driven at speeds over 65 mph (105 km/h).The compact spare tire is for emergency use whena regular road tire has lost air and gone flat.See Compact Spare Tire on page 354 and If aTire Goes Flat on page 342.

Compact Spare Tire Example

324

(B) Tire Ply Material: The type of cord andnumber of plies in the sidewall and under the tread.

(C) Tire Identification Number (TIN): The TireIdentification Number (TIN). The TIN showsthe manufacturer and plant code, tire size, anddate the tire was manufactured. The TIN is moldedonto both sides of the tire, although only oneside may have the date of manufacture.

(D) Maximum Cold Inflation LoadLimit: Maximum load that can be carried and themaximum pressure needed to support thatload. See Compact Spare Tire on page 354 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 253.

(E) Tire Inflation: The temporary use tire orcompact spare tire should be inflated to 60 psi(420 kPa). For more information on tire pressureand inflation see Inflation - Tire Pressure onpage 329.

(F) Tire Size: A combination of letters andnumbers define a tire’s width, height, aspect ratio,construction type and service description. Theletter T as the first character in the tire size meansthe tire is for temporary use only.

Tire SizeThe following illustration shows an example of atypical passenger car tire size.

(A) Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: The UnitedStates version of a metric tire sizing system. Theletter P as the first character in the tire sizemeans a passenger vehicle tire engineered tostandards set by the U. S. Tire and RimAssociation.

(B) Tire Width: The three-digit number indicatesthe tire section width in millimeters from sidewallto sidewall.

(C) Aspect Ratio: A two-digit number thatindicates the tire height-to-width measurements.For example, if the tire size aspect ratio is 70, asshown in item C of the illustration, it would meanthat the tire’s sidewall is 70% as high as it is wide.

325

(D) Construction Code: A letter code is used toindicate the type of ply construction in the tire. Theletter R means radial ply construction; the letter Dmeans diagonal or bias ply construction; and theletter B means belted-bias ply construction.

(E) Rim Diameter: Diameter of the wheel ininches.

(F) Service Description: These charactersrepresent the load range and the speed ratingof a tire. The load range represents the load carrycapacity a tire is certified to carry. The speedrating is the maximum speed a tire is certified tocarry a load. Speed ratings range from A to Z.

Tire Terminology and DefinitionsAir Pressure: The amount of air inside the tirepressing outward on each square inch of thetire. Air pressure is expressed in poundsper square inch (psi) or kilopascal (kPa).

Accessory Weight: This means the combinedweight of optional accessories. Some examplesof optional accessories are, automatictransmission/transaxle, power steering, powerbrakes, power windows, power seats, andair conditioning.

Aspect Ratio: The relationship of a tire’s heightto its width.

Belt: A rubber coated layer of cords that islocated between the plies and the tread. Cordsmay be made from steel or other reinforcingmaterials.

Bead: The tire bead contains steel wires wrappedby steel cords that hold the tire onto the rim.

Bias Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which the pliesare laid at alternate angles less than 90 degreesto the centerline of the tread.

Cold Tire Pressure: The amount of air pressurein a tire, measured in pounds per square inch(psi) or kilopascals (kPa) before a tire has built upheat from driving. See Inflation - Tire Pressureon page 329.

Curb Weight: This means the weight of a motorvehicle with standard and optional equipmentincluding the maximum capacity of fuel, oil, andcoolant, but without passengers and cargo.

326

DOT Markings: A code molded into the sidewallof a tire signifying that the tire is in compliancewith the U.S. Department of Transportation (DOT)motor vehicle safety standards. The DOT codeincludes the Tire Identification Number (TIN),an alphanumeric designator which can also identifythe tire manufacturer, production plant, brand,and date of production.

GVWR: Gross Vehicle Weight Rating. SeeLoading Your Vehicle on page 253.

GAWR FRT: Gross Axle Weight Rating for thefront axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 253.

GAWR RR: Gross Axle Weight Rating for therear axle. See Loading Your Vehicle on page 253.

Intended Outboard Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire, that must always face outwardwhen mounted on a vehicle.

Kilopascal (kPa): The metric unit for air pressure.

Light Truck (LT-Metric) Tire: A tire used onlight duty trucks and some multipurpose passengervehicles.

Load Index: An assigned number rangingfrom 1 to 279 that corresponds to the loadcarrying capacity of a tire.

Maximum Inflation Pressure: The maximum airpressure to which a cold tire may be inflated.The maximum air pressure is molded ontothe sidewall.

Maximum Load Rating: The load rating for a tireat the maximum permissible inflation pressurefor that tire.

Maximum Loaded Vehicle Weight: The sum ofcurb weight, accessory weight, vehicle capacityweight, and production options weight.

Normal Occupant Weight: The number ofoccupants a vehicle is designed to seat multipliedby 150 lbs (68 kg). See Loading Your Vehicleon page 253.

Occupant Distribution: Designated seatingpositions.

Outward Facing Sidewall: The side of anasymmetrical tire that has a particular side thatfaces outward when mounted on a vehicle.The side of the tire that contains a whitewall, bearswhite lettering, or bears manufacturer, brand,and/or model name molding that is higheror deeper than the same moldings on the othersidewall of the tire.

327

Passenger (P-Metric) Tire: A tire used onpassenger cars and some light duty trucks andmultipurpose vehicles.

Recommended Inflation Pressure: Vehiclemanufacturer’s recommended tire inflationpressure as shown on the tire placard. SeeInflation - Tire Pressure on page 329 and LoadingYour Vehicle on page 253.

Radial Ply Tire: A pneumatic tire in which theply cords that extend to the beads are laidat 90 degrees to the centerline of the tread.

Rim: A metal support for a tire and upon whichthe tire beads are seated.

Sidewall: The portion of a tire between the treadand the bead.

Speed Rating: An alphanumeric code assignedto a tire indicating the maximum speed atwhich a tire can operate.

Traction: The friction between the tire and theroad surface. The amount of grip provided.

Tread: The portion of a tire that comes intocontact with the road.

Treadwear Indicators: Narrow bands, sometimescalled wear bars, that show across the tread of atire when only 1/16 inch (1.6 mm) of tread remains.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 335.

UTQGS (Uniform Tire Quality GradingStandards): A tire information system thatprovides consumers with ratings for a tire’straction, temperature, and treadwear. Ratings aredetermined by tire manufacturers usinggovernment testing procedures. The ratings aremolded into the sidewall of the tire. See UniformTire Quality Grading on page 338.

Vehicle Capacity Weight: The number ofdesignated seating positions multiplied by 150 lbs(68 kg) plus the rated cargo load. See LoadingYour Vehicle on page 253.

Vehicle Maximum Load on the Tire: Load on anindividual tire due to curb weight, accessoryweight, occupant weight, and cargo weight.

Vehicle Placard: A label permanently attached toa vehicle showing the vehicle’s capacity weightand the original equipment tire size andrecommended inflation pressure. See “Tire andLoading Information Label” under LoadingYour Vehicle on page 253.

328

Inflation - Tire PressureTires need the correct amount of air pressure tooperate effectively.

Notice: Do not let anyone tell you thatunder-inflation or over-inflation is all right. It isnot. If your tires do not have enough air(under-inflation), you can get the following:• Too much flexing

• Too much heat

• Tire overloading

• Premature or irregular wear

• Poor handling

• Reduced fuel economy

If your tires have too much air (over-inflation),you can get the following:• Unusual wear

• Poor handling

• Rough ride

• Needless damage from road hazards

A Tire and Loading Information label is attached tothe vehicle’s center pillar (B-pillar). This labelshows your vehicle’s original equipment tires andthe correct inflation pressures for your tireswhen they are cold. The recommended cold tireinflation pressure, shown on the label, is theminimum amount of air pressure needed tosupport your vehicle’s maximum load carryingcapacity.

For additional information regarding how muchweight your vehicle can carry, and an example ofthe Tire and Loading Information label, seeLoading Your Vehicle on page 253. How you loadyour vehicle affects vehicle handling and ridecomfort. Never load your vehicle with more weightthan it was designed to carry.

When to CheckCheck your tires once a month or more. Do notforget to check the compact spare tire, it should beat 60 psi (420 kPa). For additional informationregarding the compact spare tire, see CompactSpare Tire on page 354.

329

How to CheckUse a good quality pocket-type gage to check tirepressure. You cannot tell if your tires areproperly inflated simply by looking at them. Radialtires may look properly inflated even when theyare under-inflated. Check the tire’s inflationpressure when the tires are cold. Cold means yourvehicle has been sitting for at least three hoursor driven no more than 1 mile (1.6 km).

Remove the valve cap from the tire valve stem.Press the tire gage firmly onto the valve toget a pressure measurement. If the cold tireinflation pressure matches the recommendedpressure on the Tire and Loading Informationlabel, no further adjustment is necessary. If theinflation pressure is low, add air until you reach therecommended amount.

If you overfill the tire, release air by pushing onthe metal stem in the center of the tire valve.Re-check the tire pressure with the tire gage.

Be sure to put the valve caps back on the valvestems. They help prevent leaks by keeping out dirtand moisture.

Tire Pressure Monitor SystemYour vehicle has a Tire Pressure Monitor System(TPMS). This feature is designed to alert youwhen the system detects a large change in thepressure of one tire. The system cannot alert youbefore you drive that a tire is low or flat. Youmust begin driving before the system worksproperly. The TPMS works with the brake controlsystem and is designed to detect differencesin the tire rotation speeds that are causedby changes in tire pressure. The TPMS does notreplace normal tire maintenance, see Tires onpage 322, Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 333 and When It Is Time for New Tires onpage 335.

330

This light, on theinstrument panel cluster,comes on when thetire pressure monitoringsystem detects alow-tire condition.

This light also comes on for a few seconds andthen go off when you turn the ignition to ON. Thisindicates that the TPMS is functioning properly.If the low-tire pressure warning light comeson while driving your vehicle, the system mayhave detected a low-tire condition. You need tostop as soon as possible and check your tiresfor damage. If a tire is flat, see If a Tire Goes Flaton page 342 and Changing a Flat Tire onpage 343. Also check the tire pressure in all fourtires, and set them to the specified level shownon the Tire and Loading Information label.

See Inflation - Tire Pressure on page 329 andLoading Your Vehicle on page 253 for additionalinformation.

Note: The tire pressure monitoring system on yourvehicle warns you when one of the tires issignificantly under-inflated and when somecombinations of the tires are significantlyunder-inflated. However, there are othercombinations of significantly under-inflated tires forwhich the tire pressure monitoring system might notgive a warning. These other combinations arerelatively common, accounting for approximatelyhalf the instances in which vehicles havesignificantly under-inflated tires. For example, thesystem might not warn you when both tires on thesame side or on the same axle of your vehicle aresignificantly under-inflated. It is particularlyimportant, therefore, to check the tire pressure in allof the tires regularly and maintain proper pressure.

In order for the tire pressure monitoring system towork properly you need to reset (initialize) thetire pressure monitoring system. Any timeyou check and/or adjust a tire’s pressure, repair orreplace a tire or wheel, or rotate the tires thetire pressure monitor system needs to be reset.

331

Do not reset (initialize) the system without firstcorrecting the cause of the low-tire condition. If thesystem is reset when the tire pressures areincorrect, the system will not function properly andmight not alert you when a tire is low.

To reset (initialize) the system:

1. Park the vehicle at a safe place and apply theparking brake. Turn the engine off.

2. Turn the ignition to ON with the engine off.3. If the low-tire

pressure warninglight is on, pushthe SET (reset)button for afew seconds.

The reset button is on the instrument panel tothe left of the steering wheel. The low-tirewarning light should go off.

4. Press and hold the SET (reset) button untilthe low-tire warning light comes on andflashes on/off three times. The tire pressurewarning reset button starts the reset(initialization) process.If the low-tire pressure warning light does notflash while you hold the reset button, thesystem might be malfunctioning and needsservice. See your GM dealer for service.

The system completes the reset (initialization)process after driving at vehicle speeds of at least19 mph (30 km/h) to 62 mph (100 km/h) formore than one hour. Do not push the SET (reset)button while driving. If you do the initializationprocess is cancelled. The initialization process cantake up to approximately one hour of drivingunder the following conditions:

• The vehicle speed is between 31 mph(50 km/h) and 62 mph (100 km/h).

• The roads are dry, smooth, and straight.

• The number of passengers is one ortwo (including the driver).

332

The low-tire pressure warning light may not comeon even if the tire inflation pressure is low, or itcould come on when the tire inflation pressure isset correctly under the following circumstances:

• A compact spare tire, snow tires, or tire chainsare installed on your vehicle.

• The tires are over-inflated, or the tire inflationpressure suddenly drops due to a tire burstingor other causes.

• The vehicle is driven on a slippery roadsurface such as rough or frozen roads.

• The vehicle speed is less than19 mph (30 km/h), and the driving duration isless than five minutes.

• The tires are made by a different manufactureror differ in tread pattern than the originalequipment tires.

• Rapid acceleration/deceleration or multipleconsecutive sharp turns.

• Towing a trailer.

• The vehicle is loaded over the limit or notbalanced properly.

• The initialization (reset) procedure was notperformed correctly after replacing orrotating tires or wheels.

• The outside temperature is below 32°F (0°C)or above 104°F (40°C).

Tire Inspection and RotationTires should be rotated every 5,000 to 8,000 miles(8 000 to 13 000 km).

Any time you notice unusual wear, rotate yourtires as soon as possible and check wheelalignment. Also check for damaged tires or wheels.See When It Is Time for New Tires on page 335and Wheel Replacement on page 340 formore information.

The purpose of regular rotation is to achievemore uniform wear for all tires on the vehicle.The first rotation is the most important. SeePart A: Scheduled Maintenance Services onpage 376 for scheduled rotation intervals.

333

When rotating your tires, always use the correctrotation pattern shown here.

Tires should only be moved from front to rear andrear to front on the same side of the vehicle.

Do not include the compact spare tire in your tirerotation.

After the tires have been rotated, adjust the frontand rear inflation pressures to the amountsshown on the Tire and Loading Information label.

Make certain that all wheel nuts are properlytightened. See “Wheel Nut Torque” underCapacities and Specifications on page 369.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on a wheel, or on the parts towhich it is fastened, can make wheel nutsbecome loose after time. The wheel couldcome off and cause an accident. Whenyou change a wheel, remove any rust ordirt from places where the wheel attachesto the vehicle. In an emergency, you canuse a cloth or a paper towel to do this;but be sure to use a scraper or wire brushlater, if needed, to get all the rust or dirtoff. See Changing a Flat Tire on page 343.

Vehicles equipped with a tire pressure monitoringsystem will need to reset (initialize) the systemafter each tire rotation. See Tire Pressure MonitorSystem on page 330.

334

When It Is Time for New Tires

One way to tell when itis time for new tires isto check the treadwearindicators, which willappear when your tireshave only 1/16 inch(1.6 mm) or less of treadremaining.

You need a new tire if any of the followingstatements are true:

• You can see the indicators at three or moreplaces around the tire.

• You can see cord or fabric showing throughthe tire’s rubber.

• The tread or sidewall is cracked, cut, orsnagged deep enough to show cord or fabric.

• The tire has a bump, bulge, or split.

• The tire has a puncture, cut, or other damagethat cannot be repaired well because of thesize or location of the damage.

335

Buying New TiresGM has developed and matched specific tires foryour vehicle. If you need replacement tires,GM strongly recommends that you get tires thatare the same size, brand, load range, speed rating,and construction type (radial and bias-beltedtires) as your vehicle’s original tires. This way, yourvehicle will continue to have tires that aredesigned to give the same performance andvehicle safety, during normal use, as the originaltires. See Tire Sidewall Labeling on page 323for additional information.

{CAUTION:

Mixing tires could cause you to losecontrol while driving. If you mix tires ofdifferent sizes, brands, or types (radialand bias-belted tires), the vehicle may nothandle properly, and you could have acrash. Using tires of different sizes,



brands, or types may also cause damageto your vehicle. Be sure to use the correctsize, brand, and type of tires on allwheels. It is all right to drive with yourcompact spare temporarily, as it wasdeveloped for use on your vehicle. SeeCompact Spare Tire on page 354.

{CAUTION:

If you use bias-ply tires on your vehicle,the wheel rim flanges could developcracks after many miles of driving. A tireand/or wheel could fail suddenly, causinga crash. Use only radial-ply tires with thewheels on your vehicle.

336

Your vehicle’s original equipment tires are listedon the Tire and Loading Information Label.This label is attached to the vehicle’s center pillar(B-pillar). See Loading Your Vehicle on page 253,for more information about the Tire and LoadingInformation Label.

Different Size Tires and WheelsIf you add wheels or tires that are a different sizethan your original equipment wheels and tires,this may affect the way your vehicle performs,including its braking, ride and handlingcharacteristics, stability, and resistance to rollover.Additionally, if your vehicle has electronicsystems such as, anti-lock brakes, traction control,and electronic stability control, the performanceof these systems can be affected.

{CAUTION:

If you add different sized wheels, yourvehicle may not provide an acceptablelevel of performance and safety if tires notrecommended for those wheels areselected. You may increase the chancethat you will crash and suffer seriousinjury. Only use GM specific wheel andtire systems developed for your vehicle,and have them properly installed by a GMcertified technician.

See Buying New Tires on page 336 andAccessories and Modifications on page 272 foradditional information.

337

Uniform Tire Quality GradingQuality grades can be found where applicable onthe tire sidewall between tread shoulder andmaximum selection width. For example:

Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature AThe following information relates to the systemdeveloped by the Unites States National HighwayTraffic Safety Administration (NHTSA), whichgrades tires by treadwear, traction, andtemperature performance. This applies only tovehicles sold in the United States. The grades aremolded on the sidewalls of most passenger cartires. The Uniform Tire Quality Grading (UTQG)system does not apply to deep tread, winter-typesnow tires, space-saver, or temporary usespare tires, tires with nominal rim diameters of10 to 12 inches (25 to 30 cm), or to somelimited-production tires.

While the tires available on General Motorspassenger cars and light trucks may vary withrespect to these grades, they must also conformto federal safety requirements.

TreadwearThe treadwear grade is a comparative rating basedon the wear rate of the tire when tested undercontrolled conditions on a specified governmenttest course. For example, a tire graded 150 wouldwear one and a half (11⁄2) times as well on thegovernment course as a tire graded 100. Therelative performance of tires depends upon theactual conditions of their use, however, and maydepart significantly from the norm due to variationsin driving habits, service practices, and differencesin road characteristics and climate.

Traction — AA, A, B, CThe traction grades, from highest to lowest, areAA, A, B, and C. Those grades represent the tire’sability to stop on wet pavement as measuredunder controlled conditions on specifiedgovernment test surfaces of asphalt and concrete.A tire marked C may have poor tractionperformance.

Warning: The traction grade assigned to this tireis based on straight-ahead braking tractiontests, and does not include acceleration, cornering,hydroplaning, or peak traction characteristics.

338

Temperature — A, B, CThe temperature grades are A (the highest),B, and C, representing the tire’s resistance to thegeneration of heat and its ability to dissipateheat when tested under controlled conditions on aspecified indoor laboratory test wheel. Sustainedhigh temperature can cause the material of the tireto degenerate and reduce tire life, and excessivetemperature can lead to sudden tire failure.The grade C corresponds to a level of performancewhich all passenger car tires must meet underthe Federal Motor Vehicle Safety StandardNo. 109. Grades B and A represent higher levelsof performance on the laboratory test wheelthan the minimum required by law.

Warning: The temperature grade for this tire isestablished for a tire that is properly inflatedand not overloaded. Excessive speed,underinflation, or excessive loading, eitherseparately or in combination, can cause heatbuildup and possible tire failure.

Wheel Alignment and Tire BalanceThe tires and wheels on your vehicle were alignedand balanced carefully at the factory to give youthe longest tire life and best overall performance.Adjustments to wheel alignment and tirebalancing will not be necessary on a regular basis.However, if you notice unusual tire wear or yourvehicle pulling to one side or the other, thealignment may need to be checked. If you noticeyour vehicle vibrating when driving on a smoothroad, your tires and wheels may need to berebalanced. See your dealer for proper diagnosis.

339

Wheel ReplacementReplace any wheel that is bent, cracked, or badlyrusted or corroded. If wheel nuts keep comingloose, the wheel, wheel bolts, and wheelnuts should be replaced. If the wheel leaks air,replace it (except some aluminum wheels,which can sometimes be repaired). See yourdealer if any of these conditions exist.

Your dealer will know the kind of wheel you need.

Each new wheel should have the sameload-carrying capacity, diameter, width, offsetand be mounted the same way as the oneit replaces.

If you need to replace any of your wheels, wheelbolts, or wheel nuts, replace them only withnew GM original equipment parts. This way, youwill be sure to have the right wheel, wheelbolts, and wheel nuts for your vehicle.

{CAUTION:

Using the wrong replacement wheels,wheel bolts, or wheel nuts on your vehiclecan be dangerous. It could affect thebraking and handling of your vehicle,make your tires lose air and make youlose control. You could have a collision inwhich you or others could be injured.Always use the correct wheel, wheel bolts,and wheel nuts for replacement.

Notice: The wrong wheel can also causeproblems with bearing life, brake cooling,speedometer or odometer calibration,headlamp aim, bumper height, vehicle groundclearance, and tire or tire chain clearanceto the body and chassis.

See Changing a Flat Tire on page 343 for moreinformation.

340

Used Replacement Wheels

{CAUTION:

Putting a used wheel on your vehicle isdangerous. You cannot know how it hasbeen used or how far it has been driven. Itcould fail suddenly and cause a crash. Ifyou have to replace a wheel, use a newGM original equipment wheel.

Tire Chains

Notice: Use tire chains only where legal andonly when you must. Use only SAE Class“S” type chains that are the proper size foryour tires. Install them on the front tiresand tighten them as tightly as possible withthe ends securely fastened. Drive slowlyand follow the chain manufacturer’sinstructions. If you can hear the chainscontacting your vehicle, stop and retightenthem. If the contact continues, slow down untilit stops. Driving too fast or spinning thewheels with chains on will damage yourvehicle.

341

If a Tire Goes FlatIt is unusual for a tire to blowout while you aredriving, especially if you maintain your vehicle’stires properly. If air goes out of a tire, it ismuch more likely to leak out slowly. But if youshould ever have a blowout, here are a few tipsabout what to expect and what to do:

If a front tire fails, the flat tire will create a dragthat pulls the vehicle toward that side. Take yourfoot off the accelerator pedal and grip thesteering wheel firmly. Steer to maintain laneposition, and then gently brake to a stop well outof the traffic lane.

A rear blowout, particularly on a curve, acts muchlike a skid and may require the same correctionyou would use in a skid. In any rear blowoutremove your foot from the accelerator pedal. Getthe vehicle under control by steering the wayyou want the vehicle to go. It may be very bumpyand noisy, but you can still steer. Gently braketo a stop, well off the road if possible.

{CAUTION:

Lifting a vehicle and getting under it to domaintenance or repairs is dangerouswithout the appropriate safety equipmentand training. The jack provided with yourvehicle is designed only for changing aflat tire. If it is used for anything else, youor others could be badly injured or killedif the vehicle slips off the jack. Use thejack provided with your vehicle only forchanging a flat tire.

If a tire goes flat, the next part shows how to usethe jacking equipment to change a flat tire safely.

342

Changing a Flat TireIf a tire goes flat, avoid further tire and wheeldamage by driving slowly to a level place. Turn onyour hazard warning flashers.

{CAUTION:

Changing a tire can be dangerous. Thevehicle can slip off the jack and roll overor fall on you or other people. You andthey could be badly injured or even killed.Find a level place to change your tire. Tohelp prevent the vehicle from moving:

1. Set the parking brake firmly.2. Put an automatic transaxle shift lever

in PARK (P), or shift a manualtransaxle to FIRST (1) or REVERSE (R).

3. Turn off the engine and do not restartwhile the vehicle is raised.

4. Do not allow passengers to remain inthe vehicle.



To be even more certain the vehicle willnot move, you should put blocks at thefront and rear of the tire farthest awayfrom the one being changed. That wouldbe the tire on the other side, at theopposite end of the vehicle.

When you have a flat tire, use the followingexample as a guide to assist you in the placementof wheel blocks.

The following information will tell you how to usethe jack and change a tire.

343

Removing the Spare Tire and ToolsThe jack, wheel wrench, jack handle and sparetire are stowed in the rear of the vehicle,underneath the floor of the cargo area. To removethe spare tire and tools do the following:

1. Turn the two lockknobs on the floor ofthe cargo area toUNLOCK.

2. Lift up the cargo area floor panel, remove thehook attached to the bottom side of the paneland hook it over the weatherstripping.

Notice: If you do not put the hook in the properlocation, you could damage your vehicle.Always put the hook in the proper location inorder to avoid damaging the vehicle.

3. Remove the jack from the tray on the rightside of the compartment and the jack handleand wheel wrench from the top side of thecompartment.

344

4. Remove the center retaining nut and lift upthe plastic tray to expose the compactspare tire.

5. Remove the center bolt from the compactspare tire and pull out the compact sparetire. See Compact Spare Tire on page 354

The tools you will be using include the jack (A),jack handle (B) and wheel wrench (C).

345

Removing the Flat Tire andInstalling the Spare Tire1. Attach the jack handle to the jack.

2. Turn the jack handle clockwise to raise the lifthead a little.

3. Using the wheel wrench, loosen all the wheelnuts. Do not remove them yet.

4. Position the jack and raise the jack lift head tofit over the car flange between the twonotches.

346

{CAUTION:

Getting under a vehicle when it is jackedup is dangerous. If the vehicle slips offthe jack you could be badly injured orkilled. Never get under a vehicle when it issupported only by a jack.

{CAUTION:

Raising your vehicle with the jackimproperly positioned can damage thevehicle and even make the vehicle fall. Tohelp avoid personal injury and vehicledamage, be sure to fit the jack lift headinto the proper location before raising thevehicle.

5. Raise the vehicle by turning the jack handleclockwise. Raise the vehicle far enough offthe ground so there is enough room forthe compact spare tire to fit underneath thewheel well.

347

6. Remove all the wheel nuts and take off theflat tire.

7. Install the spare tire.

{CAUTION:

Rust or dirt on the wheel, or on the partsto which it is fastened, can make thewheel nuts become loose after time. Thewheel could come off and cause anaccident. When you change a wheel,remove any rust or dirt from the placeswhere the wheel attaches to the vehicle. Inan emergency, you can use a cloth or apaper towel to do this; but be sure to usea scraper or wire brush later, if needed, toget all the rust or dirt off.

348

8. Remove any rust ordirt from the wheelbolts, mountingsurfaces and sparewheel.

9. Place the compact spare tire on thewheel-mounting surface.

{CAUTION:

Never use oil or grease on studs or nuts.If you do, the nuts might come loose.Your wheel could fall off, causing aserious accident.

349

10. Reinstall the wheel nuts with the rounded endof the nuts toward the wheel. Tighten each nutby hand until the wheel is held against the hub.

11. Lower the vehicle by turning the jack handlecounterclockwise. Lower the jack completely.

{CAUTION:

Incorrect wheel nuts or improperlytightened wheel nuts can cause the wheelto come loose and even come off. Thiscould lead to an accident. Be sure to usethe correct wheel nuts. If you have toreplace them, be sure to get new GMoriginal equipment wheel nuts. Stopsomewhere as soon as you can and havethe nuts tightened with a torque wrench tothe proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 369for wheel nut torque specification.

350

Notice: Improperly tightened wheel nuts canlead to brake pulsation and rotor damage.To avoid expensive brake repairs, evenlytighten the wheel nuts in the proper sequenceand to the proper torque specification. SeeCapacities and Specifications on page 369 forthe wheel nut torque specification.

12. Tighten the wheelnuts firmly in acrisscross sequenceas shown.

Storing a Flat or Spare Tireand Tools

{CAUTION:

Storing a jack, a tire, or other equipmentin the passenger compartment of thevehicle could cause injury. In a suddenstop or collision, loose equipment couldstrike someone. Store all these in theproper place.

The compact spare tire storage area is designedonly for the compact spare tire, the standardtire cannot be stored there.

To store the flat tire, do the following:

1. Remove the center wheel cap before storingthe flat tire, if your vehicle has aluminumwheels.

2. Place the flat tire on the rear cargo area floorpanel with the outer side of the wheelfacing up.

351

3. Use the tire tie-down straps located under thefloor panel to secure the flat tire.

4. Hook the straps (end closest to the buckle) tothe rear, upper tie-down hooks.

5. Pass the straps through the center hole ofthe wheel.

6. Attach the other end of the straps to the rear,lower tie-down hooks.

352

7. Position the tire edge against the rear centerend of the floor panel. Pull the end of thestraps to make sure the tire is secure.

Use the following diagram as a guide for storingthe compact spare tire once you are done using it.

A. JackB. Wheel WrenchC. Bolt

D. Spare TireE. Jack HandleF. Nut

Return the jack (A), jack handle (E), wheelwrench (B) and compact spare tire to the storagearea. When storing the compact spare tire, put it inplace with the inner side of the wheel facing up.

353

Compact Spare TireAlthough the compact spare tire was fully inflatedwhen your vehicle was new, it can lose airafter a time. Check the inflation pressure regularly.It should be 60 psi (420 kPa).

After installing the compact spare on your vehicle,you should stop as soon as possible and makesure your spare tire is correctly inflated. Thecompact spare is made to perform well at speedsup to 50 mph (80 km/h), so you can finish yourtrip and have your full-size tire repaired or replacedwhere you want. Of course, it is best to replaceyour spare with a full-size tire as soon as you can.Your spare will last longer and be in good shapein case you need it again.

Notice: When the compact spare is installed,do not take your vehicle through an automaticcar wash with guide rails. The compactspare can get caught on the rails. That candamage the tire and wheel, and maybeother parts of your vehicle.

Do not use your compact spare on other vehicles.

And do not mix your compact spare tire orwheel with other wheels or tires. They will not fit.Keep your spare tire and its wheel together.

Notice: Tire chains will not fit your compactspare. Using them can damage your vehicleand can damage the chains too. Do not use tirechains on your compact spare.

Appearance Care

Cleaning the Inside of Your VehicleYour vehicle’s interior will continue to look itsbest if it is cleaned often. Although not alwaysvisible, dust and dirt can accumulate on yourupholstery. Dirt can damage carpet, fabric, leather,and plastic surfaces. Regular vacuuming isrecommended to remove particles from yourupholstery. It is important to keep your upholsteryfrom becoming and remaining heavily soiled.Soils should be removed as quickly as possible.Your vehicle’s interior may experience extremes ofheat that could cause stains to set rapidly.

Lighter colored interiors may require more frequentcleaning. Use care because newspapers andgarments that transfer color to your homefurnishings may also transfer color to yourvehicle’s interior.

354

When cleaning your vehicle’s interior, only usecleaners specifically designed for the surfacesbeing cleaned. Permanent damage may resultfrom using cleaners on surfaces for whichthey were not intended. Use glass cleaner only onglass. Remove any accidental over-spray fromother surfaces immediately. To prevent over-spray,apply cleaner directly to the cleaning cloth.

Notice: If you use abrasive cleaners whencleaning glass surfaces on your vehicle, youcould scratch the glass and/or cause damageto the rear window defogger. When cleaningthe glass on your vehicle, use only a soft clothand glass cleaner.Many cleaners contain solvents that may becomeconcentrated in your vehicle’s breathing space.Before using cleaners, read and adhere to all safetyinstructions on the label. While cleaning yourvehicle’s interior, maintain adequate ventilation byopening your vehicle’s doors and windows.Dust may be removed from small buttons andknobs using a small brush with soft bristles.

Your dealer has a product for cleaning yourvehicle’s glass. Should it become necessary, youcan also obtain a product from your dealer toremove odors from your vehicle’s upholstery.

Do not clean your vehicle using the followingcleaners or techniques:

• Never use a knife or any other sharp object toremove a soil from any interior surface.

• Never use a stiff brush. It can cause damageto your vehicle’s interior surfaces.

• Never apply heavy pressure or rubaggressively with a cleaning cloth. Use ofheavy pressure can damage your interior anddoes not improve the effectiveness of soilremoval.

• Use only mild, neutral-pH soaps. Avoidlaundry detergents or dishwashing soaps withdegreasers. Using too much soap will leavea residue that leaves streaks and attracts dirt.For liquid cleaners, about 20 drops pergallon (3.78 L) of water is a good guide.

• Do not heavily saturate your upholstery whilecleaning.

• Damage to your vehicle’s interior may resultfrom the use of many organic solvents suchas naptha, alcohol, etc.

355

Fabric/CarpetUse a vacuum cleaner with a soft brushattachment frequently to remove dust and loosedirt. A canister vacuum with a beater bar inthe nozzle may only be used on floor carpet andcarpeted floor mats. For soils, always try to removethem first with plain water or club soda. Beforecleaning, gently remove as much of the soilas possible using one of the following techniques:

• For liquids: gently blot the remaining soil with apaper towel. Allow the soil to absorb into thepaper towel until no more can be removed.

• For solid dry soils: remove as much as possibleand then vacuum.

To clean, use the following instructions:

1. Saturate a lint-free, clean white cloth withwater or club soda.

2. Wring the cloth to remove excess moisture.

3. Start on the outside edge of the soil and gentlyrub toward the center. Continue cleaning,using a clean area of the cloth each time itbecomes soiled.

4. Continue to gently rub the soiled area until thecleaning cloth remains clean.

5. If the soil is not completely removed, use amild soap solution and repeat the cleaningprocess that was used with plain water.

If any of the soil remains, a commercial fabriccleaner or spot lifter may be necessary. When acommercial upholstery cleaner or spot lifter is to beused, test a small hidden area for colorfastnessfirst. If the locally cleaned area gives anyimpression that a ring formation may result, cleanthe entire surface.

After the cleaning process has been completed, apaper towel can be used to blot excess moisturefrom the fabric or carpet.

LeatherA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a soft cloth dampened with a mild soapsolution can be used. Allow the leather to drynaturally. Do not use heat to dry. Never use steamto clean leather. Never use spot lifters or spotremovers on leather. Many commercial leathercleaners and coatings that are sold to preserveand protect leather may permanently changethe appearance and feel of your leather and are

356

not recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner. Never useshoe polish on your leather.

Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and OtherPlastic SurfacesA soft cloth dampened with water may be used toremove dust. If a more thorough cleaning isnecessary, a clean soft cloth dampened with amild soap solution can be used to gently removedust and dirt. Never use spot lifters or removerson plastic surfaces. Many commercial cleaners andcoatings that are sold to preserve and protectsoft plastic surfaces may permanently change theappearance and feel of your interior and arenot recommended. Do not use silicone orwax-based products, or those containing organicsolvents to clean your vehicle’s interior becausethey can alter the appearance by increasingthe gloss in a non-uniform manner.

Some commercial products may increase gloss onyour instrument panel. The increase in glossmay cause annoying reflections in the windshieldand even make it difficult to see through thewindshield under certain conditions.

Care of Safety BeltsKeep belts clean and dry.

{CAUTION:

Do not bleach or dye safety belts. If youdo, it may severely weaken them. In acrash, they might not be able to provideadequate protection. Clean safety beltsonly with mild soap and lukewarm water.

357

WeatherstripsSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather frequent application maybe required.

Washing Your VehicleThe paint finish on the vehicle provides beauty,depth of color, gloss retention, and durability.

The best way to preserve the vehicle’s finish is tokeep it clean by washing it often with lukewarmor cold water.

Do not wash the vehicle in the direct rays of thesun. Use a car washing soap. Do not usestrong soaps or chemical detergents. Be sure torinse the vehicle well, removing all soapresidue completely. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 362. Do notuse cleaning agents that are petroleum based,or that contain acid or abrasives. All cleaningagents should be flushed promptly and not allowedto dry on the surface, or they could stain.

Dry the finish with a soft, clean chamois or anall-cotton towel to avoid surface scratchesand water spotting.

High pressure car washes may cause water toenter the vehicle.

Cleaning Exterior Lamps/LensesUse only lukewarm or cold water, a soft cloth anda car washing soap to clean exterior lampsand lenses. Follow instructions under WashingYour Vehicle on page 358.

Finish CareOccasional waxing or mild polishing of the vehicleby hand may be necessary to remove residuefrom the paint finish. Approved cleaning productscan be obtained from your dealer. See VehicleCare/Appearance Materials on page 362.

Notice: Machine compounding or aggressivepolishing on a basecoat/clearcoat paintfinish may damage it. Use only non-abrasivewaxes and polishes that are made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish on your vehicle.

358

The vehicle has a basecoat/clearcoat paint finish.The clearcoat gives more depth and gloss tothe colored basecoat. Always use waxesand polishes that are non-abrasive and made for abasecoat/clearcoat paint finish.

Foreign materials such as calcium chloride andother salts, ice melting agents, road oil andtar, tree sap, bird droppings, chemicals fromindustrial chimneys, etc., can damage the vehicle’sfinish if they remain on painted surfaces. Washthe vehicle as soon as possible. If necessary, usenon-abrasive cleaners that are marked safe forpainted surfaces to remove foreign matter.

Exterior painted surfaces are subject to aging,weather, and chemical fallout that can take theirtoll over a period of years. To help keep thepaint finish looking new, keep the vehicle in agarage or covered whenever possible.

Windshield, Backglass, and WiperBladesIf the windshield is not clear after using thewindshield washer, or if the wiper blade chatterswhen running, wax, sap or other material maybe on the blade or windshield.

Clean the outside of the windshield with afull-strength glass cleaning liquid. The windshieldis clean if beads do not form when you rinse itwith water.

Grime from the windshield will stick to the wiperblades and affect their performance. Cleanthe blade by wiping vigorously with a cloth soakedin full-strength windshield washer solvent. Thenrinse the blade with water.

Check the wiper blades and clean them asnecessary; replace blades that look worn.

Aluminum Wheels

Notice: If you use strong soaps, chemicals,abrasive polishes, cleaners, brushes, orcleaners that contain acid on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels, you could damage thesurface of the wheel(s). The repairs wouldnot be covered by your warranty. Useonly GM-approved cleaners on aluminum orchrome-plated wheels.

Keep the wheels clean using a soft clean clothwith mild soap and water. Rinse with clean water.After rinsing thoroughly, dry with a soft cleantowel. A wax may then be applied.

359

Notice: Using chrome polish on aluminumwheels could damage the wheels. The repairswould not be covered by your warranty.Use chrome polish on chrome wheels only.

The surface of these wheels is similar to thepainted surface of the vehicle. Do not use strongsoaps, chemicals, abrasive polishes, abrasivecleaners, cleaners with acid, or abrasive cleaningbrushes on them because the surface couldbe damaged. Do not use chrome polish onaluminum wheels.

Notice: If you drive your vehicle through anautomatic car wash that has silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes, you could damagethe aluminum or chrome-plated wheels. Therepairs would not be covered by your warranty.Never drive a vehicle equipped with aluminumor chrome-plated wheels through anautomatic car wash that uses silicone carbidetire cleaning brushes.

Do not take the vehicle through an automatic carwash that has silicone carbide tire cleaningbrushes. These brushes can also damage thesurface of these wheels.

TiresTo clean the tires, use a stiff brush with tirecleaner.

Notice: Using petroleum-based tire dressingproducts on your vehicle may damage thepaint finish and/or tires. When applying a tiredressing, always wipe off any oversprayfrom all painted surfaces on your vehicle.

Sheet Metal DamageIf the vehicle is damaged and requires sheet metalrepair or replacement, make sure the bodyrepair shop applies anti-corrosion material to partsrepaired or replaced to restore corrosionprotection.

Original manufacturer replacement parts willprovide the corrosion protection while maintainingthe warranty.

360

Finish DamageAny stone chips, fractures or deep scratches inthe finish should be repaired right away. Baremetal will corrode quickly and may develop intomajor repair expense.

Minor chips and scratches can be repaired withtouch-up materials available from your dealer.Larger areas of finish damage can be corrected inyour dealer’s body and paint shop.

Underbody MaintenanceChemicals used for ice and snow removal anddust control can collect on the underbody. If theseare not removed, corrosion and rust can developon the underbody parts such as fuel lines,frame, floor pan, and exhaust system even thoughthey have corrosion protection.

At least every spring, flush these materials fromthe underbody with plain water. Clean anyareas where mud and debris can collect. Dirtpacked in close areas of the frame shouldbe loosened before being flushed. Your dealer oran underbody car washing system can do thisfor you.

Chemical Paint SpottingSome weather and atmospheric conditions cancreate a chemical fallout. Airborne pollutants canfall upon and attack painted surfaces on thevehicle. This damage can take two forms: blotchy,ring-shaped discolorations, and small, irregulardark spots etched into the paint surface.

Although no defect in the paint job causes this, GMwill repair, at no charge to the owner, the surfacesof new vehicles damaged by this fallout conditionwithin 12 months or 12,000 miles (20 000 km) ofpurchase, whichever occurs first.

361

Vehicle Care/Appearance MaterialsDescription Usage

Polishing ClothWax-Treated

Interior and exteriorpolishing cloth.

Tar and RoadOil Remover

Removes tar, road oil andasphalt.

Chrome Cleanerand Polish

Use on chrome orstainless steel.

White SidewallTire Cleaner

Removes soil and blackmarks from whitewalls.

Vinyl Cleaner Cleans vinyl.

Glass Cleaner Removes dirt, grime,smoke and fingerprints.

Chrome and WireWheel Cleaner

Removes dirt and grimefrom chrome wheels andwire wheel covers.

Finish Enhancer

Removes dust,fingerprints, and surfacecontaminants. Spray onwipe off.

Description Usage

Swirl Remover PolishRemoves swirl marks, finescratches and other lightsurface contamination.

Cleaner Wax Removes light scratchesand protects finish.

Foaming Tire ShineLow Gloss

Cleans, shines andprotects in one easy step,no wiping necessary.

Wash Wax Concentrate

Medium foamingshampoo. Cleans andlightly waxes.Biodegradable andphosphate free.

Spot Lifter

Quickly and easilyremoves spots and stainsfrom carpets, vinyl andcloth upholstery.

Odor EliminatorOdorless spray odoreliminator used on fabrics,vinyl, leather and carpet.

362

Vehicle Identification

Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

This is the legal identifier for your vehicle. Itappears on a plate in the front corner of theinstrument panel, on the driver side. You can seeit if you look through the windshield from outsideyour vehicle. The VIN also appears on the VehicleCertification and Service Parts labels and thecertificates of title and registration.

Engine IdentificationThe eighth character in the VIN is the enginecode. This code helps you identify your vehicle’sengine, specifications, and replacement parts.

Service Parts Identification LabelThis label is on the inside of the glove box.It is very helpful if you ever need to order parts.The label has the following information:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN)

• Model designation

• Paint information

• Production options and special equipment

Do not remove this label from the vehicle.

363

Electrical System

Add-On Electrical Equipment

Notice: Do not add anything electrical to yourvehicle unless you check with your dealerfirst. Some electrical equipment can damageyour vehicle and the damage would notbe covered by your warranty. Some add-onelectrical equipment can keep othercomponents from working as they should.

Add-on equipment can drain your vehicle’s battery,even if your vehicle is not operating.

Your vehicle has an airbag system. Beforeattempting to add anything electrical to yourvehicle, see Servicing Your Airbag-EquippedVehicle on page 80.

Headlamp WiringThe headlamp wiring is protected by a circuitbreaker. An electrical overload will causethe lamps to go on and off, or in some cases toremain off. If this happens, have your headlampwiring checked right away.

Windshield Wiper FusesThe windshield wiper motor is protected by acircuit breaker and a fuse. If the motor overheatsdue to heavy snow or ice, the wiper will stopuntil the motor cools. If the overload is caused bysome electrical problem, and not snow or ice,be sure to get it fixed.

Power Windows and Other PowerOptionsCircuit breakers protect the power windows andother power accessories. When the current load istoo heavy, the circuit breaker opens and closes,protecting the circuit until the problem is fixedor goes away.

364

Fuses and Circuit BreakersThe wiring circuits in your vehicle are protectedfrom short circuits by fuses, circuit breakersand fusible thermal links in the wiring itself. Thisgreatly reduces the chance of fires caused byelectrical problems.

Look at the silver-colored band inside the fuse.If the band is broken or melted, replace the fuse.Be sure you replace a bad fuse with a newone of the correct size.

If you ever have a problem on the road anddon’t have a spare fuse, you can borrow one.Just pick some feature of your vehicle that youcan get along without – like the radio or airconditioner – and use its fuse, if it is of the valueyou need. Replace it as soon as you can.

Before replacing a fuse, turn every electricalswitch off.

Instrument Panel Fuse BlockThe fuse block is located underneath theinstrument panel on the driver’s side of the vehicle.

Fuses Usage

TAILFront Parking Lamps, Taillamps,License Plate Lamps, InstrumentPanel Lights, Engine Control System

OBD On-Board Diagnostic System

365

Fuses UsageEmpty Not UsedP/W Power Windows

WIPER Windshield WipersAM2 Charging System, Air Bag System,

Starter System, Engine Control

STOPStop Lamps, CHMSL, EngineControl System, Anti-lock Brakes,Cruise Control

DOOR Power Door Locks, Liftglass LockAM1 Cigarette Lighter, Gauge, ECU-IG,

Wiper, Rear Wiper, Washer FusesEmpty Not Used

ECU-IG

Cruise Control, Anti-lock Brakes,Theft Deterrent System, AutomaticTransaxle Control System, ElectricCooling Fan

RR WIPER Rear Window Wiper, RearWindow Defogger

A/C Air Conditioning

Fuses UsageINV Power Outlets

P/POINT Power OutletsECU-B Daytime Running Lamps

CIG

Cigarette Lighter, Power RearviewMirrors, Power Outlets, AudioSystem, Automatic TransaxleControl System

GAUGE

Gauges and Meters, Back-UpLamps, Charging System, PowerDoor Locks, Power Windows,Sunroof, Air Conditioning,Cruise Control

WASHER Windshield WashersM-HTR/DEF

1–UP Engine Control System

HTR Air Conditioning System

DEF Rear Window Defogger,M-HTR/DEF 1–UP Fuse

POWER Power Windows, Electric Moon Roof

366

Engine Compartment Fuse BlockThis engine compartment fuse block is located inthe engine compartment on the driver’s side ofthe vehicle near the air cleaner. See EngineCompartment Overview on page 282 for moreinformation on location.

Fuses UsageEmpty Not Used

SPARE Spare FuseSPARE Spare FuseSPARE Spare FuseETCS Electronic Throttle Control System

Fuses Usage

ABS NO. 2 Anti-lock Brake System(Without Stability Control System)

RDI FAN Electric Cooling Fan

ABS NO. 1 Anti-lock Brake System(With Stability Control System)

FOG Front Fog Lamps

EFI2Multiport Fuel Injection System/Sequential Multiport Fuel InjectionSystem, Emission Control System

EFI3Multiport Fuel Injection System/Sequential Multiport Fuel InjectionSystem, Emission Control System

HEAD MAIN Right Headlamp, Left HeadlampFuses

ALT-S Charging SystemEFI Electronic Fuel Injection System

HAZARD Turn Signal Lamps, EmergencyFlasher

HORN Horn

DOME

Interior Lights, Gauges and Meters,Audio System, Remote KeylessEntry System, Navigation System(If Equipped)

MAIN Starter System, AM2 FuseAMP Audio System

367

Fuses UsageMAYDAY OnStar® System

ALT

ABS NO.1, ABS NO.2, RDI FAN,FOG, Heater, AM1, POWER,DOOR, ECU-B, TAIL, STOP,P/POINT, INV, OBD Fuses,Charging System

HEAD RH Right-hand Headlamp, HeadlampHigh Beam Indicator Lamp

HEAD LH Left-hand Headlamp

Relays UsageM/G M/G

HEAD HeadlampsDIMMER Headlamp DimmerHORN Horn

FAN NO. 2 Cooling Fan SystemFAN NO. 1 Cooling Fan System

EFI Electronic Fuel Injection SystemFOG Fog Lamps

368

Capacities and SpecificationsThe following approximate capacities are given in English and metric conversions.

ApplicationCapacities

English Metric

Air Conditioning Refrigerant R134a

For the air conditioning system refrigerant chargeamount, see the refrigerant caution label located

under the hood. See your dealer for moreinformation.

Cooling System 6.9 qt 6.5 LEngine Oil with Filter 4.4 qt 4.2 LFuel Tank 13.2 gal 50.0 LTransaxle Fluid

Automatic Transaxle 3.2 qt 3.0 LManual Transaxle 2.0 qt 1.9 L

Wheel Nut Torque 76 lb ft 103 YAll capacities are approximate. When adding, be sure to fill to the approximate level, as recommended in thismanual. See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants on page 394.

Engine SpecificationsEngine VIN Code Transaxle Spark Plug Gap

1.8L L4 8 Automatic and Manual 0.043 inches (1.1 mm)

369

Normal Maintenance Replacement PartsReplacement parts identified below by name, part number, or specification can be obtained from your GMdealer.

Part GM Part Numbers Other Part NumbersBattery 19001602 35–6YREngine Air Cleaner/Filter 88969107 A2036CEngine Oil Filter 88971573 PF1233Passenger Compartment Air Filter 88970273 CF134PCV Valve 88974190 —Spark Plugs* 94859446 SK16R11†, IFR5A11††*Your engine is fitted with iridium-tipped spark plugs. Use only iridium-tipped spark plugs for better engineperformance.† DENSO†† NGK

370

Engine Drive Belt Routing

371

✍ NOTES

372

Maintenance Schedule ................................ 374Introduction ............................................... 374Maintenance Requirements ........................ 374Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 374How This Section is Organized ................. 374Part A: Scheduled Maintenance

Services ................................................. 376Using the Maintenance Schedule ............... 376Scheduled Maintenance ............................. 377Part B: Owner Checks and Services ......... 386At Each Fuel Fill ....................................... 386At Least Once a Month ............................. 386At Least Twice a Year .............................. 387

At Least Once a Year ............................... 388Part C: Periodic Maintenance

Inspections ............................................. 392Steering, Suspension and Front Drive

Axle Boot and Seal Inspection ............... 392Exhaust System Inspection ........................ 392Fuel System Inspection ............................. 392Engine Cooling System Inspection ............. 393Throttle System Inspection ........................ 393Brake System Inspection ........................... 393Part D: Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants .............................................. 394Part E: Maintenance Record ...................... 396

Section 6 Maintenance Schedule

373

Maintenance Schedule

IntroductionImportant: Keep engine oil at the proper leveland change as recommended.

Have you purchased the GM Protection Plan? ThePlan supplements your new vehicle warranties.See your Warranty and Owner Assistance bookletor your dealer for details.

Maintenance RequirementsMaintenance intervals, checks, inspections andrecommended fluids and lubricants as prescribedin this manual are necessary to keep yourvehicle in good working condition. Any damagecaused by failure to follow scheduled maintenancemay not be covered by warranty.

Your Vehicle and the EnvironmentProper vehicle maintenance not only helps to keepyour vehicle in good working condition, but alsohelps the environment. Improper vehiclemaintenance can even affect the quality of the airwe breathe. Improper fluid levels or the wrongtire inflation can increase the level of emissionsfrom your vehicle. To help protect our environment,and to keep your vehicle in good condition, besure to maintain your vehicle properly.

How This Section is OrganizedThis maintenance schedule is divided intofive parts:

“Part A: Scheduled Maintenance Services”explains what to have done and how often. Someof these services can be complex, so unlessyou are technically qualified and have thenecessary equipment, you should let yourGM dealer’s service department do these jobs.

Your GM dealer has GM-trained and supportedservice people that will perform the work usinggenuine GM parts.

374

{CAUTION:

Performing maintenance work on avehicle can be dangerous. In trying to dosome jobs, you can be seriously injured.Do your own maintenance work only ifyou have the required know-how and theproper tools and equipment for the job. Ifyou have any doubt, have a qualifiedtechnician do the work. See Doing YourOwn Service Work on page 273.

If you want to purchase service information, seeService Publications Ordering Information onpage 417.

“Part B: Owner Checks and Services” tells youwhat should be checked and when. It alsoexplains what you can easily do to help keep yourvehicle in good condition.

“Part C: Periodic Maintenance Inspections”explains important inspections that your dealer’sservice department can perform for you.

“Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricants”lists some recommended products necessary tohelp keep your vehicle properly maintained. Theseproducts, or their equivalents, should be usedwhether you do the work yourself or have it done.

“Part E: Maintenance Record” is a place foryou to record and keep track of the maintenanceperformed on your vehicle. Keep yourmaintenance receipts. They may be needed toqualify your vehicle for warranty repairs.

375

Part A: Scheduled MaintenanceServicesIn this part are scheduled maintenance serviceswhich are to be performed at the mileage intervalsspecified.

Using the Maintenance ScheduleWe at General Motors want to keep your vehiclein good working condition. But we do not knowexactly how you will drive it. You may drive shortdistances only a few times a week. Or youmay drive long distances all the time in very hot,dusty weather. You may use your vehicle inmaking deliveries. Or you may drive it to work, todo errands, or in many other ways.

Because of the different ways people use theirvehicles, maintenance needs may vary. You mayneed more frequent checks and replacements.So please read the following and note howyou drive. If you have questions on how to keepyour vehicle in good condition, see your dealer.

This part tells you the maintenance services youshould have done and when to schedule them.

When you go to your dealer for your serviceneeds, you will know that GM-trained andsupported service people will perform the workusing genuine GM parts.

The proper fluids and lubricants to use are listedin Part D. Make sure whoever services yourvehicle uses these. All parts should be replacedand all necessary repairs done before you oranyone else drives the vehicle.

This schedule is for vehicles that:

• carry passengers and cargo withinrecommended limits. You will find these onthe Tire and Loading Information label.See Loading Your Vehicle on page 253.

• are driven on reasonable road surfaces withinlegal driving limits.

• use the recommended fuel. See GasolineOctane on page 274.

376

Scheduled MaintenanceThe services shown in this schedule up to120,000 miles (192 000 km) should be repeatedafter 120,000 miles (192 000 km) at the sameintervals for the life of this vehicle.

See Part B: Owner Checks and Services onpage 386, Part C: Periodic MaintenanceInspections on page 392, and Part D:Recommended Fluids and Lubricants onpage 394.

Footnotes† The U.S. Environmental Protection Agency orthe California Air Resources Board has determinedthat the failure to perform this maintenance itemwill not nullify the emissions warranty or limit recallliability prior to the completion of the vehicle’suseful life. We, however, urge that allrecommended maintenance services be performedat the indicated intervals and the maintenancebe recorded.

+ A good time to check your brakes is during tirerotation. See Brake System Inspection onpage 393.

5,000 Miles (8 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,

whichever occurs first). An Emission ControlService.

❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotation onpage 333 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)

❑ Inspect engine air cleaner filter if you are drivingin dusty conditions. Replace filter if necessary.





377





❑ Inspect passenger compartment air filter.












❑ Replace engine air cleaner filter (or every24 months, whichever occurs first). See EngineAir Cleaner/Filter on page 288 for moreinformation.

378

❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket, and lines for

damage or leaks (or every 24 months, whicheveroccurs first). Replace parts as needed. AnEmission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every30,000 miles (48 000 km) only if your vehicleis used to tow a trailer.













❑ Inspect passenger compartment air filter.

379











❑ Rotate tires. See Tire Inspection and Rotationon page 333 for proper rotation pattern andadditional information. (See footnote +.)


❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every

48 months, whichever occurs first). Visuallyinspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks,or obvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.An Emission Control Service.

❑ Inspect for tappet noise and engine vibration.Adjust valve clearance to factory specificationsif necessary (or every 48 months, whicheveroccurs first). An Emission Control Service.

380

❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket, and linesfor damage or leaks (or every 24 months,whichever occurs first). Replace partsas needed. An Emission Control Service.(See footnote †.)

❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every30,000 miles (48 000 km) only if your vehicleis used to tow a trailer.

❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid every60,000 miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is mainlydriven under one or more of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F(32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or

delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid does not require changing.See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 394 for the proper fluid to use.

65,000 Miles 104 000 km)❑ Change engine oil and filter (or every 3 months,








381





❑ Inspect passenger compartment air filter.❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts

(or 12 months since last inspection).An Emission Control Service.













❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.

382

❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts(or 12 months since last inspection).An Emission Control Service.

❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket, and lines fordamage or leaks (or every 24 months, whicheveroccurs first). Replace parts as needed. AnEmission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every30,000 miles (48 000 km) only if yourvehicle is used to tow a trailer.













❑ Inspect passenger compartment air filter.❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every

48 months, whichever occurs first). Visuallyinspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, orobvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.An Emission Control Service.

383













❑ Replace passenger compartment air filter.❑ Inspect engine accessory drive belts (or every

48 months, whichever occurs first). Visuallyinspect belt for fraying, excessive cracks, orobvious damage. Replace belt if necessary.An Emission Control Service.

❑ Replace spark plugs. An Emission ControlService.

384

❑ Inspect for tappet noise and engine vibration.Adjust valve clearance to factory specifications ifnecessary (or every 48 months, whicheveroccurs first). An Emission Control Service.

❑ Inspect fuel tank, cap, cap gasket, and lines fordamage or leaks (or every 24 months, whicheveroccurs first). Replace parts as needed. AnEmission Control Service. (See footnote †.)

❑ Change manual transaxle fluid every30,000 miles (48 000 km) only if your vehicle isused to tow a trailer.

❑ Change automatic transaxle fluid every60,000 miles (96 000 km) if the vehicle is mainlydriven under one or more of these conditions:

− In heavy city traffic where the outsidetemperature regularly reaches 90°F(32°C) or higher.

− In hilly or mountainous terrain.

− When doing frequent trailer towing.− Uses such as found in taxi, police, or

delivery service.

If you do not use your vehicle under any of theseconditions, the fluid does not require changing.See Part D: Recommended Fluids and Lubricantson page 394 for the proper fluid to use.

150,000 Miles (240 000 km)❑ Drain, flush, and refill the cooling system

(or every 5 years, whichever occurs first). Thisservice can be complex; you should haveyour dealer perform this service. See EngineCoolant on page 294 for what to use. Inspecthoses. Clean radiator, condenser, pressure cap,and neck. Pressure test cooling system andpressure cap. An Emission Control Service.

385

Part B: Owner Checks and ServicesListed in this part are owner checks and serviceswhich should be performed at the intervalsspecified to help ensure the safety, dependabilityand emission control performance of yourvehicle.

Be sure any necessary repairs are completed atonce. Whenever any fluids or lubricants are addedto your vehicle, make sure they are the properones, as shown in Part D.

At Each Fuel FillIt is important for you or a service station attendantto perform these underhood checks at each fuel fill.

Engine Oil Level CheckCheck the engine oil level and add the proper oilif necessary. See Engine Oil on page 284 forfurther details.

Engine Coolant Level CheckCheck the engine coolant level and add the propercoolant mixture if necessary. See Engine Coolanton page 294 for further details.

Windshield Washer Fluid Level CheckCheck the windshield washer fluid level in thewindshield washer fluid reservoir and addthe proper fluid if necessary. See WindshieldWasher Fluid on page 305 for further details.

Hood Latch Operation CheckPull the primary hood latch release handle insidethe vehicle. The secondary latch should keepthe hood from opening all the way when theprimary latch is released. Make sure the hoodcloses firmly. See Hood Release on page 280 forfurther details.

At Least Once a Month

Tire Inflation CheckVisually inspect the tires and make sure the tiresare inflated to the correct pressures. Do notforget to check the spare tire. See Inflation - TirePressure on page 329.

386

At Least Twice a Year

Restraint System CheckMake sure the safety belt reminder light and allyour belts, buckles, latch plates, retractorsand anchorages are working properly. Look forany other loose or damaged safety belt systemparts. If you see anything that might keep a safetybelt system from doing its job, have it repaired.Have any torn or frayed safety belts replaced.

Also look for any opened or broken airbagcoverings, and have them repaired or replaced.(The airbag system does not need regularmaintenance.)

Wiper Blade CheckInspect wiper blades for wear or cracking. Replaceblade inserts that appear worn or damaged orthat streak or miss areas of the windshield. Alsosee Windshield, Backglass, and Wiper Bladeson page 359.

Weatherstrip LubricationSilicone grease on weatherstrips will make themlast longer, seal better, and not stick or squeak.Apply silicone grease with a clean cloth. Duringvery cold, damp weather more frequent applicationmay be required. See Part D: RecommendedFluids and Lubricants on page 394.

Fluid Level CheckCheck the power steering pump, rear axle,transfer case, and automatic or manual transaxlefluid levels and add as needed. See PowerSteering Fluid on page 304 and AutomaticTransaxle Fluid on page 290 or Manual TransaxleFluid on page 292. Check for leaks. A fluid lossin these systems could indicate a problem.Have the system inspected and repaired at once.

387

At Least Once a Year

Key Lock Cylinders ServiceLubricate the key lock cylinders with the lubricantspecified in Part D.

Seat Operation CheckMake sure the head restraints stay in position andall seat latches lock. Check that the reclinerholds by pushing and pulling the seatback while itis reclined.

Body Lubrication ServiceLubricate all hood latch assembly, secondarylatch, pivots, spring anchor, release pawl, hoodand body door hinges, rear compartment, and anyfolding seat hardware. Part D tells you what touse. More frequent lubrication may be requiredwhen exposed to a corrosive environment.

Starter Switch Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle.

2. Firmly apply both the parking brake and theregular brake. See Parking Brake onpage 114.Do not use the accelerator pedal, and beready to turn off the engine immediately ifit starts.

388

3. On automatic transaxle vehicles, try to startthe engine in each gear. The vehicle shouldstart only in PARK (P) or NEUTRAL (N). If thevehicle starts in any other position, contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.On manual transaxle vehicles, put theshift lever in NEUTRAL (N), push the clutchpedal down halfway, and try to start theengine. The vehicle should start only whenthe clutch pedal is pushed down all the way tothe floor. If the vehicle starts when theclutch pedal is not pushed all the way down,contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer forservice.

Automatic Transaxle Shift Lock ControlSystem Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this inspection, thevehicle could move suddenly. If thevehicle moves, you or others could beinjured.

1. Before you start, be sure you have enoughroom around the vehicle. It should be parkedon a level surface.

2. Firmly apply the parking brake. See ParkingBrake on page 114.Be ready to apply the regular brakeimmediately if the vehicle begins to move.

3. With the engine off, turn the ignition to ON,but do not start the engine. Without applyingthe regular brake, try to move the shiftlever out of PARK (P) with normal effort. If theshift lever moves out of PARK (P), contactyour GM Goodwrench® dealer for service.

389

Ignition Transaxle Lock CheckWhile parked, and with the parking brake set, tryto turn the ignition to LOCK in each shift leverposition.

• With an automatic transaxle, the ignitionshould turn to LOCK only when the shift leveris in PARK (P).

• With a manual transaxle, the ignition shouldturn to LOCK only if you push the ignitionkey in farther, while turning it toward LOCK.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Parking Brake and Automatic TransaxlePark (P) Mechanism Check

{CAUTION:

When you are doing this check, yourvehicle could begin to move. You orothers could be injured and propertycould be damaged. Make sure there isroom in front of your vehicle in case itbegins to roll. Be ready to apply theregular brake at once should the vehiclebegin to move.

390

Park on a fairly steep hill, with the vehicle facingdownhill. Keeping your foot on the regularbrake, set the parking brake.

• To check the parking brake’s holding ability:With the engine running and transaxle inNEUTRAL (N), slowly remove foot pressurefrom the regular brake pedal. Do this until thevehicle is held by the parking brake only.

• To check the PARK (P) mechanism’s holdingability: With the engine running, shift toPARK (P). Then release the parking brakefollowed by the regular brake.

Contact your GM Goodwrench® dealer if service isrequired.

Underbody Flushing ServiceAt least every spring, use plain water to flush anycorrosive materials from the underbody. Takecare to clean thoroughly any areas where mud andother debris can collect.

391

Part C: Periodic MaintenanceInspectionsListed in this part are inspections and serviceswhich should be performed at least twice ayear (for instance, each spring and fall). Youshould let your dealer’s service departmentdo these jobs. Make sure any necessary repairsare completed at once.

Proper procedures to perform these services maybe found in a service manual. See ServicePublications Ordering Information on page 417.

Steering, Suspension and FrontDrive Axle Boot and Seal InspectionInspect the front and rear suspension andsteering system for damaged, loose or missingparts, signs of wear or lack of lubrication. Inspectthe power steering lines and hoses for properhook-up, binding, leaks, cracks, chafing, etc. Cleanand then inspect the drive axle boot seals fordamage, tears or leakage. Replace seals ifnecessary.

Exhaust System InspectionInspect the complete exhaust system. Inspect thebody near the exhaust system. Look for broken,damaged, missing or out-of-position parts aswell as open seams, holes, loose connections orother conditions which could cause a heatbuild-up in the floor pan or could let exhaust fumesinto the vehicle. See Engine Exhaust onpage 119.

Fuel System InspectionInspect the complete fuel system for damageor leaks.

392

Engine Cooling System InspectionInspect the hoses and have them replaced ifthey are cracked, swollen or deteriorated. Inspectall pipes, fittings and clamps; replace as needed.Clean the outside of the radiator and airconditioning condenser. To help ensure properoperation, a pressure test of the cooling systemand pressure cap is recommended at leastonce a year.

Throttle System InspectionInspect the throttle system for interference orbinding, and for damaged or missing parts.Replace parts as needed. Replace anycomponents that have high effort or excessivewear. Do not lubricate accelerator and cruisecontrol cables.

Brake System InspectionInspect the complete system. Inspect brake linesand hoses for proper hook-up, binding, leaks,cracks, chafing, etc. Inspect disc brake pads forwear and rotors for surface condition. Also inspectdrum brake linings for wear and cracks. Inspectother brake parts, including drums, wheelcylinders, calipers, parking brake, etc. Checkparking brake adjustment. You may need to haveyour brakes inspected more often if your drivinghabits or conditions result in frequent braking.

393

Part D: Recommended Fluids andLubricantsFluids and lubricants identified below by name,part number, or specification can be obtained fromyour dealer.

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Engine Oil

Engine oil which meets GMStandard GM6094M and displaysthe American Petroleum InstituteCertified for Gasoline Enginesstarburst symbol. GM Goodwrench®

oil meets all the requirements foryour vehicle. To determine theproper viscosity for your vehicle’sengine, see Engine Oil on page 284.

Engine Coolant

50/50 mixture of clean, drinkablewater and use only DEX-COOL®

Coolant. See Engine Coolant onpage 294.

HydraulicBrake/ClutchSystem

Delco® Supreme 11 Brake Fluid orequivalent DOT-3 brake fluid.

Usage Fluid/LubricantWindshieldWasher Solvent GM Optikleen® Washer Solvent.

Power SteeringSystem

DEXRON®-VI AutomaticTransmission Fluid.

ManualTransaxle

GM Goodwrench® SyntheticManual Transmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 12346190,in Canada 10953477 — 1 quart) orSAE 75W-90 GL-5 gear oil.

AutomaticTransaxle

Use only T-IV AutomaticTransmission Fluid(GM Part No. U.S. 88900925, inCanada 22689186). See AutomaticTransaxle Fluid on page 290.

Key LockCylinders

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

ManualTransaxle ShiftLinkage

Chassis Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 12377985,in Canada 88901242) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

394

Usage Fluid/Lubricant

Clutch LinkagePivot Points


Floor ShiftLinkage

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2Category LB or GC-LB.

ChassisLubrication


Usage Fluid/LubricantHood LatchAssembly,SecondaryLatch,Pivots, SpringAnchor, andRelease Pawl

Lubriplate Lubricant Aerosol(GM Part No. U.S. 12346293,in Canada 992723) or lubricantmeeting requirements of NLGI #2,Category LB or GC-LB.

Hood andDoor Hinges

Multi-Purpose Lubricant, Superlube(GM Part No. U.S. 12346241,in Canada 10953474).

WeatherstripConditioning

Weatherstrip Lubricant(GM Part No. U.S. 3634770,in Canada 10953518) orDielectric Silicone Grease(GM Part No. U.S. 12345579,in Canada 992887).

395

Part E: Maintenance RecordAfter the scheduled services are performed, record the date, odometer reading, and who performed theservice and any additional information from “Owner Checks and Services” or “Periodic Maintenance”on the following record pages. Also, you should retain all maintenance receipts.

Maintenance Record

Date OdometerReading Serviced By Maintenance Record

396

Maintenance Record (cont’d)


397

Maintenance Record (cont’d)


398

Customer Assistance and Information ....... 400Customer Satisfaction Procedure ............... 400Online Owner Center ................................. 403Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users ........................................... 404Customer Assistance Offices ..................... 404GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ........ 405Roadside Assistance Program ................... 406Courtesy Transportation ............................. 409Vehicle Data Collection and Event

Data Recorders ...................................... 411Collision Damage Repair ........................... 412

Reporting Safety Defects ............................ 416Reporting Safety Defects to the United

States Government ................................ 416Reporting Safety Defects to the Canadian

Government ........................................... 416Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ...................................... 417Service Publications Ordering

Information ............................................. 417

Section 7 Customer Assistance Information

399

Customer Assistance andInformation

Customer Satisfaction ProcedureYour satisfaction and goodwill are importantto your dealer and to Pontiac. Normally, anyconcerns with the sales transaction or theoperation of your vehicle will be resolved by yourdealer’s sales or service departments. Sometimes,however, despite the best intentions of allconcerned, misunderstandings can occur. If yourconcern has not been resolved to yoursatisfaction, the following steps should be taken:

STEP ONE: Discuss your concern with a memberof dealership management. Normally, concernscan be quickly resolved at that level. If the matterhas already been reviewed with the sales,service, or parts manager, contact the owner ofthe dealership or the general manager.

STEP TWO: If after contacting a member ofdealership management, it appears your concerncannot be resolved by the dealership withoutfurther help, in the U.S., contact the PontiacCustomer Assistance Center by calling1-800-762-2737. In Canada, contact GeneralMotors of Canada Customer CommunicationCentre in Oshawa by calling 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French).

We encourage you to call the toll-free number inorder to give your inquiry prompt attention. Pleasehave the following information available to givethe Customer Assistance Representative:

• Vehicle Identification Number (VIN). This isavailable from the vehicle registration ortitle, or the plate at the top left of theinstrument panel and visible through thewindshield.

• Dealership name and location.

• Vehicle delivery date and present mileage.

When contacting Pontiac, please remember thatyour concern will likely be resolved at a dealer’sfacility. That is why we suggest you followStep One first if you have a concern.

400

STEP THREE — U.S. Owners: Both GeneralMotors and your dealer are committed to makingsure you are completely satisfied with yournew vehicle. However, if you continue to remainunsatisfied after following the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, you should file with theBBB Auto Line Program to enforce your rights.

The BBB Auto Line Program is an out ofcourt program administered by the Council ofBetter Business Bureaus to settle automotivedisputes regarding vehicle repairs or theinterpretation of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty.Although you may be required to resort to thisinformal dispute resolution program prior to filing acourt action, use of the program is free ofcharge and your case will generally be heardwithin 40 days. If you do not agree with thedecision given in your case, you may reject it andproceed with any other venue for relief availableto you.

You can contact the BBB Auto Line Program usingthe toll-free telephone number or write them at thefollowing address:

BBB Auto Line ProgramCouncil of Better Business Bureaus, Inc.4200 Wilson BoulevardSuite 800Arlington, VA 22203-1838

Telephone: 1-800-955-5100

This program is available in all 50 states and theDistrict of Columbia. Eligibility is limited by vehicleage, mileage and other factors. General Motorsreserves the right to change eligibility limitationsand/or discontinue its participation in this program.

401

STEP THREE — Canadian Owners: In the eventthat you do not feel your concerns have beenaddressed after following the procedure outlined inSteps One and Two, General Motors of CanadaLimited wants you to be aware of its participationin a no-charge Mediation/Arbitration Program.General Motors of Canada Limited has committedto binding arbitration of owner disputes involvingfactory-related vehicle service claims. The programprovides for the review of the facts involved byan impartial third party arbiter, and may include aninformal hearing before the arbiter. The programis designed so that the entire dispute settlementprocess, from the time you file your complaintto the final decision, should be completedin approximately 70 days. We believe our impartialprogram offers advantages over courts in mostjurisdictions because it is informal, quick, and freeof charge.

For further information concerning eligibility inthe Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan(CAMVAP), call toll-free 1-800-207-0685.Alternatively, you can call the General MotorsCustomer Communication Centre, 1-800-263-3777(English), 1-800-263-7854 (French), or write to:

Mediation/Arbitration Programc/o Customer Communication CentreGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedMail Code: CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Your inquiry should be accompanied by yourVehicle Identification Number (VIN).

402

Online Owner Center

Online Owner Center(United States only)The Owner Center is a resource for yourGM ownership needs. Specific vehicle informationcan be found in one place.

The Online Owner Center allows you to:• Get e-mail service reminders.

• Access information about your specificvehicle, including tips and videos andan electronic version of this owner manual.

• Keep track of your vehicle’s service historyand maintenance schedule.

• Find GM dealers for service nationwide.

• Receive special promotions and privilegesonly available to members.

Refer to www.MyGMLink.com on the web forupdated information and to register your vehicle.

My GM Canada (Canada only)My GM Canada is a password-protected sectionof gmcanada.com where you can save informationon GM vehicles, get personalized offers, anduse handy tools and forms with greater ease.

Here are a few of the valuable tools and servicesyou will have access to:

− My Showroom: Find and save information onvehicles and current offers in your area.

− My Dealers/Retailers: Save details such asaddress and phone number for each ofyour preferred GM Dealers or Retailers.

− My Driveway: Receive service reminders andhelpful advice on owning and maintainingyour vehicle.

− My Preferences: Manage your profile,subscribe to E-News and use tools and formswith greater ease.

To sign up to My GM Canada, visit the MyGM Canada section within www.gmcanada.com.

403

Customer Assistance for TextTelephone (TTY) UsersTo assist customers who are deaf, hard ofhearing, or speech-impaired and who use TextTelephones (TTYs), Pontiac has TTY equipmentavailable at its Customer Assistance Center.Any TTY user in the U.S. can communicate withPontiac by dialing: 1-800-833-PONT (7668).(TTY users in Canada can dial 1-800-263-3830.)

Customer Assistance OfficesPontiac encourages customers to call the toll-freenumber for assistance. However, if a customerwishes to write or e-mail Pontiac, the letter shouldbe addressed to:

United States — Customer AssistancePontiac Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

www.Pontiac.com1-800-762-2737 or1-800-833-7668 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE(762-3743)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From Puerto Rico:1-800-496-9992 (English)1-800-496-9993 (Spanish)Fax Number: 313-381-0022

From U.S. Virgin Islands:1-800-496-9994Fax Number: 313-381-0022

404

Canada — Customer AssistanceGeneral Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7www.gmcanada.com1-800-263-3777 (English)1-800-263-7854 (French)1-800-263-3830 (For Text Telephonedevices (TTYs))Roadside Assistance: 1-800-268-6800

Overseas — Customer AssistancePlease contact the local General MotorsBusiness Unit.

Mexico, Central America andCaribbean Islands/Countries(Except Puerto Rico and U.S. VirginIslands) — Customer Assistance

General Motors de Mexico, S. de R.L. de C.V.Customer Assistance CenterPaseo de la Reforma #2740Col. Lomas de BezaresC.P. 11910, Mexico, D.F.01-800-508-0000Long Distance: 011-52-53 29 0 800

GM Mobility ReimbursementProgram

This program, available to qualified applicants,can reimburse you up to $1,000 of the costof eligible aftermarket adaptive equipment requiredfor your vehicle, such as hand controls or awheelchair/scooter lift.

The offer is available for a very limited period oftime from the date of vehicle purchase/lease.For more details, or to determine your vehicle’seligibility, visit gmmobility.com or call the GMMobility Assistance Center at 1-800-323-9935.Text telephone (TTY) users, call 1-800-833-9935.

General Motors of Canada also has a MobilityProgram. Call 1-800-GM-DRIVE (463-7483)for details. TTY users call 1-800-263-3830.

405

Roadside Assistance ProgramIn the U.S., call 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743)

In Canada, call 1-800-268-6800

Service available 24 hours a day, 365 days a year.

As the owner of a new Pontiac vehicle, you areautomatically enrolled in the Pontiac RoadsideAssistance program. This value-added service isintended to provide you with peace of mind as youdrive in the city or travel the open road.

Who is Covered?Roadside Assistance coverage is for the vehicleoperator, regardless of ownership. A person drivingthis vehicle without the consent of the owner isnot eligible for coverage.

The following services are provided in the U.S.during the Bumper-to-Bumper warranty period and,in Canada, during the Base Warranty coverageperiod of the New Vehicle Limited Warranty, up toa maximum coverage of $100.

• Fuel Delivery: Delivery of enough fuel for thecustomer to get to the nearest service station(approximately $5 in the U.S. and 10 litresin Canada). Service to provide diesel may berestricted. For safety reasons, propaneand other alternative fuels will not be providedthrough this service.

• Lock-out Service: To ensure security, thedriver must present the vehicle registrationand personal ID before lock-out serviceis provided. Lock-out service is covered at nocharge if you are unable to gain entry intoyour vehicle. If your vehicle does notstart, Roadside Assistance will arrange tohave your vehicle towed to the nearestauthorized dealership. In the U.S.,replacement keys made at the customer’sexpense will be covered within10 miles (16 km).

406

• Emergency Tow From a Public Roadway orHighway: Tow to the nearest dealership forwarranty service or in the event of avehicle-disabling accident. Winch-outassistance when the vehicle is mired in sand,mud, or snow.

• Flat Tire Change: Installation of your sparetire in good condition is covered at nocharge. The customer is responsible for therepair or replacement of the tire if not coveredby a warrantable failure.

• Jump Start: No-start occurrences whichrequire a battery jump start is covered atno charge.

Additional Services for CanadianCustomers• Trip Routing Service: Upon Request,

Roadside Assistance can send you detailed,computer-personalized maps, highlightingyour choice of either the most direct route orthe most scenic route to your destination,anywhere in North America, along withany helpful travel information we may havepertaining to your trip. To request this service,please call us toll-free at 1-800-268-6800.

We will make every attempt to send yourpersonalized trip routing as quickly aspossible, but it’s best to allow three weeksbefore your planned departure date. Triprouting requests will be limited to six percalendar year.

• Trip Interruption Benefits and Assistance:In the event of a warranty related vehicledisablement, while en route and over250 kilometres from original point of departure,you may qualify for trip interruption expenseassistance. This assistance covers reasonablereimbursement of up to a maximum of$500 (Canadian) for (A) meals (maximum of$50/day), (B) lodging (maximum of $100/night)and (C) alternate ground transportation(maximum of $40/day). This benefit is to assistyou with some of the unplanned expenseyou may incur while waiting for your vehicle tobe repaired.Pre-authorization, original detailed receiptsand a copy of the repair order are required.Once authorization has been given, youradvisor will help you make any necessaryarrangements and explain how to claim for tripinterruption expense assistance.

407

• Alternative Service: There may be times,when Roadside Assistance cannot providetimely assistance, your advisor may authorizeyou to secure local emergency road service,and you will be reimbursed up to $100upon submission of the original receipt toRoadside Assistance.

In many instances, mechanical failures arecovered under Pontiac’s Bumper-to-Bumperwarranty, and the duration of the Base WarrantyCoverage for Canadian customers of the newVehicle Limited Warranty. However, any cost forparts and labor for non-warranty repairs arethe responsibility of the driver.

For prompt and efficient assistance when calling,please provide the following to the RoadsideAssistance Representative:

• Your name, home address, and hometelephone number.

• Telephone number of your location.

• Location of the vehicle.

• Model, year, color, and license plate numberof the vehicle.

• Odometer reading, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), and delivery date of the vehicle.

• Description of the problem.

While we hope you never have the occasion touse our service, it is added security while travelingfor you and your family. Remember, we areonly a phone call away. Pontiac RoadsideAssistance: 1-800-ROADSIDE (762-3743), texttelephone (TTY) users, call 1-888-889-2438,Canadian customers call 1-800-268-6800.

Pontiac and General Motors of Canada Limitedreserve the right to limit services or reimbursementto an owner or driver when, in their sole discretion,the claims become excessive in frequency or typeof occurrence.

Roadside Assistance is not part of or included inthe coverage provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty. Pontiac and General Motors ofCanada Limited reserve the right to make anychanges or discontinue the Roadside Assistanceprogram at any time without notification.

408

Towing and Road Service ExclusionsSpecifically excluded from Roadside Assistancecoverage are towing or services for vehiclesoperated on a non-public roadway or highway,fines, impound towing caused by a violationof local, Municipal, State, Provincial, or Federallaw, and mounting, dismounting or changingof snow tires, chains, or other traction devices.

Courtesy TransportationTo enhance your ownership experience, we andour participating dealers are proud to offerCourtesy Transportation, a customer supportprogram for new vehicles.

For warranty repairs during the Bumper-to-Bumper(U.S.) or Base Warranty Coverage period(Canada), provided by the New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, interim transportation may be availableunder the Courtesy Transportation program.Several courtesy transportation options areavailable to assist in reducing your inconveniencewhen warranty repairs are required.

Courtesy Transportation is not a part of the NewVehicle Limited Warranty and is available onlyat participating dealers. A separate booklet entitled“Warranty and Owner Assistance Information”furnished with each new vehicle provides detailedwarranty coverage information.

Scheduling Service AppointmentsWhen your vehicle requires warranty service,contact your dealer and request an appointment.By scheduling a service appointment andadvising your service consultant of yourtransportation needs, your dealer can helpminimize your inconvenience.

If your vehicle cannot be scheduled into theservice department immediately, keep driving ituntil it can be scheduled for service, unless,of course, the problem is safety-related. If it is,please call your dealership, let them know this, andask for instructions.

If the dealer requests that you simply drop thevehicle off for service, you are urged to do so asearly in the work day as possible to allow forthe same day repair.

409

Transportation OptionsWarranty service can generally be completedwhile you wait. However, if you are unable to wait,GM helps to minimize your inconvenience byproviding several transportation options.Depending on the circumstances, your dealer canoffer you one of the following:

Shuttle ServiceShuttle service is the preferred means of offeringCourtesy Transportation and participatingdealers can provide you with shuttle service to getyou to your destination with minimal interruptionof your daily schedule. This includes one-wayor round trip shuttle service within reasonable timeand distance parameters for the dealer’s area.

Public Transportation or FuelReimbursementIf your vehicle requires overnight warranty repairs,and public transportation is used as ‘shuttleservice,’ the reimbursement is limited to theassociated shuttle allowance and must besupported by original receipts.

In addition, for U.S. customers, should you arrangetransportation through a friend or relative, limitedreimbursement for reasonable fuel expenses maybe available. Claim amounts should reflect actualcosts and be supported by original receipts.

Courtesy Rental VehicleYour dealer may arrange to provide you with acourtesy rental vehicle or reimburse you fora rental vehicle that you obtain if your vehicle iskept for an overnight warranty repair. Rentalreimbursement will be limited and must besupported by original receipts. This requires thatyou sign and complete a rental agreementand meet state/provincial, local, and rental vehicleprovider requirements. Requirements vary andmay include minimum age requirements, insurancecoverage, credit card, etc. You are responsiblefor fuel usage charges and may also beresponsible for taxes, levies, usage fees,excessive mileage, or rental usage beyond thecompletion of the repair.

Generally it is not possible to provide a like-vehicleas a courtesy rental.

410

Additional Program InformationAll program options, such as shuttle service, maynot be available at every dealer. Please contactyour dealer for specific information aboutavailability. All Courtesy Transportationarrangements will be administered by appropriatedealer personnel.

General Motors reserves the right to unilaterallymodify, change or discontinue CourtesyTransportation at any time and to resolve allquestions of claim eligibility pursuant to the termsand conditions described herein at its solediscretion.

Vehicle Data Collection and EventData RecordersYour vehicle, like other modern motor vehicles, hasa number of sophisticated computer systems thatmonitor and control several aspects of the vehicle’sperformance. Your vehicle uses on-board vehiclecomputers to monitor emission control componentsto optimize fuel economy, to monitor conditions forairbag deployment and, if so equipped, to provideanti-lock braking and to help the driver control thevehicle in difficult driving situations.

Some information may be stored during regularoperations to facilitate repair of detectedmalfunctions; other information is stored only in acrash event by computer systems, such as thosecommonly called event data recorders (EDR).

In a crash event, computer systems, such as theAirbag Sensing and Diagnostic Module (SDM) inyour vehicle may record information about safetybelt usage. If your vehicle is equipped withStabiliTrak®, steering performance, including yawrate, steering wheel angle, and lateral acceleration,is also recorded. Unlike the data recorders on manyairplanes, these on-board systems do not recordsounds, such as conversation of vehicle occupants.

To read this information, special equipment isneeded and access to the vehicle or the devicethat stores the data is required. GM will not accessinformation about a crash event or share it withothers other than:

• with the consent of the vehicle owner or, if thevehicle is leased, with the consent of thelessee,

• in response to an official request of police orsimilar government office,

411

• as part of GM’s defense of litigation throughthe discovery process, or

• as required by law.

In addition, once GM collects or receives data,GM may:

• use the data for GM research needs,

• make it available for research whereappropriate confidentiality is to be maintainedand need is shown, or

• share summary data which is not tied to aspecific vehicle with non-GM organizationsfor research purposes.

Others, such as law enforcement, may haveaccess to the special equipment that can read theinformation if they have access to the vehicleor the device that stores the data.

If your vehicle is equipped with OnStar®, pleasecheck the OnStar® subscription service agreementor manual for information on its operations anddata collection.

Collision Damage RepairIf your vehicle is involved in a collision and it isdamaged, have the damage repaired by a qualifiedtechnician using the proper equipment andquality replacement parts. Poorly performedcollision repairs will diminish your vehicle’s resalevalue, and safety performance can becompromised in subsequent collisions.

Collision PartsGenuine GM Collision parts are new parts madewith the same materials and construction methodsas the parts with which your vehicle wasoriginally built. Genuine GM Collision parts areyour best choice to assure that your vehicle’sdesigned appearance, durability, and safety arepreserved. The use of Genuine GM parts can helpmaintain your GM New Vehicle Warranty.

Recycled original equipment parts may also beused for repair. These parts are typically removedfrom vehicles that were total losses in prioraccidents. In most cases, the parts being recycledare from undamaged sections of the vehicle.

412

A recycled original equipment GM part, may be anacceptable choice to maintain your vehicle’soriginally designed appearance and safetyperformance, however, the history of these partsis not known. Such parts are not covered byyour GM New Vehicle Limited Warranty, and anyrelated failures are not covered by that warranty.

Aftermarket collision parts are also available. Theseare made by companies other than GM and maynot have been tested for your vehicle. As a result,these parts may fit poorly, exhibit prematuredurability/corrosion problems, and may not performproperly in subsequent collisions. Aftermarket partsare not covered by your GM New Vehicle LimitedWarranty, and any vehicle failure related to suchparts are not covered by that warranty.

Repair FacilityGM also recommends that you choose a collisionrepair facility that meets your needs before youever need collision repairs. Your GM dealermay have a collision repair center with GM-trainedtechnicians and state of the art equipment, orbe able to recommend a collision repair center thathas GM-trained technicians and comparableequipment.

Insuring Your VehicleProtect your investment in your GM vehicle withcomprehensive and collision insurance coverage.There are significant differences in the qualityof coverage afforded by various insurance policyterms. Many insurance policies provide reducedprotection to your GM vehicle by limitingcompensation for damage repairs by usingaftermarket collision parts. Some insurancecompanies will not specify aftermarket collisionparts. When purchasing insurance, we recommendthat you assure your vehicle will be repairedwith GM original equipment collision parts. If suchinsurance coverage is not available from yourcurrent insurance carrier, consider switchingto another insurance carrier.

If your vehicle is leased, the leasing company mayrequire you to have insurance that assures repairswith Genuine GM Original Equipment Manufacturer(OEM) parts or Genuine Manufacturer replacementparts. Read your lease carefully, as you may becharged at the end of your lease for poor qualityrepairs.

413

If an Accident OccursHere is what to do if you are involved in anaccident.

• Try to relax and then check to make sure youare all right. If you are uninjured, make surethat no one else in your vehicle, or theother vehicle, is injured.

• If there has been an injury, call 911 for help. Donot leave the scene of an accident until allmatters have been taken care of. Move yourvehicle only if its position puts you in danger oryou are instructed to move it by a police officer.

• Give only the necessary and requestedinformation to police and other parties involvedin the accident. Do not discuss your personalcondition, mental frame of mind, or anythingunrelated to the accident. This will help guardagainst post-accident legal action.

• If you need roadside assistance, call GMRoadside Assistance. See RoadsideAssistance Program on page 406 for moreinformation.

• If your vehicle cannot be driven, know wherethe towing service will be taking it. Get a cardfrom the tow truck operator or write down thedriver’s name, the service’s name, and thephone number.

• Remove any valuables from your vehicle beforeit is towed away. Make sure this includes yourinsurance information and registration if youkeep these items in your vehicle.

• Gather the important information you will needfrom the other driver. Things like name,address, phone number, driver’s licensenumber, vehicle license plate, vehicle make,model and model year, Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN), insurance company and policynumber, and a general description of thedamage to the other vehicle.

414

• If possible, call your insurance company fromthe scene of the accident. They will walk youthrough the information they will need. If theyask for a police report, phone or go to the policedepartment headquarters the next day and youcan get a copy of the report for a nominal fee. Insome states/provinces with “no fault” insurancelaws, a report may not be necessary. This isespecially true if there are no injuries and bothvehicles are driveable.

• Choose a reputable collision repair facility foryour vehicle. Whether you select a GM dealeror a private collision repair facility to fix thedamage, make sure you are comfortable withthem. Remember, you will have to feelcomfortable with their work for a long time.

• Once you have an estimate, read it carefullyand make sure you understand what work willbe performed on your vehicle. If you have aquestion, ask for an explanation. Reputableshops welcome this opportunity.

Managing the Vehicle DamageRepair ProcessIn the event that your vehicle requires damagerepairs, GM recommends that you take an activerole in its repair. If you have a pre-determined repairfacility of choice, take your vehicle there, or have ittowed there. Specify to the facility that any requiredreplacement collision parts be original equipmentparts, either new Genuine GM parts or recycledoriginal GM parts. Remember, recycled parts willnot be covered by your GM vehicle warranty.

Insurance pays the bill for the repair, but you mustlive with the repair. Depending on your policylimits, your insurance company may initially valuethe repair using aftermarket parts. Discuss thiswith your repair professional, and insist onGenuine GM parts. Remember if your vehicle isleased you may be obligated to have thevehicle repaired with Genuine GM parts, even ifyour insurance coverage does not pay the full cost.

415

If another party’s insurance company is paying forthe repairs, you are not obligated to accept arepair valuation based on that insurancecompany’s collision policy repair limits, as youhave no contractual limits with that company. Insuch cases, you can have control of the repair andparts choices as long as cost stays withinreasonable limits.

Reporting Safety Defects

Reporting Safety Defects to theUnited States GovernmentIf you believe that your vehicle has a defect whichcould cause a crash or could cause injury ordeath, you should immediately inform the NationalHighway Traffic Safety Administration (NHTSA),in addition to notifying General Motors.

If NHTSA receives similar complaints, it may openan investigation, and if it finds that a safetydefect exists in a group of vehicles, it may order arecall and remedy campaign. However, NHTSAcannot become involved in individual problemsbetween you, your dealer, or General Motors.

To contact NHTSA, you may call the VehicleSafety Hotline toll-free at 1-888-327-4236(TTY: 1-800-424-9153); go tohttp://www.safercar.gov; or write to:

Administrator, NHTSA400 Seventh Street, SW.Washington, D.C. 20590

You can also obtain other information about motorvehicle safety from http://www.safercar.gov.

Reporting Safety Defects tothe Canadian GovernmentIf you live in Canada, and you believe thatyour vehicle has a safety defect, you shouldimmediately notify Transport Canada, in additionto notifying General Motors of Canada Limited.You may call them at 1-800-333-0510 or write to:

Transport CanadaRoad Safety Branch2780 Sheffield RoadOttawa, Ontario K1B 3V9

416

Reporting Safety Defects toGeneral MotorsIn addition to notifying NHTSA (or TransportCanada) in a situation like this, we certainly hopeyou’ll notify us. Please call us at 1-800-762-2737,or write:

Pontiac Customer Assistance CenterP.O. Box 33172Detroit, MI 48232-5172

In Canada, please call us at 1-800-263-3777(English) or 1-800-263-7854 (French). Or, write:

General Motors of Canada LimitedCustomer Communication Centre, CA1-163-0051908 Colonel Sam DriveOshawa, Ontario L1H 8P7

Service Publications OrderingInformation

Service ManualsService Manuals have the diagnosis and repairinformation on engines, transmission, axlesuspension, brakes, electrical, steering, body, etc.

Transmission, Transaxle, TransferCase Unit Repair ManualThis manual provides information on unitrepair service procedures, adjustments, andspecifications for GM transmissions, transaxles,and transfer cases.

Service BulletinsService Bulletins give technical service informationneeded to knowledgeably service GeneralMotors cars and trucks. Each bulletin containsinstructions to assist in the diagnosis and serviceof your vehicle.

In Canada, the service bulletin reference numbercan be obtained by contacting your General Motorsdealer or by calling 1-800-GM-DRIVE(1-800-463-7483). This reference number isneeded to order the service bulletin from Helm, Inc.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $6.00 US + Processing Fee

417

Owner InformationOwner publications are written specifically forowners and intended to provide basic operationalinformation about the vehicle. The owner manualwill include the Maintenance Schedule for allmodels.

In-Portfolio: Includes a Portfolio, Owner Manual,and Warranty Booklet.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $35.00 US+ Processing Fee

Without Portfolio: Owner’s Manual only.

RETAIL SELL PRICE: $25.00 US+ Processing Fee

Current and Past Model Order FormsTechnical Service Bulletins and Manuals areavailable for current and past model GM vehicles.To request an order form, please specify yearand model name of the vehicle.

ORDER TOLL FREE: 1-800-551-4123Monday-Friday 8:00 AM - 6:00 PMEastern TimeFor Credit Card Orders Only(VISA-MasterCard-Discover), visit Helm, Inc. onthe World Wide Web at: www.helminc.com

Or you can write to:

Helm, IncorporatedP.O. Box 07130Detroit, MI 48207

Prices are subject to change without notice andwithout incurring obligation. Allow ample timefor delivery.

Note to Canadian Customers: All listed prices arequoted in U.S. funds. Canadian residents areto make checks payable in U.S. funds.

418

AAccessories and Modifications ..................... 272Accessory Power Outlet(s) .......................... 150Adding Equipment to Your Airbag-Equipped

Vehicle ....................................................... 81Additives, Fuel ............................................ 275Add-On Electrical Equipment ....................... 364Air Cleaner/Filter, Engine ............................. 288Air Conditioning ........................................... 152Airbag

Passenger Status Indicator ....................... 163Readiness Light ....................................... 162

Airbag Sensing and DiagnosticModule (SDM) .......................................... 411

Airbag System ............................................... 63Adding Equipment to Your

Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......................... 81How Does an Airbag Restrain? .................. 72Passenger Sensing System ....................... 74Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ..... 80What Makes an Airbag Inflate? .................. 71What Will You See After an Airbag

Inflates? ................................................. 72When Should an Airbag Inflate? ................. 70Where Are the Airbags? ............................. 66

Antenna, Fixed Mast ................................... 219Antenna, XM™ Satellite Radio

Antenna System ....................................... 219Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) .................... 227Anti-Lock Brake, System Warning Light ....... 167Appearance Care

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 359Care of Safety Belts ................................ 357Chemical Paint Spotting ........................... 361Cleaning Exterior Lamps/Lenses .............. 358Cleaning the Inside of Your Vehicle .......... 354Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 356Finish Care .............................................. 358Finish Damage ......................................... 361Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other

Plastic Surfaces .................................... 357Leather .................................................... 356Sheet Metal Damage ............................... 360Tires ........................................................ 360Underbody Maintenance ........................... 361Vehicle Care/Appearance Materials .......... 362Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 358Weatherstrips ........................................... 358Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ........................................ 359Ashtray(s) .................................................... 151

419

Audio System(s) .......................................... 177Care of Your CD Player ........................... 219Care of Your CDs .................................... 219Fixed Mast Antenna ................................. 219Radio with CD ................................ 179, 188Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 198Setting the Time ...................................... 178Understanding Radio Reception ............... 218XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ...... 219

Automatic Headlamp System ....................... 147Automatic Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 290Operation ................................................. 108

BBattery ........................................................ 309Before Leaving on a Long Trip .................... 244Brake

Anti-Lock Brake System (ABS) ................. 227Emergencies ............................................ 229Panic Assist ............................................. 231Parking .................................................... 114System Inspection .................................... 393System Warning Light .............................. 166

Brakes ........................................................ 306Braking ....................................................... 226

Braking in Emergencies ............................... 229Break-In, New Vehicle ................................. 102Bulb Replacement ....................................... 315

Back-Up Lamps ....................................... 320Center High-Mounted

Stoplamp (CHMSL) ............................... 317Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 315Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and

Parking Lamps ..................................... 316Replacement Bulbs .................................. 320Taillamps, Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ..... 318

Buying New Tires ........................................ 336

CCalifornia Fuel ............................................. 275California Proposition 65 Warning ................ 273Canadian Owners ........................................... 3Capacities and Specifications ...................... 369Carbon Monoxide ............... 96, 119, 248, 261Care of

Safety Belts ............................................. 357Your CD Player ........................................ 219Your CDs ................................................. 219

Cargo Cover ............................................... 129Cargo Tie Downs ........................................ 130CD, MP3 ..................................................... 210

420

Center Console Storage Area ...................... 127Center High-Mounted Stoplamp (CHMSL) .... 317Chains, Tire ................................................. 341Charging System Light ................................ 165Check

Engine Light ............................................ 170Checking Things Under the Hood ................ 280Chemical Paint Spotting .............................. 361Child Restraints

Child Restraint Systems ............................. 43Infants and Young Children ........................ 40Lower Anchors and Tethers for Children ..... 49Older Children ........................................... 37Securing a Child Restraint in a Rear Seat

Position .................................................. 56Securing a Child Restraint in the Right

Front Seat Position ................................. 58Where to Put the Restraint ........................ 47

Cigarette Lighter .......................................... 151Cleaning

Aluminum Wheels .................................... 359Exterior Lamps/Lenses ............................. 358Fabric/Carpet ........................................... 356Finish Care .............................................. 358Inside of Your Vehicle .............................. 354Instrument Panel, Vinyl, and Other Plastic

Surfaces ............................................... 357

Cleaning (cont.)Leather .................................................... 356Tires ........................................................ 360Underbody Maintenance ........................... 361Washing Your Vehicle .............................. 358Weatherstrips ........................................... 358Windshield, Backglass, and

Wiper Blades ........................................ 359Climate Control System ............................... 152

Air Filter, Passenger Compartment ........... 156Outlet Adjustment ..................................... 155

Clock .......................................................... 178Clutch, Hydraulic ......................................... 293Coinholder(s) ............................................... 127Collision Damage Repair ............................. 412Compact Spare Tire .................................... 354Content Theft-Deterrent ............................... 100Control of a Vehicle ..................................... 226Coolant

Engine Temperature Gage ........................ 169Heater, Engine ......................................... 106

Cooling System ........................................... 299Cruise Control ............................................. 143Cruise Control Light .................................... 174Cupholder(s) ................................................ 127

421

Customer Assistance InformationCourtesy Transportation ........................... 409Customer Assistance for Text Telephone

(TTY) Users .......................................... 404Customer Assistance Offices .................... 404Customer Satisfaction Procedure .............. 400GM Mobility Reimbursement Program ...... 405Reporting Safety Defects to

General Motors ..................................... 417Reporting Safety Defects to the

Canadian Government .......................... 416Reporting Safety Defects to the

United States Government .................... 416Roadside Assistance Program .................. 406Service Publications Ordering

Information ........................................... 417

DDaytime Running Lamps ............................. 147Defensive Driving ........................................ 222Disc, MP3 ................................................... 210Doing Your Own Service Work .................... 273Door

Ajar Light ................................................. 175Locks ......................................................... 92

Door (cont.)Power Door Locks ..................................... 94Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 95

DriverPosition, Safety Belt ................................... 24Seat Height Adjuster .................................... 9

DrivingAt Night ................................................... 238City .......................................................... 242Defensive ................................................. 222Drunken ................................................... 223Freeway ................................................... 243Hill and Mountain Roads .......................... 246In Rain and on Wet Roads ...................... 239Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .......... 253Winter ...................................................... 248

EElectrical System

Add-On Equipment ................................... 364Engine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 367Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 365Headlamp Wiring ..................................... 364Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 365

422

Electrical System (cont.)Power Windows and Other Power

Options ................................................. 364Windshield Wiper Fuses ........................... 364

EngineAir Cleaner/Filter ...................................... 288Battery ..................................................... 309Check and Service Engine Soon Light ..... 170Coolant .................................................... 294Coolant Heater ......................................... 106Coolant Temperature Gage ...................... 169Cooling System Inspection ....................... 393Drive Belt Routing .................................... 371Engine Compartment Overview ................ 282Exhaust ................................................... 119Oil ........................................................... 284Overheating ............................................. 297Starting .................................................... 104

Entry Lighting .............................................. 149Event Data Recorders (EDR) ...................... 411Extender, Safety Belt ..................................... 36Exterior Lamps ............................................ 146

FFilter

Engine Air Cleaner ................................... 288Finish Damage ............................................ 361Fixed Mast Antenna .................................... 219Flashers, Hazard Warning ........................... 138Flash-to-Pass .............................................. 141Flat Tire ...................................................... 342Flat Tire, Changing ...................................... 343Flat Tire, Storing ......................................... 351Floor Mats ................................................... 127Fluid

Automatic Transaxle ................................. 290Manual Transaxle ..................................... 292Power Steering ........................................ 304Windshield Washer .................................. 305

Fog Lamps .................................................. 148Folding Seatback, Passenger ........................ 14Fuel ............................................................ 274

Additives .................................................. 275California Fuel .......................................... 275Filling a Portable Fuel Container .............. 279

423

Fuel (cont.)Filling Your Tank ...................................... 277Fuels in Foreign Countries ....................... 276Gage ....................................................... 176Gasoline Octane ...................................... 274Gasoline Specifications ............................ 274Low Warning Light ................................... 177System Inspection .................................... 392

FusesEngine Compartment Fuse Block ............. 367Fuses and Circuit Breakers ...................... 365Instrument Panel Fuse Block ................... 365Windshield Wiper ..................................... 364

GGage

Engine Coolant Temperature .................... 169Fuel ......................................................... 176Speedometer ........................................... 160Tachometer .............................................. 161

GasolineOctane ..................................................... 274Specifications ........................................... 274

Glove Box ................................................... 127GM Mobility Reimbursement Program .......... 405

HHazard Warning Flashers ............................ 138Head Restraints ............................................ 13Headlamp Wiring ......................................... 364Headlamps

Automatic Headlamp System .................... 147Bulb Replacement .................................... 315Daytime Running Lamps .......................... 147Flash-to-Pass ........................................... 141Halogen Bulbs ......................................... 315Headlamps, Front Turn Signal, and

Parking Lamps ..................................... 316High/Low Beam Changer ......................... 140On Reminder ........................................... 146

Heater ......................................................... 152Height Adjuster, Driver Seat ............................ 9Highbeam On Light ..................................... 175Highway Hypnosis ....................................... 245Hill and Mountain Roads ............................. 246Hood

Checking Things Under ............................ 280Release ................................................... 280

Horn ............................................................ 138How to Use This Manual ................................ 4How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............... 23Hydraulic Clutch .......................................... 293

424

IIgnition Positions ......................................... 103Infants and Young Children, Restraints .......... 40Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................... 329Inspection

Brake System .......................................... 393Engine Cooling System ............................ 393Exhaust System ....................................... 392Fuel System ............................................ 392Part C - Periodic Maintenance ................. 392Steering, Suspension and Front Drive

Axle Boot and Seal .............................. 392Throttle System ........................................ 393

Instrument PanelOverview .................................................. 136Storage Area ............................................ 127

Instrument Panel (I/P)Brightness ................................................ 148Cluster ..................................................... 159

Interior Lamps Control ................................. 149

JJump Starting .............................................. 310

KKeyless Entry System ................................... 89Keys ............................................................. 87

LLabeling, Tire Sidewall ................................. 323Lamps

Exterior .................................................... 146Fog .......................................................... 148Interior Control ......................................... 149Reading ................................................... 150

LATCH SystemChild Restraints ......................................... 49

Liftgate/Liftglass ............................................. 96Liftglass/Liftgate ............................................. 96Light

Airbag Readiness ..................................... 162Anti-Lock Brake System Warning ............. 167Brake System Warning ............................. 166Charging System ..................................... 165Cruise Control .......................................... 174Door Ajar ................................................. 175Highbeam On .......................................... 175Lights On Reminder ................................. 174Low Fuel Warning .................................... 177

425

Light (cont.)Low Tire Pressure Warning Light ............. 167Low Washer Fluid Warning ...................... 175Malfunction Indicator ................................ 170Oil Pressure ............................................. 173Overdrive Off ........................................... 174Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............ 163Safety Belt Reminder ............................... 161StabiliTrak® Indicator ................................ 168Taillamp Indicator ..................................... 174TCS Warning Light .................................. 168Traction Control System (TCS) Warning ... 168

LightingEntry ........................................................ 149

Loading Your Vehicle ................................... 253Locks

Door .......................................................... 92Power Door ............................................... 94Rear Door Security Locks .......................... 95

Loss of Control ........................................... 237Low Fuel Warning Light ............................... 177Low Washer Fluid Warning Light ................. 175

MMaintenance, Normal Replacement Parts .... 370Maintenance Schedule

At Each Fuel Fill ...................................... 386At Least Once a Month ............................ 386At Least Once a Year .............................. 388At Least Twice a Year .............................. 387Brake System Inspection .......................... 393Engine Cooling System Inspection ........... 393Exhaust System Inspection ...................... 392Fuel System Inspection ............................ 392How This Section is Organized ................ 374Introduction .............................................. 374Maintenance Requirements ...................... 374Part A - Scheduled Maintenance

Services ............................................... 376Part B - Owner Checks and Services ...... 386Part C - Periodic Maintenance

Inspections ........................................... 392Part D - Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ............................................. 394Part E - Maintenance Record ................... 396Scheduled Maintenance ........................... 377

426

Maintenance Schedule (cont.)Steering, Suspension and Front Drive

Axle Boot and Seal Inspection .............. 392Throttle System Inspection ....................... 393Using ....................................................... 376Your Vehicle and the Environment ............ 374

Malfunction Indicator Light ........................... 170Manual Seats .................................................. 8Manual Transaxle

Fluid ........................................................ 292Operation ................................................. 111

Manual Windows ........................................... 99Mirrors

Automatic Dimming Rearview ................... 122Manual Rearview Mirror ........................... 121Manual Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...... 121Outside Convex Mirror ............................. 123Outside Remote Control Mirrors ............... 122

MP3 ............................................................ 210MyGMLink.com ............................................ 403

NNew Vehicle Break-In .................................. 102Normal Maintenance Replacement Parts ..... 370

OOdometer .................................................... 160Odometers, Trip .......................................... 160Off-Road Recovery ...................................... 234Oil

Engine ..................................................... 284Pressure Light .......................................... 173

Older Children, Restraints ............................. 37Online Owner Center ................................... 403OnStar® System, see OnStar® Manual ........ 123Other Warning Devices ................................ 138Outlet Adjustment ........................................ 155Outlet(s), Accessory Power .......................... 150Outside

Convex Mirror .......................................... 123Remote Controls Mirrors .......................... 122

Overdrive Off ............................................... 111Overdrive Off Light ...................................... 174Owners, Canadian .......................................... 3

427

PPaint, Damage ............................................ 361Panic Brake Assist ...................................... 231Park (P)

Shifting Into ............................................. 115Shifting Out of ......................................... 117

ParkingBrake ....................................................... 114Over Things That Burn ............................ 118

Parking Your Vehicle ................................... 118Part A - Scheduled Maintenance Services ... 376Part B - Owner Checks and Services .......... 386Part C - Periodic Maintenance Inspections .. 392Part D - Recommended Fluids and

Lubricants ................................................ 394Part E - Maintenance Record ...................... 396Passenger Airbag Status Indicator ............... 163Passenger Compartment Air Filter ............... 156Passenger Sensing System ........................... 74Passing ....................................................... 235Power

Accessory Outlet(s) .................................. 150Door Locks ................................................ 94Electrical System ..................................... 364

Power (cont.)Outlet 115 Volt Alternating Current ........... 151Steering Fluid .......................................... 304Windows .................................................... 99

Pretensioners, Safety Belt ............................. 36

QQuestions and Answers About Safety Belts ... 22

RRadiator Pressure Cap ................................ 297Radios ........................................................ 177

Care of Your CD Player ........................... 219Care of Your CDs .................................... 219Radio with CD ................................ 179, 188Radio with Six-Disc CD ............................ 198Setting the Time ...................................... 178Understanding Reception ......................... 218

Reading Lamps ........................................... 150Rear Cargo Accessory Track System .......... 129Rear Door Security Locks ............................. 95Rear Seat Operation ..................................... 16Rear Seat Passengers, Safety Belts .............. 33Rear Storage Area ...................................... 128Rear Windshield Washer/Wiper .................... 142

428

Rearview Mirror, Automatic Dimming ............ 122Rearview Mirror with OnStar® ...................... 121Rearview Mirrors ......................................... 121Reclining Seatbacks ...................................... 10Recreational Vehicle Towing ........................ 259Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System ............ 89Remote Keyless Entry (RKE) System,

Operation ................................................... 90Removing the Flat Tire and Installing the

Spare Tire ................................................ 346Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ............ 344Replacement Bulbs ..................................... 320Reporting Safety Defects

Canadian Government ............................. 416General Motors ........................................ 417United States Government ....................... 416

Restraint System CheckChecking the Restraint Systems ................. 82Replacing Restraint System Parts

After a Crash ......................................... 83Right Front Passenger Position,

Safety Belts ............................................... 32Roadside

Assistance Program ................................. 406

Rocking Your Vehicle to Get it Out .............. 253Routing, Engine Drive Belt .......................... 371Running the Engine While Parked ............... 120

SSafety Belt

Pretensioners ............................................. 36Reminder Light ........................................ 161

Safety BeltsCare of .................................................... 357Driver Position ........................................... 24How to Wear Safety Belts Properly ............ 23Questions and Answers About

Safety Belts ............................................ 22Rear Seat Passengers ............................... 33Right Front Passenger Position .................. 32Safety Belt Extender .................................. 36Safety Belt Use During Pregnancy ............. 32Safety Belts Are for Everyone .................... 18Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster .................... 31

Safety Warnings and Symbols ......................... 4Scheduled Maintenance ............................... 377Seatback, Folding Passenger ........................ 14Seats

Driver Seat Height Adjuster .......................... 9Head Restraints ......................................... 13

429

Seats (cont.)Manual ........................................................ 8Passenger Folding Seatback ...................... 14Rear Seat Operation .................................. 16Reclining Seatbacks ................................... 10

Securing a Child RestraintRear Seat Position ..................................... 56Right Front Seat Position ........................... 58

Service ........................................................ 272Accessories and Modifications .................. 272Adding Equipment to the Outside of Your

Vehicle ................................................. 274California Proposition 65 Warning ............. 273Doing Your Own Work ............................. 273Engine Soon Light ................................... 170Publications Ordering Information ............. 417

Servicing Your Airbag-Equipped Vehicle ......... 80Sheet Metal Damage ................................... 360Shifting Into Park (P) ................................... 115Shifting Out of Park (P) ............................... 117Shoulder Belt Height Adjuster ........................ 31Signals, Turn and Lane-Change .................. 140Spare Tire

Compact .................................................. 354Installing .................................................. 346Removing ................................................ 344Storing ..................................................... 351

Specifications, Capacities ............................ 369Speedometer ............................................... 160StabiliTrak® System ..................................... 231StabiliTrak® Indicator Light ........................... 168Starting Your Engine ................................... 104Steering ...................................................... 232Steering, Suspension and Front Drive Axle

Boot and Seal Inspection ......................... 392Steering Wheel, Tilt Wheel .......................... 139Storage Areas

Center Console Storage Area ................... 127Coinholder(s) ........................................... 127Cupholder(s) ............................................ 127Glove Box ................................................ 127Instrument Panel Storage Area ................. 127Rear Cargo Accessory Track System ....... 129Rear Storage Area ................................... 128

Stuck in Sand, Mud, Ice, or Snow ............... 252Sun Visors .................................................... 99Sunroof ....................................................... 131

TTachometer ................................................. 161Taillamp Indicator Light ................................ 174Taillamps

Turn Signal, and Stoplamps ..................... 318

430

TCS Warning Light ...................................... 168Theft-Deterrent Systems .............................. 100

Content Theft-Deterrent ............................ 100Throttle System Inspection .......................... 393Tilt Wheel .................................................... 139Time, Setting ............................................... 178Tires ........................................................... 322

Aluminum Wheels, Cleaning ..................... 359Buying New Tires ..................................... 336Chains ..................................................... 341Changing a Flat Tire ................................ 343Cleaning .................................................. 360Compact Spare Tire ................................. 354Different Size ........................................... 337If a Tire Goes Flat ................................... 342Inflation - Tire Pressure ............................ 329Inspection and Rotation ............................ 333Installing the Spare Tire ........................... 346Pressure Monitor System ......................... 330Removing the Flat Tire ............................. 346Removing the Spare Tire and Tools ......... 344Storing a Flat or Spare Tire and Tools ..... 351Tire Sidewall Labeling .............................. 323Tire Terminology and Definitions ............... 326Uniform Tire Quality Grading .................... 338Wheel Alignment and Tire Balance ........... 339Wheel Replacement ................................. 340

Tires (cont.)When It Is Time for New Tires ................. 335

TowingRecreational Vehicle ................................. 259Towing a Trailer ....................................... 261Your Vehicle ............................................. 259

TractionControl System (TCS) .............................. 230Control System Warning Light .................. 168StabiliTrak® System ................................. 231

TransaxleFluid, Automatic ....................................... 290Fluid, Manual ........................................... 292

Transaxle Operation, Automatic ................... 108Transaxle Operation, Manual ....................... 111Trip Odometers ........................................... 160Turn and Lane-Change Signals ................... 140Turn Signal/Multifunction Lever .................... 139

UUnderstanding Radio Reception ................... 218Uniform Tire Quality Grading ....................... 338

431

VVehicle

Control ..................................................... 226Damage Warnings ....................................... 5Loading .................................................... 253Parking Your ............................................ 118Symbols ...................................................... 5

Vehicle Data Collection and Event DataRecorders ................................................ 411

Vehicle IdentificationNumber (VIN) .......................................... 363Service Parts Identification Label .............. 363

Ventilation Adjustment .................................. 155Visors ........................................................... 99

WWarning Lights, Gages and Indicators ......... 158Warnings

Hazard Warning Flashers ......................... 138Other Warning Devices ............................ 138Safety and Symbols ..................................... 4Vehicle Damage .......................................... 5

Washer Fluid, Low Warning Light ................ 175

WheelsAlignment and Tire Balance ..................... 339Different Size ........................................... 337Replacement ............................................ 340

Where to Put the Restraint ............................ 47Windows ....................................................... 98

Manual ...................................................... 99Power ........................................................ 99

WindshieldBackglass, and Wiper Blades, Cleaning ... 359Washer .................................................... 142Washer Fluid ........................................... 305Wiper Blade Replacement ........................ 321Wiper Fuses ............................................ 364Wipers ..................................................... 141

Windshield, Rear Washer/Wiper ................... 142Winter Driving ............................................. 248

XXM Radio Messages ................................... 216XM™ Satellite Radio Antenna System ......... 219

YYour Vehicle and the Environment ............... 374

432

Date post:	10-Jul-2018
Category:	Documents
Upload:	vuonganh
View:	222 times
Download:	0 times

2007 Pontiac Vibe Owner Manual M - GenVibe - Community … · How to Use This Manual Many people...

Documents